2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for unin-
tentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought
to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and I am pleased to say that all questions in ‘Tatva’ come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts who compiled relevant content for you so that you come
out with flying colours in IIT JEE/NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the
effectiveness and relevance of this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

* We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter after
revision and Practice of basic questions.
* For daily practice of questions, we strongly recommend attempting session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
* Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise
concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually clear
all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
* Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at a
time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have solved Tatva
questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a major
boost to your confidence.
* First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
* Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
* Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Sushmitha M D
encouragement in every step: Harish Rao Akshatha J
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Bhavya Bangera J Charubak Chakrabarti
Shraddha R Shetty
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’,
steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making this dream into a reality:
Sahil Bhatia Sudhanshu Jain
Shubam Gupta Ajay Mittal
Arshad Shahid Jaideep Sontakke

Mathematics Team
Our true appreciation for all the Master Teachers of Assistant Teachers
Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us in Mohammed Siddiqui Priyadharshini R
accomplishing this vision into reality. Our heartfelt Jyoti Garg Pravin S Rathore
gratitude to our creative content developers, and the Anjulika Gupta Sukamal Chatterjee
DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights, Pankaj Gupta
eagerness to execute and nurture Tatva into ‘your SME
ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning Nikhil Goyal(Team Lead) Aman Bhartiya
experience to you. Vipul Sachdeva Ritesh Khatri
DTP
Raman Kumar
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty and Mohamed Anzar.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STRAIGHT LINES

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 16

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 30

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 36

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 41

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 48

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 160

CIRCLES

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 52

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 58

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 76

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 82

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 86

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 94

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 162

 7

CONIC SECTIONS

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 100

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 112

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 128

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 135

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 144

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 152

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 164

STRAIGHT LINES
 Chapter 01 9

STRAIGHT LINES

1. DISTANCE FORMULA æ ax + bx 2 + cx 3 ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 ö

Incentre, I º ç 1 , ÷ and
è a +b+c a +b+c ø
The distance between the points A(x1,y1) and B(x2,y2) is
2 2
Excentre (to A) I1
x1 - x 2 + y1 - y 2 .
æ - ax 1 + bx 2 + cx 3 - ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 ö
ºç , ÷ and so on.
2. SECTION FORMULA è -a +b+c -a +b+c ø

The P(x,y) divides the line joining A(x1,y1) and B(x2,y2) in NOTES :
the ratio m : n, then ;
(i) Incentre divides the angle bisectors in the ratio,
mx 2 + nx 1 my 2 + ny1
x= ;y= (b+c): a; (c+a) : b & (a+b) : c.
m+n m+n
(ii) Incentre and excentre are harmonic conjugates of each
NOTES : other w.r.t. the angle bisector on which they lie.
(iii) Orthocentre, Centroid & Circumcentre are always
(i) If m/n is positive, the division is internal, but if m/n is collinear & centroid divides the line joining orthocentre
negative, the division is external. & circumcentre in the ratio 2:1.
(ii) If P divides AB internally in the ratio m:n & Q divides AB (iv) In an isosceles triangle G, O, I & C lie on the same line
externally in the ratio m:n then and in an equilateral traingle, all these four points
P & Q are said to be harmonic conjugate of each other coincide.
w.r.t. AB. (v) Centroid divides median internally in ratio 2 : 1.
2 1 1 (vi) Area of a triangle is four times the area of the triangle
Mathematically, = + i.e. AP, AB & AQ are
AB AP AQ formed by joining the mid points of its sides.
in H.P.
(vii) Bisector of an angle of a triangle divides the opposite
(iii) If P is mid point of AB then coordinates of P will be side in the ratio of the sides containing the angle.
æ x1 + x2 y1 + y2 ö (viii) Circumcentre of a right angled triangle is mid point of
ç 2 ,
è 2 ÷ø hypotaneous.
(ix) Orthocentre of a right angled triangle ABC, right
angled at A is A.
3. CENTROID, INCENTRE, EXCENTRE, CIRCUMCENTRE
& ORTHOCENTRE
4. AREA OF TRIANGLE
If A(x1, y1), B(x2,y2), C(x3,y3) are the vertices of triangle ABC,
If A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2), C(x3, y3) are the vertices of triangle
whose sides BC, CA, AB are of lengths a, b, c respectively,
ABC, then its area is equal to
then the co-ordinates of the special points of triangle ABC
are as follows :
x1 y1 1
1
æ x + x 2 + x 3 y1 + y 2 + y 3 ö DABC = x2 y 2 1 , provided the vertices are
Centroid, G º ç 1 , ÷ 2
è 3 3 ø x3 y3 1

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
10

considered in the counter clockwise sense. x = X cosq – Y sinq

The above formula will give a (–)ve area if the vertices y = X sinq + Y cosq
(x1, y1), i = 1, 2, 3 are placed in the clockwise sense. X = x cosq + y sinq
Y = –x sinq + y cosq
NOTES :

Area of n-sided polygon formed by points NOTES :

(x1, y1); (x2, y2); ............(xn, yn) is given by : Formula can be remembered using this table:

1æ x1 x2 x2 x3 xn -1 xn xn x1 ö
ç + + ............ + ÷ x y
2è y1 y2 y2 y3 yn -1 yn yn y1 ø
X cos θ sin θ
Y – sin θ cosθ
5. SHIFTING OF ORIGIN
7. LOCUS
Origin is shifted to (h, k) without rotation of axes.
The curve traced by a point which move under given
conditions is called locus.
Steps to find equation of locus:
(i) Assume coordinates of moving point to be (h, k).
(ii) If required introduce parameters corresponding to
variability in the question.
(iii) Write the given conditions in mathematical form
involving h and k.
(iv) Eliminate the variables (Parameters) if any.
X = x – h and Y = y – k
(v) Replace ‘h’ by ‘x’ and ‘k’ by ‘y’ in the result obtained in
step iv. The equation thus obtained is equation of locus.
6. ROTATION OF AXES

Axes are rotated through an angle q about origin. 8. SLOPE FORMULA

If q is the angle at which a straight line is inclined to the

positive direction of x-axis, and 0° £ q <180°, q ¹ 90°, then
the slope of the line, denoted by m, is defined by
m = tan q. If q is 90°, m doesn’t exist, but the line is parallel
to the y-axis, If q = 0, then m = 0 and the line is parallel to the
x-axis.
If A(x1, y1) & B(x2, y2), x1 ¹ x2, are points on a straight
line, then the slope (m) of the line is given by :

æ y - y2 ö
m = çç 1 ÷÷
è x1 - x 2 ø

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
11

9. CONDITION OF COLLINEARITY OF THREE (vii) Parametric form : P(r)= (x,y) = (x1 +r cosq, y1+r sinq) or
POINTS x - x 1 y - y1
= = r is the equation of the line in parametric
cos q sin q
Points A (x1,y1), B(x2,y2), C(x3,y3) are collinear if :
form, where ‘r’ is the parameter whose absolute value is the
æ y - y2 ö æ y 2 - y3 ö
(i) mAB = mBC = mCA i.e. ç 1 ÷÷ = ç ÷ distance of any point (x,y) on the line from fixed point (x1,y1)
çx -x ç ÷
è 1 2 ø è x 2 - x3 ø
on the line.

x1 y1 1 (viii) General Form : ax + by + c = 0 is the equation of a straight

(ii) Area of DABC = 0 i.e. x 2 y2 1 = 0 a
x3 y3 1 line in the general form. In this case, slope of line = - .
b

(iii) AC = AB + BC or any one side equals to the sum of other

two sides. 11. ANGLE BETWEEN TWO STRAIGHT LINES
(iv) A divides the line segment BC in some ratio. IN TERMS OF THEIR SLOPES

10. EQUATION OF A STRAIGHT LINE IN VARIOUS If m1 and m2 are the slopes of two intersecting straight
FORMS lines (m1m2 ¹ –1) and q is the acute angle between them,

(i) Point-Slope form : y – y1 = m(x – x1) is the equation of a m1 - m 2

then tan q = .
straight line whose slope is m and which passes through 1 + m1 m 2
the point (x1,y1).
(ii) Slope-Intercept form : y = mx + c is the equation of a straight
line whose slope is m and which makes an intercept c on NOTES :
the y-axis.
Let m1, m2, m3 are the slopes of three line L1=0; L2=0; L3=0
y - y1
(iii) Two point form : y - y1 = 2 (x – x1) is the equation of where m1> m2> m3 then the interior angles of the DABC found
x 2 - x1
by these lines are given by,
a straight line which passes through the points (x1,y1) &
(x2,y2) m1 - m2 m - m3 m - m1
tan A = ; tan B = 2 ; and tan C = 3
(iv) Determinant form : Equation of line passing through (x1,y1) 1 + m1m2 1 + m2 m3 1 + m3 m1

x y 1
and (x2,y2) is x 1 y1 1 = 0 12. POSITION OF THE POINT (x1,y1) RELATIVE OF
x2 y2 1
THE LINE ax + by + c = 0

x y If ax1 + by1 + c is of the same sign as c, then the point (x1, y1)
(v) Intercept form : + = 1 is the equation of a straight line
a b lie on the origin side of ax + by + c = 0. But if the sign of
which makes intercepts a & b on OX & OY respectively. ax1 + by1 + c is opposite to that of c, the point (x1,y1) will lie
(vi) Perpendicular/Normal form : xcos a + y sin a = p on the non-origin side of ax + by + c = 0.
(where p > 0, 0 £ a < 2p) is the equation of the straight line
In general two points (x1,y1) and (x2,y2) will lie on same side
where the length of the perpendicular from the origin O on
the line is p and this perpendicular makes an angle a with or opposite side of ax+by+c=0 according as ax1+ by1+ c
positive x-axis. and ax2 + by2 + c are of same or opposite sign respectively.

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
12

13. THE RATIO IN WHICH A GIVEN LINE DIVIDES c1 - c 2

ax + by + c2 = 0 is
THE LINE SEGMENT JOINING TWO POINTS a 2 + b2
Let the given line ax + by + c = 0 divides the line Coefficient of x & y in both the equations must be same.
segment joining A(x 1,y1) and B(x 2,y2) in the ratio m:n,
p1p 2
m ax + by1 + c (iv) The area of the parallelogram = , where p1 and p2 are
then =- 1 . If A and B are on the same Sin q
n ax 2 + by 2 + c
side of the given line then m/n is negative but if A and
B are on opposite sides of the given line, then m/n is
positive.

14. LENGTH OF PERPENDICULAR FROM

A POINT ON A LINE

The length of perpendicular from P(x 1 ,y 1 ) on

ax 1 + by1 + c distance between two pairs of opposite sides and q is the

ax + by + c = 0 is
a 2 + b2 angle between any two adjacent sides. Note that area of
the parallogram bounded by the lines y=m1x+ c1, y=m1x+c2.
and y = m 2x + d 1 , y= m 2 x + d 2 is given by
15. REFLECTION OF A POINT ABOUT A LINE
(c1 - c 2 ) (d 1 - d 2 )
(i) The image of a point (x1,y1) about the line ax + by + c = 0 is : m1 - m 2

x - x1 y - y1 æ ax + by + c ö
= = -2 ç 1 2 1 2 ÷
a b è a +b ø 17. PERPENDICULAR LINES
(ii) Similarly foot of the perpendicular from a point on the (i) When two lines of slopes m1 & m2 are at right angles, the
line is :
product of their slope is –1 i.e., m1m2 = –1. Thus any line
x - x1 y - y1 - (ax1 + by1 + c) perpendicular to y = mx + c is of the form.
= =
a b a2 + b2
1
y= – x + d, where d is any parameter..
m
16. PARALLEL LINES
(ii) Two lines ax + by + c = 0 and a´x + b´y+ c´ = 0 are
(i) When two straight lines are parallel their slopes are equal. perpendicular if aa’ + bb’ = 0. Thus any line perpendicular
Thus any line parallel to y = mx + c is of the type to ax + by + c = 0 is of the form bx – ay + k = 0, where k is any
y = mx + d, where d is parameter.
parameter.
(ii) Two lines ax+ by+ c=0 and a´x +b´y +c´ = 0 are parallel if :
a b c 18. STRAIGHT LINES MAKING ANGLE
= ¹
a´ b´ c´ a WITH GIVEN LINE
Thus any line parallel to ax+ by+ c =0 is of the type
ax+ by+ k =0, where k is a parameter. The equation of lines passing through point (x 1,y 1 )
(iii) The distance between two parallel lines with equations and making angle a with the line y = mx + c are given
ax + by+ c1 =0 and by (y – y 1) = tan (q – a) (x – x 1 )
& (y – y 1) = tan (q + a)(x – x 1), where tan q = m.

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
13

(i) If q be the angle between one of the lines & one of the
19. CONDITION OF CONCURRENCY
bisectors, find tan q. if |tan q| <1, then 2q < 90° so this
Three lines a 1 x+ b 1 y+ c 1 =0, a 2x+ b 2 y+ c 2 =0 and bisector is the acute angle bisector. if |tan q| >1, then we get
a3x+ b3y+ c3=0 are concurrent if the bisector to be the obtuse angle bisector
(ii) Let L1=0 & L2=0 are the given lines & u1=0 and u2=0 are
a1 b1 c1 bisectors between L1=0 and L2=0. Take a point P on any
a2 b2 c2 = 0 one of the lines L1=0 or L2=0 and drop perpendicular on
u1=0 and u2=0 as shown. If.
a3 b3 c3
| p | < | q | Þ u1 is the acute angle bisector.
Alternatively : If three constants A, B and C (not all zero) | p | > | q | Þ u1 is the obtuse angle bisector.
can be found such that A (a1x +b1y +c1) + B (a2x + b2y +c2)
| p | = | q | Þ the lines L1 and L2 are perpendicular.
+ C (a3x +b3y + c3) º 0, then the three straight lines are
concurrent. (iii) If aa´+ bb´ < 0, then the equation of the bisector of acute
angle is

20. BISECTOR OF THE ANGLES BETWEEN ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´

=+
TWO LINES 2
a +b 2
a´2 + b´2

Equations of the bisectors of angles between the lines If, however, aa´ + bb´ > 0, then the equation of the bisector
ax + by + c = 0 and a´x+ b´y+ c´ =0 (ab’ ¹ a’ b) are : of acute angle is :

ax + by + c a´x + b´y + c´ ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´

=± =–
2 2 2 2 2 2
a +b a´ + b´ a +b a´2 + b´2

The other equation represents the obtuse angle bisector in

NOTES : both cases.
Equation of straight lines through P(x1,y1) & equally inclined
with the lines a1x+ b1y+ c1=0 and a2x +b2y +c2=0 are those 22. TO DISCRIMINATE BETWEEN THE BISECTOR
which are parallel to the bisector between these two lines & OF THE ANGLE CONTAINING A POINT
passing throught the point P.
To discriminate between the bisector of the angle
containing the origin & that of the angle not containing the
21. METHODS TO DISCRIMINATE BETWEEN THE
origin. Rewrite the equation, ax + by + c = 0 & a´x + b´y +
ACUTE ANGLE BISECTOR AND THE OBTUSE c´ = 0 such that the constant term c, c’ are positive. Then ;
ANGLE BISECTOR
ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´
=+ gives the equation of the
2 2
a +b a´2 + b´2
bisector of the angle containing origin and

ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´
p =- gives the equation of the
2 2
a +b a´2 + b´2
bisector of the angle not containing the origin. In general
equation of the bisector which contains the point (a, b) is.
ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´ ax + by + c a´x + b´ y + c´
= or =-
2 2 2 2 2 2
a +b a´ +b´ a +b a´2 +b´2

according as aa + bb + c and a´a +b´b + c´ having same

sign or opposite sign.

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
14

(ii) If y = m1x & y = m2x be the two equations represented by

23. FAMILY OF STRAIGHT LINES
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0, then;
The equation of a family of straight lines passing through
the points of intersection of the lines, 2h a
m1 + m2 = - and m1m2 =
L1 º a1x + b1y +c1=0 & L2 º a2x + b2y +c2=0 is given by b b
L1 + kL2 = 0 i.e.
(iii) If q is the acute angle between the pair of straight lines
(a1x + b1y +c1) + k(a2x + b2y +c2) =0, where k is an arbitrary represented by,
real number.

NOTES : 2 h 2 - ab
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 =0, then; tan q =
a+b
(i) If u 1= ax+by+c, u 2= a´x+b´y+d, u 3 = ax+by+c´,
u4= a´x+b´y+d´, then u1= 0; u2= 0; u3= 0; u4= 0; form a (iv) The condition that these lines are :
parallegoram
(a) At right angles to each other is a + b = 0 i.e.
co-efficient of x2 + co-efficient of y2 = 0
(b) Coincident is h2 = ab.
(c) Equally inclined to the axis of x is h =0 i.e. coeff. of xy = 0.
(v) The equation to the pair of straight lines bisecting the
angle between the straight lines,

The diagonal BD can be given by u2u3– u1u4=0 x 2 - y 2 xy

ax2 + 2hxy + by2 =0, is =
a-b h
Proof : Since it is a first degree equation in x & y, it is a
straight line. Secondly point B satisfies u 2 = 0 and
u1 = 0 while point D satisfies u3 = 0 and u4 = 0. Hence the NOTES :
result. Similarly, the diagonal AC can be given by u1u2–
A homogeneous equation of degree n represents n
u3u4 = 0
straight lines passing through origin.
(ii) The diagonal AC is also given by u1 + lu 4=0 and
u2+mu3 = 0, if the two equation are identical for some real
25. GENERAL EQUATION OF SECOND DEGREE
l and m.
REPRESENTING A PAIR OF STRAIGHT LINES
[For getting the values of l and m compare the coefficients
of x, y & the constant terms.] (i) ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents a pair of
straight lines if :
24. A PAIR OF STRAIGHT LINES THROUGH ORIGIN
a h g
(i) A homogeneous equation of degree two, ‘‘ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0’’
always represents a pair of straight lines passing through abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0, i.e. if h b f =0
g f c
the origin, if :
(a) h2 > ab Þ lines are real and distinct.
(ii) The angle q between the two lines represented by a general
(b) h2 = ab Þ lines are coincident. equation is the same as that between two lines represented
2
(c) h < ab Þ lines are imaginary with real point of by its homogenous part only.
intersection i.e. (0,0)

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES
15

26. HOMOGENIZATION NOTES :

The equation of a pair of straight lines joining origin to the Equation of any curve passing through the points of
points of intersection of the line intersection of two curves C 1=0 and C2=0 is given by
lC1 + mC2 =0 where l and m are parameters.
L º lx + my + n =0 and a second degree curve,
S º ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is

æ lx + my ö
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx ç ÷+
è -n ø

2
æ lx + my ö æ lx + my ö
2 f yç ÷ + cç ÷ =0
è -n ø è -n ø

The equation is obtained by homogenizing the equation of

curve with the help of equation of line.

SCAN CODE
Straight Lines
STRAIGHT LINES 16

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example – 1 2 2
Now PQ = x 2 - x1 + y 2 - y1
Using distance formula show that the points
(–1, 2), (5, 0) and (2, 1) are collinear. = x 2 - x1
2
+ 0 = x 2 - x1
Sol. Let the given points (–1, 2), (5, 0) and (2, 1) be denoted by A,
B and C, respectively.

2 2
Now AB = 5 - -1 + 0-2 = 36 + 4 = 2 10

2 2
BC = 2 - 5 + 1- 0 = 9 + 1 = 10

2 2
CA = -1 - 2 + 2 - 1

= 9 + 1 = 10
It is clear that BC + CA = AB.
Example – 3
Hence A, B and C are collinear.
Find a point on the line-segment joining points (0, 4) and
Example – 2 (2, 0) and dividing the line-segment (i) internally in ratio
2 : 3, (ii) externally in ratio 3 : 2.
Find the distance between P(x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) when (i)
Sol. (i) Here the points are (0, 4) and (2, 0) and the division is
PQ is parallel to the y-axis. (ii) PQ is parallel to the
internal in the given ratio 2 : 3. From the figure the coordinates
x-axis.
of point P are
Sol. (i) In this case x1 = x2.
æ 2.2 + 3.0 2.0 + 3.4 ö æ 4 12 ö
Now PQ = x 2 - x1
2
+ y 2 - y1
2
ç 2 + 3 , 2 + 3 ÷ or ç5, 5 ÷
è ø è ø

2
= 0 + y 2 - y1 = y 2 - y1

(ii) Here the ratio is 3 : 2 and the division is external as

shown in figure.

From figure, the coordinates of point P are

(ii) In this case, y1 = y2 æ 3.2 - 2.0 3.0 - 2.4 ö

ç , ÷ or 6, - 8 .
è 3- 2 3- 2 ø
STRAIGHT LINES 17

Example – 4 Example – 6

Find the ratio in which the line joining (2, –3) and (5, 6) is The ends AB of a straight line segment of constant length
divided by (i) the x-axis, (ii) the y-axis. c slide upon the fixed rectangular axes OX and OY
Sol. Let P(x, y) divides the join of A(2, –3) and B (5, 6) in the ratio respectively. If the rectangle OAPB be completed, then
k : 1. show that the locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn
from P to AB is x2/3 + y2/3 = c2/3.
Sol. Let A º (a, 0), B º (0, b) then P º (a, b)
Since AB = c

a 2 + b2 = c
or a2 + b 2 = c2 ... (1)
and let Q º (x1, y1)
æ 5k + 2 6k - 3 ö
The co-ordinates of P are ç , ÷
è k +1 k +1 ø

(i) Since P lies on x-axis, so y-co-ordinate is zero.

6k - 3 1
i.e., = 0, Þ 6k - 3 = 0 Þ k =
k +1 2
1
Hence P divides in the ratio :1 i.e., 1 : 2 internally..
2
(ii) Since P lies on y-axis, so x-co-ordinate is zero.
Q PQ ^ AB
\ slope of PQ × slope of AB = – 1
5k + 2 -2
i.e., = 0, Þ 5k + 2 = 0 Þ k =
k +1 5 æ b - y1 ö æ b - 0 ö
Þ çç ÷÷ ´ ç ÷ = -1
Hence P divides externally in the ratio 2 : 5. è a - x1 ø è 0 - a ø

Þ ax1 – by1 = a2 – b2 ... (2)

Example – 5
x y
Q Equation of AB is + =1
Find the equation of the locus of a point equidistant from a b
the points A(1, 3) and B(–2, 1).
x 1 y1
Sol. Let P(x, y) be any point on the locus and let A(1, 3) and B(– but Q lies on AB then + =1
a b
2, 1) be the given points.
Þ bx1 + ay1 = ab ... (3)
By the given condition.
From (2) and (3), we get
PA = PB
or PA2 = PB2 a3 b3
x1 = , y 1 =
a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
or (x – 1)2 + (y – 3)2 = (x + 2)2 + (y – 1)2
or x2 + 1 – 2x + y2 – 6y + 9 (a 2 + b 2 )
Now, x12 / 3 + y12 / 3 =
= x2 + 4 + 4x + y2 + 1 – 2y (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 / 3

or 6x + 4y = 5 = (a2 + b2)1/3 = c2/3 [from (1)]

which is the equation of the required locus that is a straight Hence required locus is x2/3 + y2/3 = c2/3.
line.
STRAIGHT LINES 18

Example – 7 Example – 9

The slope of a line is double of the slope of another line. If If the angle between two lines is p/4 and slope of one of
tangent of the angle between them is 1/3, find the slopes the lines is 1/2, find the slope of the other line.
of the lines. Sol. If q be the acute angle between two lines with slopes, m1
Sol. Let the slopes of the two given lines be m and 2 m and q be and m2, then
the angle between them,
Then according to question m 2 - m1
tan q = ...(i)
1 + m1 m 2
1
tan q =
3 1 p
Now m1 = , m = m and q =
Now, 2 2 4
Now from (i)
m - m1
tan q = 2
1 + m1 m 2 1 1
m- m-
p 2 2
tan = Þ 1=
1 2m - m 1 m - 2m 4 1+ 1 m 1
or = or = 1+ m
3 1 + 2m 2
3 1 + 2m 2 2 2

or 1 + 2m2 = 3m 1 + 2m2 = –3m

or 2m2 – 3m + 1 = 0 2m2 + 3m + 1 = 0 1 1
m- m-
Þ 2 = 1 or 2 = -1
or 2m2 – 2m – m + 1 = 0 1 1
1+ m 1+ m
2m2 + 2m + m + 1 = 0 2 2
or 2m(m – 1) –1 (m – 1) = 0
2m(m + 1) +1(m + 1) = 0 1
Þ m = 3 or m = -
3
or (m – 1) (2m –1) = 0
(m + 1) (2m +1) = 0 1
Hence, the slope of the other line is 3 or - .
3
1 1
or m = 1, m = m = -1, m = -
2 2 Example – 10
Hence, the slopes of the lines are
Without using the Pythagoras theorem, show that the
æ1 ö æ -1 ö points (4, 4), (3, 5) and (–1, –1) are the vertices of a right
ç , 1÷ or ç , - 1÷ angled triangle.
è2 ø è 2 ø
Sol. Let the vertices be A(4, 4), B(3, 5) and C(–1, –1).
Example – 8 5-4 1
Slope of AB, m1 = = = -1
3 - 4 -1
What are the slope of the lines whose inclinations from
positive direction of X–axis are :
-1 - 5 -6 3
(i) 60° (ii) 0° (iii) 150° (iv) 120° Slope of BC, m2 = = =
-1 - 3 -4 2
Sol. (i) Slope = tan 60° = 3
-1 - 4
(ii) Slope = tan 0° = 0 Slope of AC, m3 = =1
-1 - 4
1 Now m1m3 = –1 × (1) = –1
(iii) Slope = tan 150° = – cot 60° = - .
3 Thus AB ^ AC or Ð A = 90°.
Hence D ABC is a right angled triangle.
(iv) Slope = tan 120° = – cot 30° = – 3 .
STRAIGHT LINES 19

Example – 11 Example – 12

Using the concept of slope, show that (–2, –1), (4, 0) If the points (1, 1), (a, 0), (0, b) are collinear, show that
(3, 3) and (–3, 2), are vertices of a parallelogram.
1 1
Sol. Let A, B, C and D be the points (–2, –1), (4, 0) (3, 3) and + =1.
a b
(–3, 2), respectively. We have
Sol. As the points (1, 1), (a, 0) and (0, b) are collinear, area formed
by the triangle with these vertices is zero.
0 - -1 1
Slope of AB, = =
4 - -2 6; 1
i.e., [ 1 (0 – b) + a (b – 1) + 0 (1 – 0)] = 0
2
or, – b + ab – a = 0
3-0
Slope of BC, = = -3 ;
3-4 - b ab a
or, + - =0
ab ab ab
3-2 1 [Dividing both sides by ab]
Slope of CD, = =
3 - -3 6
1 1
or, - +1- = 0
a b
2 - -1
Slope of DA, = -3 .
-3 - -2 1 1
or, + =1
a b
We note that the slope of AB and BC are different and
Example – 13
therefore points A, B and C are not collinear. Also, points A,
D and C are not collinear. Thus, the given points form a A straight line through the point (2, 2) intersects the lines
quadrilateral. 3x + y = 0 and 3x - y = 0 at the points A and B. The
equation to the line AB so that the DOAB is equilateral, is
(a) x – 2 = 0 (b) y – 2 = 0
(c) x + y – 4 = 0 (d) None of these
Ans. (b)

Sol. 3x + y = 0 makes an angle of 120º with OX

and 3x - y = 0 makes an angle 60º

with XO.
So the required line is y – 2 = 0
Example – 14

Determine the equation of the line passing through the

point (–1, –2) and having slope 4/7.
Also, the slope of AB = Slope of CD, i.e., AB is parallel to CD Sol. We are given that
and the slope of BC = Slope of DA, i.e., BC is parallel to DA. x1 = –1, y1 = –2 and m = 4/7
Thus, opposite sides of the quadrilateral ABCD are parallel.
Substituting these values in the point-slope form of the
Hence, the given four points constitute the vertices of a equation of a line, we get
parallelogram. y – (–2) = 4/7 [ x – (–1)]
or 7(y + 2) = 4(x + 1) or 7y = 4x –10
which is the required equation of the line.
STRAIGHT LINES 20

Example – 15 Let m be the slope of a line making an angle of 45° with AC

Find the equation of the line which satisfies the given 5

conditions : m-
Hence, tan 45° = 2
(i) Passing through (2, 2) and inclined to x-axis at 45° 5
1 + m.
(ii) Intersecting x-axis at a distance of 3 units to the left 2
of the origin with slope –2.
(iii) Intersecting the y-axis at a distance of 2 units above 5
the origin and making an angle of 30° with the m-
2 = ±1
positive direction of x-axis. Þ 5m
1+
Sol. (i) The slope of the given line = tan 45° = 1 2
The required equation of line is
Þ 2m – 5 = ± (2 + 5m)
y-2 Þ 2m – 5 = 2 + 5m
=1
x-2 Þ 3m = –7
Þy– 2 = x – 2 Þ x – y = 0. Þ m = –7/3
(ii) Since the line intersects the x-axis at a distance of 3 and 2m – 5 = –(2 + 5m)
units to the left of the origin i.e., it passes through Þ 7m = 3
(–3, 0). Also its slope = –2 [Given]
Þ m = 3/7
The required equation of line is
Let slope of AD be –7/3.
y-0 Þ Slope of CD = 3/7
= -2
x - -3 Equation of AD is y – 4 = –7/3 (x – 3)
Þ y = –2(x + 3) Þ 2x + y + 6 = 0. Þ 7x + 3y – 33 = 0 ...(i)
(iii) Since the line intersects the y-axis at a distance of 2 Equation of CD is y + 1 = 3/7 (x – 1)
units above the origin i.e., it passes through (0, 2). Þ 3x – 7y – 10 = 0 ...(ii)
1 Solving (i) and (ii), we get
Also its slope = tan 30° = .
3
x y 1
The required equation of line is = =
-30 - 231 -99 + 70 -49 - 9
y-2 1
= -261 9
x -0 3 Þ x= =
-58 2
Þ 3y - 2 3 = x i.e., x - 3y + 2 3 = 0 .
-29 1
and y= =
Example – 16 -58 2

Two opposite vertices of a square are (3, 4) and (1, –1). æ9 1ö

Find the coordinates of the other vertices. Coordinates of D are ç , ÷
è2 2ø
Sol. Let squares has the vertices A(3, 4), B(x1, y1), C(1, –1) and
D(x2, y2). M is mid-point of BD and AC both

4 - -1 5 æ x1 + 9 / 2 y1 + 1/ 2 ö æ 3 + 1 4 + -1 ö
Slope of AC = = Hence ç , ÷=ç 2 , ÷
3 -1 2 è 2 2 ø è 2 ø

2x1 + 9 2y1 + 1 3
Þ = 2, =
4 4 2

–1 5
Þ x1 = , y1 =
2 2

æ -1 5 ö
Coordinates of B are ç , ÷
è 2 2ø
STRAIGHT LINES 21

Example – 17 Example – 18

Find the ratio in which the line segment joining the points The vertices of triangle PQR are P(2, 1), Q (–2, 3)
(2, 3) and (4, 5) is divided by the line joining the points (6,
and R(4, 5). Find equation of the median through the vertex
8) and (–3, –2).
R.
Sol. The equation of the line joining the points (6, 8) and
(–3, –2) is Sol. Given : P (2, 1), Q (–2, 3) and R (4, 5).

-2 - 8 Mid point of PQ is
y -8 = x -6
-3 - 6
æ 2 + -2 1 + 3 ö
10 ç , ÷ = 0, 2
Þ y -8 = x -6 è 2 2 ø
9

Þ 9y – 72 = 10x – 60
Þ 10x – 9y + 12 = 0 ...(i)
Let this line divided the join of (2, 3) and (4, 5) at the point P
in the ratio of k : 1.
Then the coordinates of P are

æ 4k + 2 5k + 3 ö
ç , ÷
è k +1 k +1 ø

Now the point P lies on the line (i),

Now we have to find the equation of median passing through
æ 4k + 2 ö æ 5k + 3 ö
i.e., 10. ç ÷ - 9ç ÷ + 12 = 0 R i.e., of line AR
è k +1 ø è k +1 ø
Now equation of line in two-point form is
Þ 40k + 20 – 45k – 27 + 12k + 12 = 0
Þ 7k = –5
y 2 - y1
Þ k = –5/7 y - y1 = x - x1
x2 - x 1

5-2
Þ y-2 = x-0
4-0

3
Þ y-2= x-0
4

Þ 4y – 8 = 3x

Þ 3x– 4y + 8 = 0
Since the value of k is negative, the line is divided externally.
The required ratio is 5 : 7 externally.
STRAIGHT LINES 22

Example – 19
3h
Therefore, a= and b = 3k.
Find the equations of the lines which cut off intercepts on 2
the axes whose sum and product are 1 and –6, respectively. Now using intercept form, equation of the line AB is
Sol. Let the intercepts on x-axis and y-axis be a and b, respectively,
so that x y x y
+ =1 or + =1
a b 3h 3k
a+b=1 ...(i)
2
and ab = – 6 ...(ii)
Eliminating a from (i) and (ii), we get 2x y
+ =3
Þ 2
–b +b= –6 h k
Þ b2 – b – 6 = 0 2kx + hy = 3kh
(Required equation)
1 ± 1 + 24 1 ± 5
Þ b= =
2 2 Example – 21

i.e. either b = 3 Find the equation of a line which passes through the point
or b=–2 (–2, 3) and makes angle 60° with the positive direction of
when b = –2, a = 3 x-axis.

and when b = 3, a = –2. Sol. The equation of the line in symmetric form is

Thus, by the intercept form the equations of the lines are

x y x y
+ =1 or + =1
3 -2 -2 3

i.e., 2x – 3y – 6 = 0 or 3x – 2y + 6 = 0

Example – 20

Point R(h, k) divides a line-segment between the axes in

the ratio 1 : 2. Find the equation of the line.
y - y1 x - x 1
Sol. As shown in the figure AB is the required line and A is =
sin q cos q
(a, 0) and B is (0, b). R divides AB in the ratio 1 : 2.
Substituting x1 = –2, y1 = 3 and q = 60°, we get

y-3 x - -2
=
sin 60° cos 60°

y-3 x+2
or =
3 1
2 2

2a + 0 2a or 3x - y + 3 + 2 3 = 0 .
Thus h = =
1+ 2 3
This is the required equation of the line.
2´ 0 + b b
and k= =
1+ 2 3
STRAIGHT LINES 23

Example – 22 Example – 24

Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of the line Given the triangle with vertices A(10, 4), B(–4, 9),
segment joining the points A(2, 3) and B (6, –5). C(–2, –1). Find the equation of the altitude through B.
Sol. The slope of AB is given by Sol. The given vertices are A(10, 4), B(–4, 9), C(–2, –1).

é y 2 - y1 ù -1 - 4 -5 5
-5 - 3 Slope of AC = = =
m= = -2 ê U sin g m = ú -2 - 10 -12 12
6-2 ë x 2 - x1 û
The altitude through B is perpendicular of AC. Let m be the
The slope of a line ^ to slope of the altitude through B.

1 1 5 12
AB = - = Hence m ´ = -1 Þ m = -
m 2 12 5

The equation of the altitude through B(–4, 9) is

12
Let P be the mid-point of AB. Then the coordinates of P are y-9 = - x - -4
5

æ 2+6 3-5ö [Using y – y1 = m(x – x1)]

ç , ÷ i.e., 4, - 1
è 2 2 ø Þ 5y – 45 = –12 x – 48
Thus, the required line passes through P(4, –1) and has Þ 12x + 5y + 3 = 0
slope 1/2. So its equation is
y + 1 = 1/2 (x – 4) Example – 25

The perpendicular from the origin to a line meets it at the

[Using y – y1 = m (x – x1)] point (–2, 9). Find the equation of the line.
Þ x – 2y – 6 = 0. Sol. The perpendicular from the origin O(0, 0) meets the line AB
at A(–2, 9)
Example – 23

Find the equation of the line passing through (–3, 5) and

perpendicular to the line through the points (2, 5) and
(–3, 6).
Sol. The required line passes through A(–3, 5) and is perpendicular
to the line through the points B(2, 5) and C(–3, 6).

6-5 1 9 9
m BC = =- Hence, m OA = =-
-3 - 2 5 -2 2
Slope of required line = 5. 2
Þ m AB =
Now equation of line in point-slope form is 9
y – y1 = m(x – x1) Now, equation of the line will be
y – 5 = 5(x + 3) 2
y-9 = x+2
y – 5 = 5x + 15 9
5x – y + 20 = 0. 2x – 9y + 85 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 24

Example – 26 Example – 27

Find the equations of the straight lines passing through Find the equations to the straight lines passing through
the point (2, 3) and inclined at p/4 radians to the line the point (2, 3) and equally inclined to the lines
2x + 3y = 5. 3x – 4y – 7 = 0 and 12x – 5y + 6 = 0.
Sol. Let the line 2x + 3y = 5 make an angle q with positive Sol. Let m be the slope of the required line. Then its equation is
x–axis.
y – 3 = m (x – 2) ... (1)

2 It is given that line (1) is equally inclined to the lines

Then tan q = -
3
3x – 4y – 7 = 0 and 12x – 5y + 6 = 0 then

p 2 2
Now tan q.tan = - ´1 = - ¹ ± 1 æ 3 ö æ 12 ö
4 3 3 ç -m ÷ ç -m ÷
ç 4 ÷ = -ç 5 ÷
Þ
ç 1+ 3 m ÷ ç 1 + 12 m ÷
Slopes of required lines are ç ÷ ç ÷
è 4 ø è 5 ø

æ pö æ pö
tan ç q + ÷ and tan ç q - ÷
è 4 ø è 4ø
æ 3 ö
ç slope of 3x - 4 y - 7 = 0 is ÷
ç 4 ÷
ç and slope of 12x - 5y + 6 = 0 is 12 ÷
ç ÷
æpö æ 2ö è 5ø
tan q + tan ç ÷ ç - ÷ +1
æ pö è ø = è 3ø
4 1
\ tan ç q + ÷ = =
è 4ø æpö æ 2ö 5
1 - tan q tan ç ÷ 1 - ç - ÷ (1)
4
è ø è 3 ø
æ 3 - 4m ö æ 12 - 5m ö
Þ ç ÷=-ç ÷
è 4 + 3m ø è 5 + 12m ø

Þ (3 – 4m) (5 + 12m) + (4 + 3m) (12 – 5m) = 0

æpö æ 2ö
tan q - tan ç ÷ ç - ÷ -1
æ pö è 4ø 3ø 63m2 – 32m – 63 = 0
and tan ç q - ÷ = = è = -5 Þ
è 4ø p
æ ö æ 2ö
1 + tan q tan ç ÷ 1 + ç - ÷ (1) Þ (7m – 9) (9m + 7) = 0
è4ø è 3ø

9 7
\ m= ,-
\ Equations of required lines are 7 9

1 Putting these values of m in (1) we obtain the equations of

y-3 = ( x - 2) and y – 3 = – 5 (x – 2)
5 required lines as 9x – 7y + 3 = 0 and 7x + 9y – 41 = 0.

i.e., x – 5y + 13 = 0 and 5x + y – 13 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 25

Example – 28 Example – 29

Find the distance of the point (2, 5) from the line

3p
3x + y + 4 = 0, measured parallel to a line having slope 3/4. A line through (2, 3) makes an angle with the negative
4
Sol. Let PQ be the distance of the given point P(2, 5) from the line direction of x–axis. Find the length of the line segment cut
3x + y + 4 = 0, measured parallel to a line having slope 3/4. off between (2, 3) and the line x + y – 7 = 0.
3 3p
Let tan q = . Sol. Q Line makes an angle with the negative direction of
4 4
x–axis.

p
\ Line makes an angle with the positive direction of
4
x–axis.
\ The equation of the line through (2, 3) in parametric
form is

As q lies in the first quadrant

We have sin q = tan q cos q

tan q 3/ 4 3
= = =
sec q 1 + 9 /16 5

1
and cos q = cos q. .sin q
sin q
x-2 y-3
4 3 4 = =r
= cot q sin q = ´ = æpö æpö
3 5 5 cosç ÷ sin ç ÷
è4ø è4ø
x - x1 y - y1
Using = =r, the equation of PQ is x -2 y-3
cos q sin q = =r
i.e., 1 1 ... (1)
x -2 y -5 2 2
= =r
4/5 3/ 5
r r
\ x = 2+ and y = 3 +
4 3 2 2
or x = 2 + r, y = 5+ r
5 5
Let the line (1) meet the line x + y – 7 = 0 in P
æ 4 3 ö æ r r ö
Let the coordinates of Q be ç 2 + r, 5 + r ÷ \ Co-ordinates of P çç 2 + ,3+ ÷÷ lies on
è 5 5 ø è 2 2ø
This point lies on 3x + y + 4 = 0. x+y– 7 =0

4 ö æ 3 ö r r
æ then 2+ +3+ -7 = 0
Þ 3ç 2 + r ÷ + ç 5 + r ÷ + 4 = 0 2 2
è 5 ø è 5 ø

Þ 3r = –15 2r
or =2
Þ r = –5 2

Required distance PQ = 5 units. or r= 2

AP = 2
STRAIGHT LINES 26

Example – 30 Example – 32

Two sides of a square lie on the lines x + y = 1 and Find the equations of straight lines through point (2, 3)
x + y + 2 = 0. What is its area? and having an intercept of length 2 units between the
Sol. Clearly the length of the side of the square is equal to the straight lines 2x + y = 3, 2x + y = 5.
distance between the parallel lines Sol. Given lines are parallel and distance between them < 2
x+y– 1 =0 ...(i) Given lines are
and x + y+2 = 0 ...(ii) 2x + y = 3 ... (1)
Now, distance between the parallel lines and 2x + y = 5 ... (2)
Equation of any line through (2, 3) is
0 -1- 2 3 3 y – 3 = m (x – 2)
= = =
12 + 12 2 2
or y = mx – 2m + 3 ... (3)
Let line (3) cut lines (1) and (2) at A and B respectively.
3
Thus, the length of the side of the square is Solving (1) and (3), we get
2
æ 2m 6 - m ö
2 Aºç , ÷
æ 3 ö 9 èm+2 m+2ø
and hence its area = ç ÷ = .
è 2ø 2
and solving (2) and (3), we get
Example – 31
æ 2m + 2 m + 6 ö
Bºç , ÷
Find the distance between parallel lines : è m+2 m+2ø
(i) 15x + 8y – 34 = 0 and 15x + 8y + 31 = 0 According to question AB = 2
(ii) l(x + y) + p = 0 and lx + ly – r = 0 Þ (AB)2 = 4
Sol. (i) 15x + 8y – 34 = 0 2 2
æ 2 ö æ 2m ö
and 15x + 8y + 31 = 0 Þ ç ÷ +ç ÷ =4
è m+2ø è m+2ø
Now A = 15, B = 8, C1 = –34, C2 = 31
Þ 1 + m2 = m2 + 4m + 4 ... (4)
C1 - C 2 Case I : When m is finite (line is not perpendicular to
Distance between parallel lines, d =
A 2 + B2 x–axis) then from (4).
1 = 4m + 4
-34 - 31 65
= = 3
2
15 + 8 2 17 \ m=-
4
(ii) l(x + y) + p = 0 Case II : When m is infinite (line is perpendicular to
x–axis) then from (4),
lx + ly – r = 0.
Now A = l, B = l, C1 = p, C2 = –r 1 4 4
+1 = 1+ + 2
m2 m m
C1 - C 2
Distance between parallel line , d = 0+1=1+0+0
A 2 + B2
1 = 1 which is true
p+r p+r 1 p+r Hence m ® ¥ acceptable.
= = = .
l2 + l2 2l 2 l Hence equation of the required lines are

3 y -3
y - 3 = - ( x - 2) and = x -2Þ x– 2 = 0
4 ¥
i.e., 3x + 4y = 18 and x – 2 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 27

Example – 33 x2 (tan2 + cos2 ) – 2xy tan + y2 sin2 = 0 ... (1)

Find the equation of the bisector of the obtuse angle and general equation of second degree

between the lines 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x + 5y – 2 = 0. ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 ... (2)

Sol. Firstly make the constant terms (c1 and c2) positive Comparing (1) and (2), we get

3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and –12x – 5y + 2 = 0 a = tan2 + cos2 

 a1a2 + b1b2 = (3) (–12) + (–4) (–5) = – 36 + 20 = – 16 h = – tan 

 a1a2 + b1b2 < 0 and b = sin2 

Hence “–” sign gives the obtuse bisector. Let separate lines of (2) are

y = m1x and y = m2x

(3x  4 y  7) (12 x  5y  2)
 Obtuse bisector is  where m1 = tan1 and m2 = tan 2
(3) 2  (4) 2 (12) 2  (5) 2

2h 2 tan 
 13 (3x – 4y + 7) = – 5 (–12x – 5y + 2) therefore, m1  m 2   
b sin 2 
 21x + 77y – 101 = 0

is the obtuse angle bisector. tan 2   cos 2 

and m1 m 2 
sin 2 
Example – 34

The family of lines x (a + 2b) + y (a + 3b) = a + b passes through  | m1 - m2 |= (m1 + m 2 ) 2 - 4m1m2

a fixed the point for all values of a and b. Find the point.

Sol. The given equation can be written as

4tan 2 θ 4 (tan 2 θ + cos 2 θ)
 | tanθ1 - tanθ2 |= -
a (x + y – 1) + b (2x + 3y – 1) = 0 sin 4 θ sin 2 θ
which is equation of a line passing through the point of
intersection of the lines x + y – 1 = 0 and 2x + 3y – 1 = 0.
2
 tan 2   sin 2  (tan 2   cos 2 )
The point of intersection of these lines is (2, –1). Hence sin 2 
the given family of lines passes through the point (2, –1)
for all values of a and b. 2 sin 
 (sec 2   tan 2   cos 2 )
sin 2 
Example – 35

Show that the difference of tangent of the angles made by two 2 sin  2
 (1  cos 2 )  sin 
straight lines x2 (tan2 + cos2 ) – 2xy tan + y2 sin2 = 0 sin 2  sin 

with the axis of ‘x’ is 2.

=2
Sol. The given equation is
STRAIGHT LINES 28

Example – 36 Example – 37

If a < p/4, Find the acute angle between the lines If the slope of one of the lines represented by
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 be the nth power of the other, then
(x2 + y2) sin2 a = (x cos b – y sin b)2
1 1

Sol. Given equation is prove that (ab n ) n +1 + (a n b) n +1 + 2h = 0.

(x2 + y2) sin2 a = (x cos b – y sin b)2 Sol. Let m and mn be the slopes of the lines represented by
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0
x2 (sin2 a – cos2 b) + 2xy sin b cos b + y2 (sin2 a – sin2 b) = 0 ... (1)

The general equation of second degree is 2h

then m + mn = - ... (1)
b
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 ... (2)

Comparing (1) and (2), we get a

and m.m n =
b
a = sin2 a – cos2 b, h = sin b cos b, b = sin2a – sin2b

Let the angle between the lines representing by (1) is q a

or m n +1 =
b

h 2 - ab
\ tan q = 2 1
|a+b| æ a ö ( n +1)
or m=ç ÷ ... (2)
èbø

Substituting the value of m from (2) in (1), then

sin 2 b cos 2 b - (sin 2 a - cos 2 b) (sin 2 a - sin 2 b)
=2
| sin 2 a - cos 2 b + sin 2 a - sin 2 b | 1 æ n ö
ç ÷
æ a ö ( n +1) æ a ö è n +1 ø 2h
ç ÷ +ç ÷ =-
b
è ø b
è ø b

1 n n 1
{sin 2 b cos 2 b - sin 4 a + sin 2 a sin 2 b Þ a n +1 . b n +1 + a n +1 . b n +1 + 2h = 0
+ sin 2 a cos 2 b - sin 2 b cos 2 b}
=2
| (2 sin 2 a - 1) | Corollary : If slope of one line is square of the other, then
put n = 2 then

1 1
(ab 2 ) 3 + (a 2 b) 3 = -2h
sin 2 a (1 - sin 2 a )
=2 Cubing both sides then
| - cos 2a |

1 1 1 1
æ ö
2 sin a cos a ab 2 + a 2 b + 3(ab 2 ) 3 (a 2 b) 3 ç (ab 2 ) 3 + (a 2 b) 3 ÷ = -8h 3
= = tan 2a ç ÷
| - cos 2a | è ø

Þ ab (a + b) + 3ab (–2h) = – 8h3

q = 2a
(a + b) 8h 2
Þ + = 6.
h ab
STRAIGHT LINES 29

Example – 38 Hence equation of bisectors of the angle between the pair

of the lines (1) is
Find the equation of the bisectors of the angle between
the lines represented by 3x2 – 5xy – 4y2 = 0. x 2 - y2 xy
=
Sol. Given equation is 3+ 4 -5/2
3x2 – 5xy – 4y2 = 0 ... (1)
x 2 - y 2 2xy
Comparing it with the equation Þ =
7 -5
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 ... (2)
Þ 5x2 + 14xy – 5y2 = 0
5
then a = 3, h = - , b = – 4
2
STRAIGHT LINES 30

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Distance Formula 9. C is a point on the line segment joining A(–3, 4) and
B (2, 1) such that AC = 2 BC then coordinates of C are
1. Four points (0, -1), (6, 7), (-2, 3) and (8, 3) are the vertices of
a
æ1 ö æ 1ö
(a) square (b) rectangle (a) ç , 2 ÷ (b) ç 2, ÷
è3 ø è 3ø
(c) rhombus (d) None of these.
(c) (2, 7) (d) (7, 2)
2. The points A(2a, 4a), B(2a, 6a) and
10. The ratio in which the line x + y = 4 divides the line joining
C(2a + 3 a, 5a)(a > 0) are the vertices of the points (–1, 1) and (5, 7) is 1: a then a =

(a) an equilateral triangle 11. P and Q are points on the line joining A(-2, 5) and B(3, 1)
(b) an isosceles obtuse angled triangle such that AP = PQ = QB then the mid point of PQ is -

(c) a right-angled triangle (a) (1/2, 3) (b) (-1/2, 4)

(d) none of these. (c) (2, 3) (d) (1, 4)

3. If the distance between the points (x, 2) and (3, 4) is 2, then Important Terms Related to Triangles
the value of x is
4. The x coordinate of point whose abscissa is equal to its 12. If (1, 4) is the centroid of a triangle and two vertices are
ordinate and which is equidistant from A (5, 0) and B (0, 3) (4, –3) and (–9, 7), then third vertex is
is (a) (8, 7) (b) (7, 8)
5. The points (1, 1), (–2, 7) and (3, –3) (c) (8, 8) (d) (6, 8)
(a) form a right angled triangle 13. The incentre of the triangle formed by the lines
(b) form an isosceles triangle y = 15, 12y = 5x and 3x + 4y = 0 is
(c) are collinear (a) (8, 1) (b) (–1, 8)
(d) none of the above (c) (1, 8) (d) None of these
Section Formula 14. The vertices of a triangle are (6, 0), (0, 6) and (6, 6). The
square of distance between its circumcentre and centroid
6. The y coordinate of point which divides the line segment
is
joining points A (0, 0) and B (9, 12) in the ratio 1 : 2, are
15. If orthocentre and circumcentre of a triangle are
7. The ratio in which the line segment joining the points
respectively (1, 1) and (3, 2), then the coordinates of its
(3, –4) and (–5, 6) is divided by the x-axis, is
centroid are
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2
(c) 6 : 4 (d) none of these æ7 5ö æ5 7ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç , ÷
8. A point which divides the joint of (1, 2) and (3, 4) externally è 3 3ø è3 3ø
in the ratio 1 : 1
(c) (7, 5) (d) none of these
(a) lies in the first quadrant
16. If the vertices P, Q, R of a DPQR are rational points, which
(b) lies in the second quadrant
of the following point(s) of the D PQR is not always
(c) lies in third quadrant rational?
(d) cannot be found (a) centroid (b) incentre
(c) circumcentre (d) orthocentre
STRAIGHT LINES 31
17. In a DABC, if A is the point (1, 2) and equations of the 26. The locus of a point which moves such that the line
median through B and C are respectively x + y = 5 and segment having end points (2, 0) and (–2, 0) subtend a
x = 4, then x coordinate of B is right angle at that point
(a) x + y = 4 (b) x2 + y2 = 4
Area of Triangle and Quadrilateral
(c) x2 – y2 = 4 (d) none of these
18. If the vertices of a triangle are (1, 2), (4, –6) and (3, 5), and 27. If O is the origin and Q is a variable point on y2 = x. Find the
its area is A, find value of 2A locus of the mid-point of OQ.

19. The area of triangle formed by the lines y = x, y = 2x and (a) 2y2 = x (b) y2 = x
y = 3x + 4 is (c) y2 = 2x (d) none of these

20. The area of the quadrilateral with vertices at 28. Let A(2, –3) and B(–2, 1) be vertices of a triangle ABC. If
(4, 3), (2, –1), (–1, 2), (–3, 2) is the centroid of this triangle moves on 2x + 3y = 1, then the
locus of the vertex C is the line
21. If the points (a, –1), (2, 1) and (4, 5) are collinear. Then, the
(a) 3x + 2y = 5 (b) 2x – 3y = 7
value of a is
(c) 2x + 3y = 9 (d) 2x – 2y = 3
22. Area of the region enclosed by lines y = x + 10,
29. If P º (1, 0), Q º (–1, 0) and R º (2, 0) be three given points,
y = -x + 10, y = x - 10, and y = - x - 10 is
then the locus of the point S satisfying the relation SQ2 +
(a) 100 sq. units (b) 200 sq. units SR2 = 2SP2 is
(c) 10 sq. units (d) None of these. (a) a straight line parallel to x-axis

Transformation of Axes (b) a circle passing through the origin

(c) a circle with the centre at the origin
23. If the axes are transformed from origin to the point (–2, 1), (d) a straight line paralle to y-axis
then new coordinates of (4, –5) are
30. The locus of a point, whose abscissa and ordinate are
(a) (2, 6) (b) (6, 4) always equal is
(c) (6, –6) (d) (2, –4) (a) x + y = 0 (b) x – y = 0
24. Keeping the origin constant, axes are rotated at an angle (c) x + y = 1 (d) x + y + 1 = 0
30° in negative direction, if then new coordinates of the 31. The locus of the equation xy = 0 is
point are (2, 1) then its coordinate with respect to old axis (a) a straight line
are
(b) a pair of perpendicular lines
(c) a hyperbola
æ 2 3 +1 2 3 ö æ 2 3 + 1 -2 + 3 ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) çç , ÷÷ (d) None of these
ç 2 2 ÷ø è 2 2 ø
è
32. The locus of the equation x2 – 5x + 6 = 0 is
(a) the empty set
æ 2+ 3 3 ö
(c) çç , ÷ (d) none of these (b) a set containing two distinct points
è 2 2 ÷ø
(c) a pair of parallel lines

Locus (d) none of these

Slope and Angle Between Two Lines

25. The locus represented by the point (x, y) with coordinates

x = 5 cos q + 3 sin q & y = 5 sin q – 3 cos q is x 2 + y 2 = l 33. If A (–2, 1), B (2, 3) and C (–2, –4) are three points, then the

then the value of l is æaö

angle between BA and BC is tan -1 ç ÷ , then a =
è3ø
STRAIGHT LINES 32

34. Slope of a line is not defined if the line is 42. The equation of the line which passes through the point
(3, 4) and the sum of its intercept on the axes is 14 is
(a) parallel to X-axis
(a) 4x – 3y = 24, x – y = 7
(b) parallel to the lines x – y = 0
(b) 4x + 3y = 24, x + y = 7
(c) parallel to the lines x + y = 0
(c) 4x + 3y + 24 = 0, x + y + 7 = 0
(d) parallel to Y-axis
(d) 4x – 3y + 24 = 0, x – y + 7 = 0
35. The equation of a line through the point (–4, –3) and parallel
43. If the intercept made by the line between the axes is
to x-axis, is
bisected at the point (x1, y1), then its equation is
(a) y = 3 (b) y = –3
(c) y = 0 (d) y = 4 x y x y
(a) + =2 (b) x + y = 1
x 1 y1 1 1
Equation of a Straight Line
x y 1
36. A line has slope – 3/4, positive y-intercept and forms a (c) + = (d) none of these
x 1 y1 2
triangle of area 24 sq. units with coordinate axes. Then,
the equation of the line is 44. A straight line L is drawn perpendicular to the line 5x–y=1.
(a) 3x + 4y + 24 = 0 (b) 3x + 4y – 24 = 0 The ar ea of the tri angle fo rmed b y the line L and
co-ordinates axes is 5, then the equation of line, is :
(c) 3x + 4y – 25 = 0 (d) 3x + 4y + 25 = 0
37. The line joining two points A (2, 0); B (3, 1) is rotated (a) x + 5y = ± 5 (b) x + 5 y = ± 2
about A in the anticlockwise direction through an angle of
(c) x + 5y = ± 5 2 (d) none of these
15o. The equation of the line in the new position is :
45. If the foot of the perpendicular from the origin to a straight
(a) x - 3 y - 2 = 0 (b) x – 2y – 2 = 0 line is at the point (3, –4). Then, the equation of the line is
(a) 3x – 4y = 25 (b) 3x – 4y + 25 = 0
(c) 3x - y - 2 3 = 0 (d) none
(c) 4x + 3y – 25 = 0 (d) 4x – 3y + 25 = 0
38. Equation of a straight line passing through the origin and 46. The length of the perpendicular from the origin to a line is
making with x–axis an angle twice the size of the angle 7 and the line makes an angle of 150° with the positive
made by the line y = 0.2 x with the x–axis, is x = l y then direction of y axis. The equation of the line is :

the value of l is (a) 3x + y = 14 (b) 3x - y = 14

39. A line is drawn through the points (3, 4) and (5, 6). If the
(c) 3 x + y + 14 = 0 (d) 3x - y + 14 = 0
line is extended to a point whose ordinate is –1, then the
absolute value of abscissa of that point is 47. A square of side a lies above the x-axis and has one vertex
40. The equation of the line which passes through the point at the origin. The side passing through the origin makes an
(1, –2) and cuts off equal intercept from the axes is æ pö
angle a ç 0 < a < ÷ with the positive direction of x-axis.
(a) x + y = 1 (b) x – y = 1 è 4ø
(c) x + y + 1 = 0 (d) x – y – 2 = 0 The equation of its diagonal not passing through the origin
41. Two points (a, 0) and (0, b) are joined by a straight line. is
Another point on this line is (a) y (cos a – sin a) – x (sin a – cos a) = a

(a) (3a, –2b) (b) (a2, ab) (b) y (cos a + sin a) + x (sin a – cos a) = a

(c) (–3a, 2b) (d) (a, b) (c) y (cos a + sin a) + x (sin a + cos a) = a
(d) y (cos a + sin a) + x (cos a – sin a) = a
STRAIGHT LINES 33
54. The line passing through (1, 1) and parallel to the line
48. Let P = (–1, 0), Q = (0, 0) and R = (3,3 3) be three points.
2x – 3y + 5 = 0
The equation of the bisector of the angle PQR is
(a) 3x + 2y = 5 (b) 2x – 3y + 1 = 0
3 (c) 3x – 2y = 1 (d) 2x + 3y = 0
(a) 3x + y = 0 (b) x + y=0
2
55. A line passes through (2, 2) and is perpendicular to the
line 3x + y = 3. Its y-intercept is
3
(c) x+y=0 (d) x + 3y = 0 (a) –4 (b) 4/3
2
(c) –4/3 (d) None of these
49. The perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining
P(1, 4) and Q(k, 3) has y-intercept – 4. Then, a possible 56. The equation of a line parallel to ax + by + c = 0 and
value of k is passing through the point (c, d) is
(a) –4 (b) 1 (a) a (x + c) – b(y + d) = 0
(c) 2 (d) –2 (b) a (x + c) + b (y + d) = 0
50. If the straight line through the point P(3, 4) makes an angle (c) a (x – c) + b (y – d) = 0

p (d) none of these

with x-axis and meets the line 12x + 5y + 10 = 0 at Q.
6 57. The number of lines that are parallel to 2x + 6y – 7 = 0 and
have an intercept 10 units between the coordinate axes is
Then the length of PQ is -
Angle Between Two Lines
132 132
(a) (b)
12 3 + 5 12 3 - 5 58. The equation of two straight lines through (7, 9) and making

an angle of 60° with the line x - 3y - 2 3 = 0 is :

132
(c) (d) None of these
3 -5
(a) x = 7, x + 3y = 7 + 9 3

Position of a Point w.r.t. a Line (b) x = 3 , x + 3y = 7 + 9 3

51. If x + 2y = 3 is a line and A (–1, 3); B (2, –3); C (4, 9) are three
(c) x = 7, x - 3 y = 7 + 9 3
points, then :
(a) A is on one side and B, C are on other side of the line (d) x = 3 , x - 3 y = 7 + 9 3
(b) A, B are on one side and C is on other side of the line
59. The equations of the lines through (–1, –1) and making
(c) A, C are on one side and B is on other side of the line angles 45° with the line x + y = 0 are
(d) All three points are on one side of the line (a) x + 1 = 0, x – y = 0

Lines Parallel and Perpendicular to a Given Line (b) x – y = 0, y + 1 = 0

(c) x + y + 2 = 0, y + 1 = 0
52. The line passing through (0, 1) and perpendicular to the
line x – 2y + 11 = 0 is (d) x + 1 = 0, y + 1 = 0

(a) 2x – y + 1 = 0 (b) 2x – y + 3 = 0 60. The lines 2x – 3y = 5 and 6x – 9y – 7 = 0 are

(c) 2x + y – 1 = 0 (d) 2x + y – 2 = 0 (a) perpendicular
53. If a line is drawn through the origin and parallel to the line (b) parallel
x – 2y + 5 = 0, then its eq. is (c) intersecting but not perpendicular
(a) x – 2y – 5 = 0 (b) 2x + y = 0
(d) coincident
(c) x + 2y = 0 (d) x – 2y = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 34

61. The acute angle between the lines y = 2x and y = –2x is Concurrency of Lines

(a) 45° (b) less than 60°

69. Given the four lines with equations x + 2y – 3 = 0,
(c) greater than 60° (d) None of these 2x + 3y – 4 = 0, 3x + 4y – 5 = 0, 4x + 5y – 6 = 0, then these
62. The sides AB, BC, CD and DA of a quadrilateral have the lines
equations x + 2y = 3, x = 1, x – 3y = 4, 5x + y + 12 = 0 (a) are concurrent
respectively, then the angle between the diagonals AC and (b) are the sides of a quadrilateral
BD is : (c) are the sides of a parallelogram
(a) 60° (b) 45° (d) none of these
(c) 90° (d) none of these 70. Three straight lines 2x + 11y – 5 = 0, 24x + 7y – 20 = 0 and
63. The equation of two equal sides of an isosceles triangle are 4x – 3y – 2 = 0
7x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y –3 = 0 and its third side passes (a) form a triangle
through the point (1, –10). The equation of the third side is (b) are only concurrent
(a) x –3y – 31 = 0 but not 3x + y + 7 = 0 (c) are concurrent with one line bisecting the angle
(b) neither 3x + y + 7 = 0 nor x – 3y – 31 = 0 between the other two
(c) 3x + y + 7 = 0 or x – 3y – 31 = 0 (d) None of the above

(d) 3x + y + 7 = 0 but not x – 3y – 31 = 0 71. The lines x + 2y – 3 = 0, 2x + y – 3 = 0 and the line l are
concurrent. If the line l passes through the origin, then its
Perpendicular Distance and Distance Between Parallel Lines
equation

64. A non-horizontal line passing through the point (4, –2) (a) x – y = 0 (b) x + y = 0
whose distance from origin is 2 units is (c) x + 2y = 0 (d) 2x + y = 0
(a) 3x + 4y – 10 = 0 (b) x + y – 2 = 0 Family of Lines
(c) 4x + 3y – 10 = 0 (d) 2x + 3y – 2 = 0
72. The equation of a line through the point of intersection of
65. The equation of the base of an equilateral triangle is the lines x – 3y + 1 = 0 and 2x + 5y – 9 = 0 and whose
x + y = 2 and the vertex is (2, –1). Length of its side is l then
distance from the origin is 5 is
1
equals (a) 2x + y – 5 = 0 (b) 2x – y + 5 = 0
l2
(c) 2x + y – 10 = 0 (d) 2x – y – 10
66. The distance between the lines 5x – 12y + 65 = 0 and
73. The equation of the straight line which passes through
5x – 12y – 39 = 0 is the intersection of the lines x – y – 1 = 0 and
67. The lines 8x + 4y = 1, 8x + 4y = 5, 4x + 8y = 3, 4x + 8y = 7 form a 2x – 3y + 1 = 0 and is parallel to x-axis, is
(a) rhombus (b) rectangle (a) y = 3 (b) y = –3

(c) square (d) none of these (c) x + y = 3 (d) none of these

68. The coordinates of a point on x + y + 3 = 0, whose 74. The equation of the straight line which passes through
the point of intersection of the straight lines x + 2y = 5 and
distance from x + 2y + 2 = 0 is 5 is equal to -
3x + 7y = 17 and is perpendicular to the straight line
(a) (9, 6) (b) (-9, 6) 3x + 4y = 10, is

(c) (-9, -6) (d) None of these (a) 4x + 3y + 2 = 0 (b) 4x – y + 2 = 0

(c) 4x – 3y – 2 = 0 (d) 4x – 3y + 2 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 35
75. A line passes through the point of intersection of the lines 81. The point (–1, 1) and (1, –1) are symmetrical about the line
100x + 50y – 1 = 0 and 75x + 25y + 3 = 0 and makes equal (a) y + x = 0 (b) y = x
intercepts on the axes. Its equation is
(c) x + y = 1 (d) none of these
(a) 25x + 25y – 1 = 0 (b) 5x – 5y + 3 = 0
(c) 25x + 25y – 4 = 0 (d) 25x – 25y + 6 = 0 82. A ray of light along x + 3y = 3 gets reflected upon

76. For the family of straight lines bx + ay = ab, which one is reaching x-axis, the equation of the reflected ray is
not correct.
(a) y = x + 3 (b) 3y = x - 3
(a) It will be x–axis if a ¹ 0, b = 0
(b) It will represent concurrent lines passing through fixed (c) y = 3x - 3 (d) 3y = x -1
point (a, 0), a ¹ 0
Pair of Straight Lines
(c) It will represent parallel lines if b/a is fixed, a ¹ 0
(d) It will represent y–axis if a ¹ 0, b = 0 83. If one of the lines of my2 + (1 – m2) xy – mx2 = 0 is a bisector
of the angle between the lines xy = 0, then m is
Optics Based Problems
1
77. Assuming that the line x – 3y + 4 = 0 is working as a mirror (a) - (b) –2
2
for the point (1, 2) then the coordinates of the image is
(c) ± 1 (d) 2
æ1 2ö æ 2 3ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç , ÷ Miscellaneous
è5 5ø è5 5ø
84. The lines x + y = |a| and ax – y = 1 intersect each other in the
æ3 6ö æ6 7ö first quadrant. Then, the set of all possible values of a in
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷
è5 5ø è5 5ø the interval
78. The image of the point (2, 1) with respect to the line mirror (a) (–1, 1] (b) (0, ¥)
be (5, 2). Then the equation of the mirror is - (c) (1, ¥) (d) (–1, ¥)
(a) 3x + y - 12 = 0 (b) 3x - y + 12 = 0 85. Let a, b, c and d be non-zero numbers. If the point of
(c) 3x + y + 12 = 0 (d) 3x - y - 12 = 0 intersection of the lines 4ax + 2ay + c = 0 and
5bx + 2by + d = 0 lies in the fourth quadrant and is
79. The image of the point A (1, 2) by the line mirror y = x is the
equidistant from the two axes then :
point B and the image of B by the line mirror y = 0 is the
point (a, b) then a = (a) 3bc + 2ad = 0 (b) 2bc – 3ad = 0

80. The co-ordinates of the foot of perpendicular from (a, 0) (c) 2bc + 3ad = 0 (d) 3bc – 2ad = 0

a
on the line y = mx + are
m

æ aö æa ö
(a) ç 0, - ÷ (b) ç , 0 ÷
è mø èm ø

æ aö
(c) ç 0, ÷ (d) None of these
è mø
STRAIGHT LINES 36

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. The number of points, having both co-ordinates as 6. A ray of light is incident along a line which meets another
integers, that lie in the interior of the triangle with vertices line, 7x – y + 1 = 0, at the point (0, 1). The ray is then
(0, 0), (0, 41) and (41, 0), is: (2015) reflected from this point along the line, y + 2x = 1. Then the
(a) 820 (b) 780 equation of the line of incidence of the ray of light is :
(2016/Online Set–2)
(c) 901 (d) 861
(a) 41x – 38y + 38 = 0 (b) 41x + 25y – 25 = 0
8
2. The points æç 0, ö÷ , (1, 3) and (82, 30) : (c) 41x + 38y – 38 = 0 (d) 41x – 25y + 25 = 0
è 3ø 7. A straight line through origin O meets the lines 3y = 10 – 4x
(2015/Online Set–1) and 8x + 6y + 5 = 0 at points A and B respectively. Then O
divides the segment AB in the ratio :
(a) form an acute angled triangle.
(2016/Online Set–2)
(b) lie on a straight line
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 2
(c) form an obtuse angled triangle
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 3 : 4
(d) form a right angled triangle.
8. Let k be an integer such that the triangle with vertices
3. Two sides of a rhombus are along the lines, x – y + 1 = 0 (k, –3k), (5, k) and (–k, 2) has area 28 sq. units. Then the
and 7x – y – 5 = 0. If its diagonals intersect at (–1, –2), then orthocentre of this triangle is at the point: (2017)
which one of the following is a vertex of this rhombus ?
(2016) æ 1ö æ 3ö
(a) ç 2, - ÷ (b) ç1, ÷
è 2ø è 4ø
(a) (–3, –8) (b) æç 1 , - 8 ö÷
è3 3ø æ 3ö æ 1ö
(c) ç1, - ÷ (d) ç 2, ÷
è 4ø è 2ø
æ 10 7 ö
(c) ç - , - ÷ (d) (–3, –9) 9. A square, of each side 2, lies above the x-axis and has one
è 3 3ø
vertex at the origin. If one of the sides passing through
4. If a variable line drawn through the intersection of the the origin makes an angle 30º with the positive direction
of the x-axis, then the sum of the x-coordinates of the
x y x y vertices of the square is : (2017/Online Set–2)
lines + = 1 and + = 1 , meets the coordinate axes
3 4 4 3
(a) 2 3 - 1 (b) 2 3 - 2
at A and B, (A ¹ B), then the locus of the midpoint of AB
is : (2016/Online Set–1) (c) (d)
3-2 3 -1
(a) 6xy = 7 (x + y)
10. A straight line through a fixed point (2, 3) intersects the
(b) 4(x + y)2 – 28(x + y) + 49 = 0 coordinate axes at distinct points P and Q. If O is the
(c) 7xy = 6 (x + y) origin and the rectangle OPRQ is completed, then the locus
(d) 14(x + y)2 – 97(x + y) + 168 = 0 of R is (2018)

5. The point (2, 1) is translated parallel to the line (a) 3x + 2y = 6xy (b) 3x + 2y = 6

L : x – y = 4 by 2 3 units. If the new point Q lies in the (c) 2x + 3y = xy (d) 3x + 2y = xy

third quadrant, then the equation of the line passing 11. In a triangle ABC, coordinates of A are (1, 2) and the
through Q and perpendicular to L is : equations of the medians through B and C are respectively,
(2016/Online Set–1) x + y = 5 and x =4. Then area of DABC (in sq. units) is :
(2018/Online Set–1)
(a) x + y = 2 - 6 (b) x + y = 3 - 3 6
(a) 12 (b) 4
(c) x + y = 3 - 2 6 (d) 2 x + 2 y = 1 - 6 (c) 5 (d) 9
STRAIGHT LINES 37

12. The sides of a rhombus ABCD are parallel to the lines, 17. Suppose that the points (h, k), (1, 2) and (- 3, 4) lie on the
x – y + 2 = 0 and 7x – y + 3 = 0. If the diagonals of the line L1. If a line L2 passing through the points (h, k) and
rhombus intersect at P(1, 2) and the vertex A (different
k
from the origin) is on the y-axis, then the ordinate of A is : (4, 3) is perpendicular on L1, then equals :
h
(2018/Online Set–2)
(8-04-2019/Shift-2)
5 7
(a) (b) 1
2 4 (a) (b) 0
3
7
(c) 2 (d) 1
2
(c) 3 (d) –
7
13. The foot of the perpendicular drawn from the origin, on
the line, 3x + y = l (l ¹ 0) is P. If the line meets x-axis at A 18. Slope of a line passing through P (2, 3) and intersecting

and y-axis at B, then the ratio BP : PA is: the line x + y = 7 at a distance of 4 units from P, is:
(2018/Online Set–2)
(9-04-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
(c) 1 : 9 (d) 9 : 1 1- 5 1- 7
(a) (b)
1+ 5 1+ 7
14. A point on the straight line,3x + 5y= 15 which is equidistant
from the coordinate axes will lie only in :
(8-04-2019/Shift-1) 7 -1 5 -1
(c) (d)
7 +1 5 +1
(a) 4th quadrant
(b) 1st quadrant 19. If the two lines x + a - 1 y = 1 and 2 x + a 2 y = 1
(c) 1st and 2nd quadrants
(d) 1st, 2nd and 4th quadrants a Î R - 0,1 are perpendicular, then the distance of

15. Let O(0, 0) and A(0, 1) be two fixed points. Then the locus their point of intersection from the origin is:
of a point P such that the perimeter of DAOP is 4, is: (9-04-2019/Shift-2)
(8-04-2019/Shift-1)
2 5
(a) 8 x 2 - 9 y 2 + 9 y = 18 (b) 9 x 2 - 8 y 2 + 8 y = 16 (a) (b)
5 2

(c) 9 x 2 + 8 y 2 - 8 y = 16 (d) 8 x 2 + 9 y 2 - 9 y = 18
2 5
16. Two vertical poles of heights, 20 m and 80 m stand apart (c) (d)
5 2
on a horizontal plane. The height (in meters) of the point
of intersection of the lines joining the top of each pole to 20. The region represented by | x - y |£ 2 and is
the foot of the other, from this horizontal plane is : bounded by a: (10-04-2019/Shift-1)
(8-04-2019/Shift-2)
(a) square of side length 2 2 units
(a) 15 (b) 18
(b) rhombus of side length 2 units
(c) 12 (d) 16
(c) square of area 16 sq. units

(d) rhombus of area 8 2 sq. units

STRAIGHT LINES 38

21. Lines are drawn parallel to the line 4 x - 3 y + 2 = 0 , at a 25. Let S be the set of all triangles in the xy-plane, each having
one vertex at the origin and the other two vertices lie on
3 coordinate axes with integral coordinates. If each triangle
distance from the origin Then which one of the
5 in S has area 50 sq. units, then the number of elements in
following points lies on any of these lines? the set S is: (09-01-2019/Shift-2)
(10-04-2019/Shift-2) (a) 9 (b) 18
(c) 36 (d) 32
æ 1 2ö
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) 26. Let the equations of two sides of a triangle be
è 4 3ø
3x - 2 y + 6 = 0 and 4 x + 5 y - 20 = 0. If the orthocentre
æ 1 2ö æ1 1ö of this triangle is at 1,1 , then the equation of its third
(c) ç - , - ÷ (d) ç , - ÷
è 4 3ø è 4 3ø side is: (09-01-2019/Shift-2)
22. A triangle has a vertex at (1, 2) and the mid points of the (a) 122y – 26x – 1675 = 0
two sides through it are (-1, 1) and (2, 3). Then the centroid (b) 122y + 26x + 1675 = 0
of this triangle is _____. (12-04-2019/Shift-2)
(c) 26x + 61y + 1675 = 0
æ 7ö (d) 26x – 122y – 1675 = 0
(a) ç1, ÷ (b)
è 3ø 27. A point P moves on the line 2 x - 3 y + 4 = 0 . If Q(1, 4)
and R(3, -2) are fixed points, then the locus of the
(c) (d)
centroid of DPQR is a line: (10-01-2019/Shift-1)

23. A straight line L at a distance of 4 units from the origin 3

makes positive intercepts on the coordinate axes and the (a) with slope (b) parallel to x-axis
2
perpendicular from the origin to this line makes an angle
of 60° with the line x + y = 0. Then an equation of the
(c) with slope (d) parallel to y-axis
line L is: (12-04-2019/Shift-2)

(a) 28. If the line 3x + 4 y - 24 = 0 intersects the x - axis at the

point A and the y - axis at the point B, then the incentre
(b) 3 +1 x + 3 -1 y = 8 2 of the triangle OAB , where O is the origin, is:

(c) (10-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) (3, 4) (b) (2, 2)
(d) 3 -1 x + 3 +1 y = 8 2 (c) (4, 3) (d) (4, 4)

24. Consider the set of all lines px + qy + r = 0 such that 29. Two sides of a parallelogram are along the lines,

3 p + 2q + 4r = 0. Which one of the following statements and . If its diagonals intersect at (2, 4), then
one of the vertex is: (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
is true? (09-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) (3, 5) (b) (2, 1)
æ3 1ö (c) (2,6) (d) (3, 6)
(a) The lines are concurrent at the point ç , ÷
è4 2ø 30. Two vertices of a triangle are (0, 2) and (4, 3). If its
(b) Each line passes through the origin orthocentre is at the origin, then its third vertex lies in
which quadrant? (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
(c) The lines are all parallel
(a) third (b) second
(d) The lines are not concurrent.
(c) first (d) fourth
STRAIGHT LINES 39

31. If in a parallelogram ABDC, the coordinates of A, B and 36. A triangle ABC lying in the first quadrant has two vertices

C are respectively (1, 2), (3, 4) and (2, 5), then the
as A(1, 2) and B (3,1). If ÐBAC = 90º , and

equation of the diagonal AD is: (11-01-2019/Shift-2) ar(DABC) = 5 5 units, then the abscissa of the vertex C
(a) 5 x - 3 y + 1 = 0 (b) 3x + 5 y - 11 = 0 is : (4-09-2020/Shift-1)

(c) 3x - 5 y + 7 = 0 (d) 3x + 5 y -13 = 0 (a) 1 + 5 (b) 1 + 2 5

32. If the straight line, 2 x - 3 y + 17 = 0 is perpendicular to

(c) 2 5 - 1 (d) 2 + 5
the line passing through the points (7, 17) and 15, b ,
37. If the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining
then b equals : (12-01-2019/Shift-1) the points P(1, 4) and Q(k, 3) has y - intercept equal

to -4, then a value of k is: (4-09-2020/Shift-2)

33. If a straight line passing through the point P -3, 4 is
(a) –2 (b) 1
such that its intercepted portion between the coordinate
axes is bisected at P, then its equation is : (c) 2 (d) –4

(12-01-2019/Shift-2) 1 2
38. If the line, 2 x - y + 3 = 0 is at a distance and
(a) 3x – 4y + 25 = 0 (b) 4x – 3y + 24 = 0 5 5
(c) x – y + 7 = 0 (d) 4x + 3y = 0 from the lines 4 x - 2 y + a = 0 and 6 x - 3 y + b = 0,
34. The set of all possible values of q in the interval respectively, then the sum of all possible values of a and
b is (5-09-2020/Shift-1)
for which the points (1, 2) and (sin θ, cos θ) lies on the
39. If the lines x + y = a and x - y = b touch the curve
same side of the line x + y = 1 is : (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
y = x 2 - 3x + 2 at the points where the curve intersects
æ pö æ pö
(a) ç 0, ÷ (b) ç 0, ÷ a
è 3ø è 2ø the x - axis, then is equal to ____
b

(5-09-2020/Shift-2)
æ 3p ö æ p 3p ö
(c) ç 0, ÷ (d) ç , ÷
è 4ø è4 4 ø 40. A ray of light coming from the point 2, 2 3 is incident

at an angle 30° on the line x = 1 at the point A. The ray

35. If a DABC has vertices A(-1,7), B(-7,1) and C(5, -5),
gets reflected on the line x = 1 and meets x - axis at the
then its orthocentre has coordinates :
point B. Then, the line AB passes through the point:
(3-09-2020/Shift-2)
(6-09-2020/Shift-1)

æ 3 3ö
(a) (-3, 3) (b) ç - , ÷ æ 3ö
è 5 5ø (a) 4, - 3 (b) ç 4, - ÷
ç 2 ÷ø
è

3 3
(c) æç , - ö÷ (d) (3, -3)
æ 3ö
è5 5ø (c) 3, - 3 (d) çç 4, - ÷
è 2 ÷ø
STRAIGHT LINES 40

41. Let L denote the line in the xy-plane with x and y 43. Let two points be A(1, -1) and B(0, 2). If a point
intercepts as 3 and 1 respectively. Then the image of the
point (-1,-4) in this line is : (6-09-2020/Shift-2) P x ', y ' be such that the area of DPAB = 5 sq. units
and it lies on the line, , then the value of
æ 11 28 ö æ 8 29 ö is: (8-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è5 5 ø è5 5 ø
(a) 4 (b) 1

æ 29 11 ö (c) –3 (d) 3
29 8
(c) ç , ÷ (d) æç , ö÷ 44. If C be the centroid of the triangle having vertices
è 5 5ø è 5 5ø
3,-1 1, 3 and (2,4). Let P be the point of intersection
42. The locus of mid points of the perpendiculars drawn from
points on the line x = 2 y to the line x = y is : of the lines x + 3 y - 1 = 0 and 3 x - y + 1 = 0 , then the

(7-01-2020/Shift-2) line passing through the points C and P also passes

through the point: (9-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a) 2x – 3y = 0 (b) 3x – 2y = 0
(a) (–9,–7) (b) (–9,–6)
(c) 5x – 7y = 0 (d) 7x – 5y = 0
(c) (7,6) (d) (9,7)
STRAIGHT LINES 41

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. The point (4, 1) undergoes the following three
transformations successively.
1. The straight lines x + y = 0, 3x + y – 4 = 0, x + 3y – 4 = 0 form (I) Reflection about the line y = x
a triangle which is : (II) Transformation through a distance 2 unit along the
positive direction of x-axis.
(a) isosceles (b) equilateral
p
(c) right angled (d) none of these (III) Rotation through an angle about the origin in the
4
2. If P (1, 2), Q (4, 6), R (5, 7) and S (a, b) are the vertices of a counter clockwise direction.
parallelogram PQRS,then: Then, the final position of the point is given by the
coordinates.
(a) a = 2, b = 4 (b) a = 3, b = 4
æ 1 7 ö
(c) a = 2, b = 3 (d) a = 3, b = 5 (a) ç , ÷ (b) - 2, 7 2
è 2 2ø
3. The coordinates of the middle points of the sides of a
triangle are (4, 2), (3, 3) and (2, 2) then the coordinates of æ 1 7 ö
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) 2, 7 2
è 2 2ø
its centroid are -
7. If A º (3, 4) and B is a variable point on the lines |x| = 6. If
æ 7ö AB £ 4 then the number of positions of B with integral
(a) ç 3, ÷ (b) (3, 3)
è 3ø coordinates is
(a) 5 (b) 6
(c) (4, 3) (d) None of these. (c) 10 (d) 12
4. A triangle ABC with vertices A(–1, 0), B (–2, 3/4) and 8. Given the points A (0, 4) and B (0,–4), the equation of the
C (–3, –7/6) has its orthocentre H. Then the orthocentre of locus of the point P (x, y) such that |AP – BP| = 6 is :
(a) 9x2 – 7y2 + 63 = 0 (b) 9x2 – 7y2 – 63 = 0
triangle BCH will be :
(c) 7x2 – 9y2 + 63 = 0 (d) 7x2 – 9y2 – 63 = 0
(a) (–3 –2) (b) (1, 3)
9. The graph of the function cos x cos (x + 2) – cos2 (x + 1) is
(c) (–1, 2) (d) none of these (a) a straight line passing through (0, –sin21) with slope 2

5. The orthocentre of the triangle ABC is ‘B’ and the (b) a straight line passing through (0, 0)
(c) a parabola with vertex (1, –sin2 1)
circumcentre is ‘S’ (a, b). If A is the origin then the
co–ordinates of C are : æp 2 ö
(d) a straight line passing through the point ç , - sin 1÷
è2 ø
æa bö and parallel to the x-axis.
(a) (2a, 2b) (b) ç , ÷
è2 2ø 10. The points (–a, –b), (0, 0), (a, b) and (a2, ab) are
(a) collinear
(b) vertices of a rectangle
(c) æç a 2 + b 2 , 0 ö÷ (d) none (c) vertices of a parallelogram
è ø
(d) None of the above
STRAIGHT LINES 42

11. A variable straight line passes through a fixed point 17. Two vertices of a triangle are (4, –3) and (–2, 5). If the
(a, b) intersecting the co-ordinates axes at A and B. If ‘O’ is othocentre of the triangle is at (1, 2), then the coordinates
the origin then the locus of the centroid of the triangle
of the third vertex are
OAB is:
(a) (33, 130) (b) (33, 26)
(a) bx + ay – 3xy = 0 (b) bx + ay – 2xy = 0
(c) (–33, 26) (d) (33, –26)
(c) ax + by – 3xy = 0 (d) ax + by – 2xy = 0
12. Consider the straight line ax + by = c, where a, b, c Î R+ 18. Drawn from the origin are two mutually perpendicular straight
this line meets the coordinate axes at A and B respectively. lines forming an isosceles triangle together with the straight
If the area of the DOAB, O being origin, does not depend line, 2x + y = a. Then the area of the triangle is:
upon a, b and c, then
(a) a, b, c are in AP (b) a, c, b are in GP a2 a2
(a) (b)
2 3
(c) a, b, c are in HP (d) none of these
13. A line is drawn through the point A (p, q) in the direction
q to meet the line, ax + by + c = 0 in B, then | AB | = a2
(c) (d) none
5
ap + bq + c aq + bp + c
(a) (b)
a cos q + b sin q a cos q + bsin q 19. If the sum of the distance of a point from two perpendicular
lines in a plane is 1, then its locus is :
ap + bq + c aq + bp + c (a) square (b) circle
(c) (d)
a sin q + b cos q a sin q + bcos q
(c) straight line (d) two intersecting line
14. The vertices of DOBC are respectively (0, 0), (–3, –1) and 20. The equations of the sides of a square whose each side is
(–1, –3). The equation of line parallel to BC and at a distance of length 4 units and centre is (1, 1). Given that one pair of
1/2 from O which intersects OB and OC is :
sides is parallel to 3x – 4y = 0.
(a) 2 x + 2 y + 2 = 0 (b) 2 x - 2 y + 2 = 0 (a) 3x – 4y + 11 = 0, 3x – 4y – 9 = 0, 4x + 3y + 3 = 0,
4x + 3y – 17 = 0
(c) 2 x + 2 y - 2 = 0 (d) none of these
(b) 3x – 4y – 15 = 0, 3x – 4y + 5 = 0, 4x + 3y + 3 = 0,
15. On the portion of the straight line, x + 2y = 4 intercepted 4x + 3y – 17 = 0
between the axes, a square is constructed on the side of
(c) 3x – 4y + 11 = 0, 3x – 4y – 9 = 0, 4x + 3y + 2 = 0,
the line away from the origin. Then the point of intersection
4x + 3y – 18 = 0
of its diagonals has co-ordinates :
(a) (2, 3) (b) (3, 2) (d) none

(c) (3, 3) (d) none 21. The area of the parallelogram formed by the lines

16. The acute angle between two straight lines passing 3x - 4y + 1 = 0, 3x - 4y + 3 = 0, 4x - 3y - 1 = 0 and
through the point M(–6, –8) and the points in which the 4x - 3y - 2 = 0, is
line segment 2x + y + 10 = 0 enclosed between the
co-ordinate axes is divided in the ratio 1 : 2 : 2 in the direction 1 2
(a) sq units (b) sq units
from the point of its intersection with the x–axis to the 7 7
point of Intersection with the y –axis is :
(a) p/3 (b) p/4 3 4
(c) sq units (d) sq units
(c) p/6 (d) p/12 7 7
STRAIGHT LINES 43

22. The point (a2, a + 1) is a point in the angle between the 28. The line x + 3y – 2 = 0 bisects the angle between a pair of
lines 3x – y + 1 = 0 and x + 2y – 5 = 0 containing the origin straight lines of which one has equation x – 7y + 5 =0. The
if : equation of the other line is :
(a) a > 1 or a < –3 (b) a Î (–3, 0) È (1/3, 1) (a) 3x + 3y – 1 = 0 (b) x – 3y + 2 = 0
(c) a Î (0, 1) (d) none of these (c) 5x + 5y – 3 = 0 (d) none
23. The set of values of ‘b’ for which the origin and the point
29. The equation of the line segment AB is y = x. If A and B lie
(1, 1) lie on the same side of the straight line
on the same side of the line mirror 2x – y = 1, the image of
a2x + aby + 1 = 0 " a Î R, b > 0 are : AB has the equation
(a) b Î (2, 4) (c) b Î (0, 2) (a) x + y = 2 (b) 8x + y = 9
(c) b Î [0, 2] (d) bÎ (2, ¥)
(c) 7x – y = 6 (d) none of these
24. The equations of three lines, AB, CD and EF are,
30. The base BC of a DABC is bisected at the point (p, q) and
(b – c) x + (c – a) y + (a – b) = 0,
the equation to the side AB and AC are px + qy = 1 and
(c – a) x + (a – b) y + (b – c) = 0 and
qx + py = 1. The equation of the median through A is :
(a – b) x + (b – c) y + (c – a) = 0.
(a) (p – 2q)x + (q – 2p)y + 1 = 0
Which one of the following inferences is correct.
(b) (p + q) (x + y) – 2 = 0
(a) the lines are parallel to each other
(c) (2pq – 1) (px + qy – 1) = (p2 + q2 – 1) (qx + py –1)
(b) AB and BC are perpendicular to EF
(d) none
(c) all the lines are coincident
31. Given the family of lines, a (3x +4y +6) + b (x +y +2) =0. The
(d) the lines are concurrent
line of the family situated at the greatest distance from the
25. Given the four lines with the equations
point P (2, 3) has equation :
x + 2y – 3 = 0, 3x + 4y – 7 = 0,
(a) 4x + 3y + 8 = 0 (b) 5x + 3y + 10 = 0
2x + 3y – 4 = 0, 4x + 5y – 6 = 0 then :
(c) 15x + 8y + 30 = 0 (d) none
(a) they are all concurrent
32. Let P = (1, 1) and Q = (3, 2). The point R on the x-axis such
(b) they are the sides of a quadrilateral
that PR + RQ is the minimum is
(c) only three lines are concurrent
(d) none of the above æ5 ö æ1 ö
(a) ç , 0 ÷ (b) ç , 0 ÷
26. The bisector of the acute angle between the lines è3 ø è3 ø
3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x + 5y – 2 = 0, is :
(c) (3, 0) (d) none of these
(a) 11x + 3y – 9 = 0 (b) 21x + 77y – 101 = 0
33. The co-ordinates of a point P on the line 2x – y + 5 = 0 such
(c) 11x – 3y + 9 = 0 (d) none of these
that |PA – PB| is maximum where A is (4, –2) and B is (2, –4)
27. The equation of the bisector of the angle between two will be :
lines 3x – 4y + 12 = 0 and 12x – 5y + 7 = 0 which contains
(a) (11, 27) (b) (–11, –17)
the points (–1, 4) is :
(a) 21x + 27y – 121 = 0 (c) (–11, 17) (d) (0, 5)

(b) 21x – 27y + 121 = 0 34. A light beam emanating from the point A(3, 10) reflects
from the straight line 2x + y – 6 = 0 and then passes through
(c) 21x + 27y + 191 = 0
the point B(4, 3). The equation of the reflected beam is :
-3x + 4 y - 12 12 x - 5 y + 7 (a) 3x – y + 1 = 0 (b) x + 3y – 13 = 0
(d) =
5 13
(c) 3x + y – 15 = 0 (d) x – 3y + 5 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 44

35. Let PQR be a right angled isosceles triangle, right angled n -1

2r
at P (2, 1). If the equation of the line QR is 2x + y = 3, then 42. If a1, a2, a3, b1, b2, b3 are the values of n for which åx
r =0
the equation representing the pair of lines PQ and PR is
(a) 3x2 – 3y2 + 8xy + 20x + 10y + 25 = 0 n -1
r
2 2
(b) 3x – 3y + 8xy – 20x – 10y + 25 = 0
is divisible by åx ,
r =0
then the triangle having vertices

(c) 3x2 – 3y2 + 8xy + 10x + 15y + 20 = 0 (a1, b 1), (a2, b2) and (a3, b 3) cannot be.
2 2
(d) 3x – 3y – 8xy – 10x – 15y – 20 = 0 (a) an isosceles triangle
36. If sum and product of the slopes of lines represented by (b) a right angled isosceles triangle
4x2 + 2hxy – 7y2 = 0 is equal then h is equal to : (c) a right angled triangle
(a) –6 (b) –2 (d) an equilateral triangle
(c) –4 (d) 4 43. Area of the quadrilateral formed by the lines | x | + | y | = 2 is :
37. The difference of the slopes of the lines, (a) 8 (b) 6
x2 (sec2 q – sin2q) – 2xy tan q + y2 sin2 q = 0 is (c) 4 (d) none

(a) –2 (b) 1/2 44. A right angle triangle ABC having ‘C’ a right angle has
AC = a and BC = b units. The points A and B slide along
(c) 2 (d) 1
the cartesian axes (A on x – axis and B on y – axis). Then
38. Find the angle between the lines represented by the the locus of ‘C’ is :
equation x2 – 2pxy + y2 = 0 (a) by ± ax = 0 (b) ay ± bx = 0
–1 –1
(a) sec (p) (b) tan (p) (c) x2 + y2 = 0 (d) xy = ab
–1
(c) cos (p) (d) none of these 45. ABC is an equilateral triangle such that the vertices B and C
39. If pairs of straight lines, x 2 – 2pxy – y 2 = 0 and lie on two parallel lines at a distance 6. If A lies between the
parallel lines at a distance 4 from one of them, then the
x2 – 2q xy – y2 = 0 be such that each pair bisects the angles
length of a side of the equilateral triangle is
between the other pair then :
(a) pq = – 1/2 (b) pq = – 2 88
(a) 8 (b)
(c) pq = – 1 (d) p/q = – 1 3
40. The distance between the lines represented by the
equation, 4 7
(c) (d) none of these
3
x 2 + 2 2 xy + 2 y 2 + 4 x + 4 2 y + 1 = 0 is :
46. Find the condition that the pair of straight lines joining
the origin to the intersections of the line y = mx + c and the
4
(a) (b) 4 circle x2 + y2 = a2 may be at right angles.
3
(a) 2a2 = c2 (1 + m2) (b) 2a2 = c2 (1 – m2)

(c) 2 (d) 2 3 (c) 2c2 = a2 (1 + m2) (d) 2c2 = a2 (1 – m2)

Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]

41. If q is the angle between the lines represented by
x2 – 3xy + ly2 + 3x – 5y + 2 = 0, where l is a real number, 47. Given two straight lines x – y – 7 = 0 and x – y + 3 = 0.
then cosec2 q equals : Equation of a line which divides the distance between
(a) 9 (b) 3 them in the ratio 3 : 2 can be and || to them.

(c) 10 (d) 100 (a) x – y – 1 = 0 (b) x – y – 3 = 0

(c) y = x (d) x – y + 1 = 0
STRAIGHT LINES 45
48. All the points lying on or inside the triangle formed by the ASSERTION REASON
points (1, 3), (5, 6) and (–1, 2) satisfy
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a
(a) 3x + 2y  0 (b) 2x + y + 1  0
correct explanation for ASSERTION.
(c) 2x + 3y –12  0 (d) –2x + 11  0
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
49. Equation of a straight line passing through the point
a correct explanation for ASSERTION.
(4, 5) and equally inclined to the lines, 3x = 4y + 7 and
5y = 12x + 6 is (C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false.
(a) 9x – 7y = 1 (b) 9x + 7y = 71 (D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true.
(c) 7x + 9y = 73 (d) 7x – 9y + 17 = 0
54. Assertion : If (a1x + b1y + c1) + (a2x + b2y + c2) +
50. Let u  ax  by  a 3 b  0, v  bx  ay  b3 a  0, a, b  (a3x + b3y + c3) = 0, then lines
R be two straight lines. The equation of the bisectors of the a1x + b1y + c1 = 0, a2x + b2y + c2 = 0, a3x + b3y + c3 = 0
angle formed by k1u – k2v = 0 and k1u + k2v = 0 for non zero cannot be parallel.
real k1 and k2 are :
Reason : If sum of three straight lines equations is
(a) u = 0 (b) k2u + k1v = 0
(c) k2u – k1v = 0 (d) v = 0 identically zero then they are either concurrent or parallel.
(a) A (b) B
x y x y
51. If   1 is a line through the intersection of   1 (c) C (d) D
c d a b
55. Assertion : Each point on the line y – x + 12 = 0 is
x y
and   1 and the lengths of the perpendiculars equidistant from the lines 4y + 3x – 12 = 0,
b a
3y + 4x – 24 =0.
drawn from the origin to these lines are equal in lengths
then : Reason : The locus of a point which is equidistant from
two given lines is the angular bisector of the two lines.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) 2  2  2  2 (b) 2  2  2  2 (a) A (b) B
a b c d a b c d
(c) C (d) D
1 1 1 1
(c)    (d) none 56. Assertion : The four straight lines given by
a b c d
12x2 + 7xy – 12y2 = 0 and 12x2 +7xy –12y2 –x +7y –1 =0 are
2 2
52. If the equation, 2x + k xy – 3y – x – 4y – 1 = 0 represents the sides of a square.
a pair of lines then the value of k can be :
Reason : The lines represented by general equation of
(a) 1 (b) 5
second degree ax2 + 2 hxy + by2 + 2 gx + 2 f y + c = 0 are
(c) –1 (d) –5
perpendicular if a + b = 0.
53. A is a point on either of two lines y  3 | x | 2 at a (a) A (b) B

4 (c) C (d) D
distance of units from their point of intersection. The
3 57. Assertion : The diagonals of parallelogram formed by
co-ordinates of the foot of perpendicular from A on the the lines
bisector of the angle between them are ax + by + c = 0, a´x + b´y + c = 0,

 2  ax + by + c´ = 0, a´x + b´y + c´ = 0
(a)   , 2  (b) (0, 0)
 3  will be perpendicular if aa´ + bb´ = 0
Reason : The diagonals of rhombus are always
 2  perpendicular.
(c)  , 2  (d) (0, 4)
 3  (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
STRAIGHT LINES 46

Match the Following Using the following passage, solve Q.60 to Q.62

Each question has two columns. Four options are given Passage – 1
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Let A (0, b), B (–2, 0) and C (1, 1) be the vertices of a
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds triangle then
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option 60. Angle A of the triangle ABC will be obtuse if b lies in
corresponding to the correct matching.
æ 5ö
(a) (–1, 2) (b) ç 2, ÷
58. A line cuts x–axis at A and y–axis at B such that AB = l. è 2ø
Column II contain equation of locus of point given in
æ 2ö æ2 ö
Column I (c) ç - 1, ÷ È ç , 2 ÷ (d) None of these
è 3ø è3 ø
Column - I Column - II
61. If I1 is the interval of values of b for which A is obtuse
2 2 2
I. Circumcentre of triangle ABC (P) x + y =l /9 and I2 be the interval of values of b for which A is largest
2 2 2 angle of DABC, then
II. Orthocentre of triangle ABC (Q) x + y = l /4
(a) I1 = I2 (b) I1 is a subset of I2
2 2
III. Incentre of the triangle ABC (R) x + y = 0 (c) I2 is a subset of I1 (d) None of these
IV. Centroid of the triangle ABC (S) y = x 62. All the values of b for which angle A of the triangle ABC
is largest lie in interval.
Which of the following is incorrect
æ 2ö æ2 ö
(a) I ® Q (b) II ® R (a) (–2, 1) (b) ç - 2, ÷ È ç , 1÷
è 3ø è3 ø
(c) III ® R (d) IV ® P
æ 2ö æ2 ö
59. Column II contains value of k according to condition (c) ç - 2, ÷ È ç , 6 ÷ (d) None of these
è 3ø è3 ø
given in Column I
Using the following passage, solve Q.63 to Q.65
Column–I Column–II

I. Origin and (k, 3) lie in the same (P) (–4, 3) Passage – 2

angle formed by lines Let OX and OY be two fixed lines inclined at a constant
angle a. A variable line cuts OX at P and OY at Q. From
x – 2y + 3 = 0 and 2x + y + 5 = 0
P and Q perpendiculars PM and QN are drawn to OY and
II. Origin and (k, 3) lie in opposite (Q) (–¥, –4) OX respectively.

angles formed by lines 63. Let the axes be chosen as OX and OY. If OP = a, OQ = b,
then equation of PQ must be
x – 2y + 3 = 0 and 2x + y + 5 = 0
x y
III. Origin and (k, 3) lie in adjacent (R) (3, ¥) (a) + =1
a cos a b sin a
angles formed by lines
x y
x – 2y + 3 = 0 and 2x + y + 5 = 0 (b) + =1
a sin a b cos a
Then which of the following option is in correct
x y
(c) + =1
(a) I ® R (b) I ® Q a b
(c) II ® Q (d) III ® P (d) None of these
STRAIGHT LINES 47
64. The equation of MN must be 71. Find the equation of the line passing through the point
(2, 3) and making intercept of length 3 unit between the
x y lines y + 2x = 2 and y + 2x = 5.
(a) + =1
a cos a b sin a
72. For 0 £ q < 2p, if the point (2 cos q, 2 sin q) lies in the
angle between the lines y = | x–2 | in which origin lies,
x y
(b) + =1 then q lies in the interval.
b cos a a cos a
73. Find the equation of the line which bisects the obtuse
x y angle between the lines x – 2y + 4 =0 and 4x – 3y + 2 =0.
(c) + =1
a sin a b sin a 74. Two sides of a rhombus lying in the first quadrant are
given by 3x – 4y = 0 and 12x – 5y = 0. The length of the
(d) None of these
longer diagonal is 12. Find the equations of other two
65. If PQ passes through a fixed point (h, k) then MN passes sides
through a fixed point
75. The base of a triangle passes through a fixed point (1, 1)
(a) (k cos a, h sin a) (b) (k cos a, h cos a) and its sides are bisected at right angle by the lines
(c) (k sin a, h cos a) (d) None of these. y2 – 8xy – 9x2 = 0. Find the locus its vertex

Subjective Type Fill in the Blanks

66. Let S be a square of unit area. Consider any quadrilateral 76. The set of all real numbers a such that a2 + 2a, 2a + 3 and
which has one vertex on each side of S. If a, b, c and d a2 + 3a + 8 are the sides of a triangle is.
denote the length of the sides of the quandrilateral, prove 77. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by the lines
that 2 < a2 + b2 + c2 + d2 < 4. x + y = 1, 2x + 3y = 6 and 4x – y + 4 = 0 lies in quadrant
67. The co-ordinates of A, B, C are (6, 3), (–3, 5), (4, –2) number .....
respectively. For any point P (x, y) find the ratio of the 78. The vertices of a triangle are A (–1, –7), B (5, 1) and
areas of the triangles DPBC and DABC C (1, 4). The equation of the bisector of the angle ÐABC
68. The vertices of a triangle are is ....
[at1t2, a(t1 + t2)], [at2t3, a(t2 + t3)], [at3t1, a(t3 + t1)]. 79. Let the algebraic sum of the perpendicular distance from
the points (2, 0), (0, 2) and (1, 1) to a variable straight line
Find the orthocentre of the triangle.
be zero; then the line passes through a fixed point whose
69. One of the diameter of the circle circumscribing the coordinates are ...
rectangle ABCD is 4y = x + 7. If A and B are the points
(–3, 4) and (5, 4) respectively, then find the area of True/False
rectangle.
70. The equation of the perpendicular bisectors of the sides x1 y1 1 a1 b1 1
AB and AC of a triangle ABC are x – y + 5 = 0 and x2 y2 1 = a 2 b2 1 ,
x + 2y = 0, respectively. If the point A is (1, –2), find the 80. If then the two triangles with
x3 y3 1 a3 b3 1
equation of the line BC.
vertices (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3) and (a1, b1), (a2, b2),
(a3, b3) must be congruent.
STRAIGHT LINES 48

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] p
6. Let 0 < a < be a fixed angle. If P = (cos q, sin q) and
2
1. Let PS be the median of the triangle with vertices
P (2, 2), Q (6, –1) and R (7, 3). The equation of the line Q = {cos (a - q), sin (a - q)}, then Q is obtained from P by
passing through (1, –1) and parallel to PS is : (2000) (2002)

(a) 2x – 9y – 7 = 0 (b) 2x – 9y – 11 = 0 (a) clockwise rotation around origin through an angle a

(c) 2x + 9y – 11 = 0 (d) 2x + 9y + 7 = 0 (b) anticlockwise rotation around origin through an angles a

(c) reflection in the line through origin with slope tan a
2. The incentre of the triangle with vertices (1, 3 ) , (0, 0)
(d) reflection in the line through origin with slope
and (2, 0) is : (2000)
a
tan
2
æ 3ö æ2 1 ö
(a) çç1, ÷
÷ (b) çç , ÷÷
7. A straight line through the origin O meets the parallel lines
è 2 ø è3 3ø
4x + 2y = 9 and 2x + y + 6 = 0 at points P and Q respectively.
Then the point O divides the segment PQ in the ratio :
æ2 3ö æ 1 ö
(c) ç , ÷ (d) çç1, ÷÷ (2003)
ç3 2 ÷ è 3ø
è ø
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 4
3. The number of integral values of m, for which the (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 3
x-coordinate of the point of intersection of the lines 8. Area of triangle formed by the lines x + y = 3 and angle
3x + 4y = 9 & y = mx + 1 is also an integer, is : (2001) bisectors of the pair of straight lines x2 – y2 + 2y = 1 is
(a) 2 (b) 0 (2004)
(c) 4 (d) 1 (a) 2 sq. unit (b) 4 sq. unit
4. Area of the parallelogram formed by the lines (c) 6 sq. unit (d) 8 sq. unit
y = mx, y = mx + 1, y = nx and y = nx + 1 equals : 9. Let O (0, 0), P (3, 4), Q (6, 0) be the vertices of a triangle
(2001) OPQ. The point R inside the triangle OPQ is such that the
triangles OPR, PQR, OQR are of equal area. The
m+n 2 coordinates of R are : (2007)
(a) (b)
(m - n ) 2 m+n
æ4 ö æ 2ö
(a) ç , 3 ÷ (b) ç 3, ÷
1 è3 ø è 3ø
1
(c) (d)
m+n m-n
æ 4ö æ4 2ö
(c) ç 3, ÷ (d) ç , ÷
è 3ø è3 3ø
5. Let P = (–1, 0), Q = (0, 0) and R = (3, 3 3 ) be three points.
Then, the equations of the bisector of the angle PQR is : 10. The locus of the orthocentre of the triangle formed by the
(2002) lines (1 + p) x – py + p (1 + p) = 0,
(1 + q) x – qy + q (1 + q) = 0 and y = 0 where p ¹ q, is
3
(a) x+y =0 (b) x + 3 y = 0 (2009)
2
(a) a hyperbola (b) a parabola
3 (c) an ellipse (d) a straight line
(c) 3x + y = 0 (d) x + y=0
2
STRAIGHT LINES 49

11. A straight line L through the point (3, –2) is inclined at an 15. Consider the lines given by
angle 60° to the line 3x + y =1. If L also intersects the L1 : x + 3y – 5 = 0
x-axis, then the equation of L is (2011) L2 : 3x – ky – 1 = 0
L3 : 5x + 2y – 12 = 0
(a) y + 3 x + 2 - 3 3 = 0 (b) y - 3 x + 2 + 3 3 = 0
Column II consist of value of k for conditions given in
(c) (d) Column I
3 y -x +3 +2 3 =0 3 y + x -3 + 2 3 = 0
Column I Column II
12. For a > b > c > 0, the distance between (1, 1) and the point
of intersection of the lines ax + by + c = 0 and I. L1, L2, L3 are concurrent if (p) k = –9

bx + ay + c = 0 is less than 2 2. Then, (2013) 6

II. One of L1, L2, L3 is parallel (q) k = -
(a) a + b – c > 0 (b) a – b + c < 0 5

(c) a – b + c > 0 (d) a + b – c < 0 to at least one of the other two, if

Numerical Value Type Questions 5

III. L1, L2, L3 form a triangle, if (r) k =
6
13. For a point P in the plane, let d1 (P) and d2 (P) be the
IV. L1, L2, L3 do not form a triangle, if (s) k = 5
distances of the point P from the lines x – y = 0 and
x + y = 0 respectively. The area of the region R consisting (2008)
of all points P lying in the first quadrant of the plane and Which of the following combination is incorrect?
satisfying 2 < d1 (P) + d2 (P) < 4, is (2014)
(a) I ® s (b) II ® p,q
ASSERTION REASON (c) III ® p (d) IV ® p,q,s

(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a Subjective Type

correct explanation for ASSERTION.
16. For points P = (x1, y1) and Q = (x2, y2) of the coordinate
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
plane, a new distance d (P, Q) is defined by
a correct explanation for ASSERTION.
d (P, Q) = |x1 – x2| + |y1 – y2|.
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false.
Let O = (0, 0) and A = (3, 2). Prove that the set of points in
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. the first quadrant which are equidistant (with respect to
the new distance) from O and A consists of the union of a
14. Line L1 : y – x = 0 and L2 : 2x + y = 0 intersect the line line segement of finite length and an inifinite ray. Sketch
L3 : y + 2 = 0 at P and Q, respectively. The bisector of the this set in a labelled diagram. (2000)
acute angle between L1 and L2 intersects L3 at R.
17. A straight line L through the origin meets the lines
Statement I : The ratio PR : RQ equal 2 2: 5. x + y = 1 and x + y = 3 at P & Q respectively. Through P and
Q two straight lines L1 and L2 are drawn, parallel to
Because 2x – y = 5 and 3x + y = 5 respectively. Lines L1 and L2
Statement II : In any triangle, bisector of an angle divides intersect at R. Show that the locus of R as L varies is a
the triangle into two similar triangles. (2007) straight line. (2002)
(a) a (b) b 18. A straight line L with negative slopes passes through the
(c) c (d) d point (8, 2) and cuts the positive coordinate axes at points
P and Q. Find the absolute minimum value of OP + OQ, as
Match the Following L varies, where O is the origin. (2002)

The question has two columns. Four options are given 19. A line is drawn passing through P (h, k) and parallel to
representing matching of elements from Column-I and x–axis. If the area of triangle formed by this line and line
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds y = x and x + y = 2 is 4h2, then find the locus of P (h, k).
to a correct matching. For question, choose the option (2005)
corresponding to the correct matching.
STRAIGHT LINES 50

Note

STRAIGHT LINES
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
Teacher’s Note:

Mathematics is the most beautiful and most powerful creation of

human being, you love mathematics and it will open the doors to

success and happiness in your life.

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Pulkit Sir loves teaching Mathematics, he has been a

pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE and Olympiads.
He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7
(JEE ADVANCED), and thousands of more students who
have successfully cleared these competitive exams
in the last few years.
CIRCLES
 Chapter 02 53

CIRCLES

A circle is a locus of a point whose distance from a fixed point

2. INTERCEPTS MADE BY A CIRCLE ON THE AXES
(called centre) is always constant (called radius).
The intercepts made by the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
1. STANDARD EQUATION OF CIRCLE
on the co-ordinate axes are 2 g 2 - c and 2 f 2 - c
(a) The circle with centre as origin & radius 'r' has the equation;
x² + y² = r². respectively.
(b) The circle with centre (h, k) & radius 'r' has the equation; If :
(x – h)² + (y – k)² = r²
g² – c > 0 Þ circle cuts the x axis at two distinct points.
(c) The general equation of a circle is
g² – c = 0 Þ circle touches the x–axis
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 with centre as (–g, –f) and
g² – c < 0 Þ circle lies completely above or below the
2 2
radius = g + f - c . If : x–axis.

g2 + f 2 – c > 0 Þ real circle.

g2 + f 2 – c = 0 Þ point circle 3. PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS OF A CIRCLE
g2 + f 2 – c < 0 Þ imaginary circle, with real
The parametric equations of (x – h)² + (y – k)² = r² are :
centre, that is (–g, –f)
x = h + r cos q ; y = k + r sin q ; – p < q < p
NOTES : where (h, k) is the centre, r is the radius & q is a parameter.

Every second degree equation in x & y, in which coefficient of

4. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT
x² is equal to coefficient of y² & the coefficient of xy is zero,
always represents a circle. TO A CIRCLE

(d) The equation of circle with (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) as extremities of The point (x1,y1) is inside, on or outside the
its diameter is :
circle S º x1² + y1² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0.
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) = 0.
Note that this will be the circle of least radius passing through
(x1, y1) & (x2, y2).
(e) Equation of circle passing through origin is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0
according as S1 º x1² + y1² + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c <, = or > 0.
(f) Equation of circle touching x-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + g2 = 0
NOTES :
(g) Equation of circle touching y-axis is
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + f2 = 0 The greatest & the least distance of a point A from a circle with
(h) Equation of circle touching both axes is centre C & radius r is AC + r & AC – r respectively.

x2 + y2 ± 2ax ± 2ay + a 2 = 0
CIRCLES
54

(c) Parametric form :

5. LINE AND A CIRCLE
The equation of a tangent to circle x² + y² = a² at
Let L = 0 be a line & S = 0 be a circle. If r is the radius of the (a cos a, a sin a) is : x cosa + y sina = a.
circle & p is the length of the perpendicular from the centre
on the line, then: NOTES :
(i) p>r Û the line does not meet the circle, i.e,
passes outside the circle. The point of intersection of the tangents at the points P(a) &
Q(b) is :
(ii) p=r Û the line touches the circle.
(It is tangent to the circle) æ a +b a +b ö
(iii) p < r Û the line is a secant of the circle. ç a cos 2 a sin
2 ÷
ç , ÷
(iv) p = 0 Þ the line is a diameter of the circle. çç cos a - b cos
a -b ÷÷
è 2 2 ø
Also, if y = mx + c is line and x² + y² = a² is circle then.
(i) c² < a² (1 + m²) Û the line is a secant of the circle.
(ii) c² = a²(1 + m²) Û the line touches the circle.
7. PAIR OF TANGENTS FROM A POINT
(It is tangent to the circle) The combined equation of a pair of tangents drawn from the
(iii) c² > a²(1 + m²) Û the line does not meet the point A (x1, y1) to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is :
circle i.e. passes out side the circle. SS1 = T²
Where S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c ;
6. TANGENT S1 = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c

(a) Slope form : T º xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c

y = mx + c is always a tangent to the circle x² + y² = a²

if c² = a² (1 + m²).
8. LENGTH OF A TANGENT AND POWER OF A POINT

The length of a tangent from an external point (x1, y1) to the

Hence, equation of tangent is y = mx ± a 1 + m 2 and the
circle :
æ a 2m a 2 ö S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is given by
point of contact is çç - c , c ÷÷, where c = ± a 1 + m .
2
è ø
L = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c = S1
(b) Point form :
Square of length of the tangent from the point P is also
(i) The equation of the tangent to the circle x² + y² = a² called the power of point w.r.t. a circle. Power of a point w.r.t
at its point (x1, y1) is, x x1 + y y1 = a². a circle remains constant.
(ii) The equation of the tangent to the circle Power of a point P is positive, negative or zero according
x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at its point (x1, y1) is : as the point 'P' is outside, inside or on the circle respectively.
xx1 + yy1 + g (x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0.
9. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
NOTES :
The locus of the point of intersection of two perpendicular
In general, the equation of tangent to any second degree tangents is called the director circle of the given circle. The
curve at point (x1, y1) on it can be obtained by replacing director circle of a circle is the concentric circle having

x + x1 radius equal to 2 times the original circle.

x 2 by xx1 , y 2 by yy1 , x by ,
2 Equation of circle concentric with x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is
y + y1 x y + xy1 x 2 + y 2 + 2 gx + 2 fy + k = 0
y by , xy by 1 and c remains as c.
2 2
CIRCLES
55

10. CHORD OF CONTACT 12. EQUATION OF THE CHORD JOINING TWO

POINTS OF CIRCLE
If two tangents PT1 & PT2 are drawn from the point
P (x1, y1) to the circle S º x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, then the The equation of chord PQ of the circle x² + y² = a²
equation of the chord of contact T 1T2 is : joining two points P(a) and P(b) on it is given by.
xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0., i.e., T = 0
α+β α+β α-β
xcos + ysin = acos
2 2 2

13. NORMAL

If a line is normal /orthogonal to a circle then it must pass

through the centre of the circle. Using this fact equation of
Here R = radius, L = Length of tangent. normal to x2 + y2 = a2 at (x1, y1) is
(a) Chord of contact exists only if the point 'P' is not inside.
x y
=
2LR x1 y1
(b) Length of chord of contact T1T2 =
R 2 + L2 Also,
Equation of normal to the circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + c
(c) Area of the triangle formed by the pair of the tangents
= 0 at (x1, y1) is ;
RL3
& its chord of contact = 2 y1 + f
R + L2 y - y1 = x - x1
x1 + g
(d) Tangent of the angle between the pair of tangents from

æ 2RL ö
(x1, y1) = ç 2 2 ÷
14. COMMON TANGENTS TO TWO CIRCLES
èL -R ø
(e) Equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle CASE NUMBEROF CONDITION
PT1 T2 is : (x – x1) (x + g) + (y – y1) (y + f) = 0. TANGENTS
(i) 4 common tangents r1 + r2 < C1C2.
11. EQUATION OF THE CHORD WITH A GIVEN
MIDDLE POINT

The equation of the chord of the circle

(ii) 3 common tangents r1 + r2 = C1C2.
S º x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 in terms of its mid point
M(x 1 , y1 ) is xx 1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c
= x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c which is designated by (iii) 2 common tangents | r1 – r2 |< C1C2 < r1 + r2
T = S 1.

NOTES :
(iv) 1 common tangent |r1 – r2| = C1C2.
(i) The shortest chord of a circle passing through a point 'M'
inside the circle is one chord whose middle point is M.
(ii) The chord passing through a point 'M' inside the circle (v) No common tangent. C1C2 < | r1 – r2|
and which is at a maximum distance from the centre is a
chord with middle point M.
(Here C1C2 is distance between centres of two circles.)
CIRCLES
56

NOTES : 17. RADICAL AXIS AND RADICAL CENTRE

(i) The direct common tangents meet at a point which The radical axis of two circles is the locus of points whose
divides the line joining centre of circles externally in the powers w.r.t. the two circles are equal. The equation of radical
ratio of their radii. axis of the two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 is given by :
Transverse common tangents meet at a point which S1 – S2 = 0
divides the line joining centre of circles internally in the i.e. 2(g1 – g2)x + 2(f1 – f2)y + (c1 – c2) = 0
ratio of their radii.
The common point of intersection of the radical axes of
(ii) Length of an external (or direct) common tangent & three circles taken two at a time is called the radical centre
internal (or transverse) common tangent to the two of three circles. Note that the length of tangents from radical
centre to the three circles are equal.
circles are given by : L ext. = d 2 - (r1 - r2 ) 2 and

NOTES :
2 2
L int . = d - (r1 + r2 ) , where d = distance between the
(a) If two circles intersect, then the radical axis is the common
centres of the two circles and r1, r2 are the radii of the two
chord of the two circles.
circles. Note that length of internal common tangent is
always less than the length of the external or direct (b) If two circles touch each other then the radical axis is the
common tangent of the two circles at the common point
common tangent.
of contact.

15. ANGLE OF INTERSECTION OF TWO CIRCLES (c) Radical axis is always perpendicular to the line joining the
centres of the two circles.
Angle between two circle is the angle between their tangents (d) Radical axis will pass through the mid point of the line
at their point of intersection which is given by: joining the centres of the two circles only if the two circles
have equal radii.
2 2 2
d – r +r 1 2
cos q = , where d is distance between (e) Radical axis bisects a common tangent between the two
2r1r2
circles.

centres of two circles. (f) A system of circles, every two of which have the same
radical axis, is called a coaxial system.
16. ORTHOGONALITY OF TWO CIRCLES (g) Pairs of circles which do not have radical axis are
concentric.
Two circles S1 = 0 & S2 = 0 are said to be orthogonal or said
to intersect orthogonally if the tangents at their point of (h) The centre of a variable circle orthogonal to two fixed
intersection include a right angle. The condition for two circles lies on the radical axis of two circles.

circles to be orthogonal is : (i) The centre of a circle which is orthogonal to three given
circles is the radical centre provided the radical centre lies
2g1g2 + 2 f1f2 = c1 + c2. or r12 + r22 = d 2
outside all the three circles.
CIRCLES
57

18. FAMILY OF CIRCLES NOTES :

(a) The equation of the family of circles passing  Family of circles circumscribing a triangle whose sides
through the points of intersection of two circles are given by L1 = 0; L2 = 0 and L3 = 0 is given by ;
S1 = 0 and S2 = 0 is : S1 + K S2 = 0 L1L2 +  L2L3 +  L3L1 = 0 provided co-efficient of xy = 0
(K  –1, provided the co-efficient of x2 & y2 in and co-efficient of x² = co-efficient of y².
S1 & S2 are same)  Equation of circle circumscribing a quadrilateral
(b) The equation of the family of circles passing through whose side in order are represented by the lines
the point of intersection of a circle S = 0 & a line L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 & L4 = 0 are  L1L3 + L2L4 = 0 where
L = 0 is given by S + KL = 0. value of and  can be found out by using condition
that co-efficient of x2 = co-efficient of y2 and co-efficient
(c) The equation of a family of circles passing through
of xy = 0.
two given points (x1, y1) & (x2, y2) can be written in
the form :

x y 1
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) + K x 1 y 1 1  0 where
x2 y2 1

K is a parameter.
(d) The equation of a family of circles touching a
fixed line y – y1 = m(x – x 1) at the fixed point
(x1, y1) is

(x – x1)2 + (y – y1)2 + K[y – y1 – m (x – x1)] = 0 where

K is a parameter.

SCAN CODE
Circles
CIRCLES 58

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example – 1 Example – 3

The lines 2x – 3y = 5 and 3x – 4y = 7 are diameters of a circle The equation of a circle with origin as a centre and passing
having area as 154 sq. units. Then the equation of the through equilateral triangle whose median is of length 3a
circle is is
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y = 47 (a) x2 + y2 = 9a2 (b) x2 + y2 = 16a2
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y = 47 (c) x2 + y2 = 4a2 (d) x2 + y2 = a2
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y = 62 Ans. (c)
(d) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y = 62 Sol. Given medium of the equilateral triangle is 3a.
Ans. (b) In DLMD, ( LM ) 2 = ( LD ) 2 + ( MD ) 2
Sol. Centre of the circle is the point of intersection of both
lines, i.e., (1, –1) æ LM ö
2

( LM ) 2 = 9a 2 + ç ÷
Again p R 2 = 154, R 2 = 49 Þ R = 7 è 2 ø

\ Required equation of circle be 3

Þ ( LM )2 = 9a 2 \ ( LM ) 2 = 12a 2
( x - 1) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 49 4

Þ x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 2 y = 47
Again in triangle OMD, (OM ) 2 = (OD ) 2 + ( MD ) 2

2
æ LM ö
Example – 2 R 2 = (3a - R) 2 + ç ÷
è 2 ø
The point diametrically opposite to the point P(1, 0) on the
circle x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 3 = 0 is Þ R 2 = 9a2 + R 2 - 6aR + 3a 2
(a) (3, 4) (b) (3, –4)
(c) (–3, 4) (d) (–3, –4)
Ans. (d)
Sol. The center C of the circle is seen to be (-1,-2). As C is the
mid point of P and P’ the coordinate of P’ is given by
P' º (-3, -4)

Remark : If P be (a , b ) and C (h, k ) then

P ' º (2h - a , 2k - b )
Þ 6aR = 12a 2
R = 2a
So, equation of circle be

( x - 0) 2 + ( y - 0) 2 = R 2 = (2a) 2

Þ x 2 + y 2 = 4a 2
CIRCLES 59

Example – 4 4h + 8k = 44
- 7k = –28 Þ k = 4
If the lines 2x + 3y + 1 = 0 and 3x – y – 4 = 0 lie along
diameters of a circle of circumference 10p, then the equation Substituting k = 4 in equation (iii) we get
of the circle is 4h + 4 = 16
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 23 = 0 or 4h = 12
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y – 23 = 0 or h=3
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 23 = 0 Substituting the value of h = 3, k = 4 in equation
(d) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 23 = 0 (i) we get
Ans. (c) (4 – 3)2 + (1 – 4)2 = r2
Sol. As per given condition center of the circle is the point of or 1 + 9 = r2
intersection of the 2 x + 3 y + 1 = 0 and 3x - y - 4 = 0 or 10 = r2
\ center is (1, -1) Hence, the required equation of the circle is
Also circumference of the circle is given (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 10
or x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 – 8y + 16 = 10
2p r = 10p , \ r = 5
or x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 15 = 0
\ Required equation of cicle is
( x - 1) 2 + ( y + 1)2 = 52 Example – 6

Or x 2 + y 2 - 2 x + 2 y - 23 = 0 Find the equation of the circle with radius 5 whose centre

lies on x-axis and passes through the point (2, 3).
Example – 5 Sol. Let the equation of the circle be (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
Since the circle passes through, (2, 3) and its radius is 5
Find the equation of the circle passing through the points
(2 – h)2 + (3 – k)2 = 25
(4, 1) and (6, 5) and whose centre is on the line
4x + y=16 or 4 – 4h + h2 + 9 – 6k + k2 = 25
Sol. Let the equations of the circle be (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 or – 12 –4h + h2 – 6k + k2 = 0 ... (i)
Since the circle passes through (4, 1) and (6, 5), we have Also since the centre lies on the x-axis, we have
(4 – h)2 + (1 – k)2 = r2 ... (i) k=0 ... (ii)
and (6 – h)2 + (5 – k)2 = r2 ... (ii) Putting k = 0 in equation (i) we have
Also, since the centre lies on the line 4x + y = 16, we have – 12 – 4h + h2 = 0
4h + k = 16 ... (iii) or h2 – 4h – 12 = 0
Simplifying the equation (i), we get or h2 – 6h + 2h – 12 = 0
16 – 8h + h2 + 1 – 2k + k2 = r2 or h (h – 6) + 2(h – 6) = 0
or 17 – 8h + h2 – 2k + k2 = r2 or (h – 6) (h + 2) = 0
from equation (ii), we get or h = 6 or h = –2
2
36 – 12h + h + 25 – 10k + k = r 2 2 Hence, the required equations of the circle are
or 2
61 – 12h + h – 10k + k = r 2 2 (a) For h = 6
Now, (x – 6)2 + (y – 0)2 = (5)2
17 – 61 – 8h + 12h –2k + 10k = 0 or x2 – 12x + 36 + y2 = 25
(eliminating square terms) or x2 + y2 – 12x + 11 = 0
or –44 + 4h + 8k = 0 (b) For h = –2
or 4h + 8k = 44 ... (iv) (x – (–2))2 + (y – 0)2 = (5)2
Solving equations (iii) and (iv) we get or (x + 2)2 + y2 = 25
4h + k = 16 or x2 + 4x + 4 + y2 = 25
or x2 + y2 + 4x – 21 = 0
CIRCLES 60

Example – 7 Example – 9

Find the equation of a circle with centre (2, 2) which passes Find the equation of the circle passing through (1, 0) and
through the point (4, 5) (0, 1) and having the smallest possible radius.
Sol. Since the centre is (2, 2) Sol. Let the equation of the required circle be
We have (x – 2)2 + (y – 2)2 = r2 x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i)
This circle passes through the point (4, 5) This passes through A (1, 0) and B (0, 1).
(4 – 2)2 + (5 – 2)2 = r2 \ 1 + 2g + c = 0 and 1 + 2 f + c = 0
or 4 + 9 = r2
æ c +1 ö æ c +1ö
or r2 = 13 Þ g = -ç ÷ and f = - ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
The required equation of the circle is

(x – 2)2 + (y – 2)2 = 13 Let r be the radius of circle (i). Then,

or x2 – 4x + 4 + y2 – 4y + 4 = 13 r = g2 + f 2 - c
or x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y – 5 = 0

2 2
Example – 8 æ c +1ö æ c +1ö
Þ r= ç ÷ +ç ÷ -c
è 2 ø è 2 ø
A circle has radius equal to 3 units and its centre lies on
the line y = x – 1. Find the equation of the circle if it passes
æ c2 + 1 ö
through (7, 3). Þ r= ç ÷
è 2 ø
Sol. Let the centre of the circle be (a, b). It lies on the line
y=x–1
1 2
Þ b = a – 1. Hence the centre is (a, a – 1). Þ r2 = (c + 1)
2
Þ Then equation of the circle is (x – a)2 + (y – a + 1)2 = 9.
Clearly, r is minimum when c = 0 and the minimum value of r
It passes through (7, 3)

Þ (7 – a)2 + (4 – a)2 = 9 1
is .
2
Þ a2 – 11a + 28 = 0

Þ (a – 4) (a – 7) = 0 Þ a = 4, 7. For c = 0, we have

Hence the required equations are

1 1
g=- and f = -
x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 16 = 0 and 2 2

x2 + y2 – 14x – 12y + 76 = 0.
Substituting the values of g, f and c in (i), we get

x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 as the equation of the required circle.

CIRCLES 61

Example – 10
æ1 ö
Therefore, the given circle has centre at ç ,0 ÷ and has
In each of the following questions, find the centre and è4 ø
radius of the circles
1
(i) (x + 5)2 + (y – 3)2 = 36 radius .
4
(ii) x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 45 = 0
(iii) x2 + y2 – 8x + 10y – 12 = 0 Example – 11
(iv) 2x2 + 2y2 – x = 0
Find the centre and radius of the circle
Sol. (x + 5)2 + (y – 3)2 = 36
(x cos a + y sin a – a)2 + (x sin a – y cos a – b)2 = k2,
or (x – (–5))2 + (y – 3)2 = 62
h = –5, k = 3 and r = 6 if a varies, the locus of its centre is again a circle. Also,
find its centre and radius.
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (–5, 3) and radius 6.
(ii) The given equation is Sol. The given equation is

x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 45 = 0 (x cos a + y sin a – a)2 + (x sin a – y cos a – b)2 = k2

or (x2 – 4x) + (y2 – 8y) = 45 Þ x2 (cos2 a + sin2 a) + y2 (sin2 a + cos2 a) – 2 (a cos a + b sin a)
(x2 – 4x + 4) + (y2 – 8y + 16) = 4 + 16 + 45 x –2 (a sin a – b cos a) y + a2 + b2 – k2 = 0
or (x–2)2 + (y–4)2 = 65 Þ x2 + y2 – 2x (a cos a + b sin a) – 2y (a sin a – b cos a) + a2 +
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (2, 4) and radius b2 – k2 = 0

65 The coordinates of the centre of this circle are

(iii) The given equation is (a cos a + b sin a, a sin a – b cos a)

2 2
x + y – 8x + 10y – 12 = 0
and, Radius = (a cos a + bsin a)2 + (a sin a - bcos a) 2 - (a 2 + b 2 - k 2 )
2 2
or (x – 8x) + (y + 10) = 12
or (x2–8x + 16) + (y2 + 10y + 25) = 12 + 16 + 25 Þ Radius = a 2 (cos2 a + sin 2 a) + b2 (sin 2 a + cos 2 a) - (a 2 + b 2 - k 2 )
or (x – 4)2 + (y + 5)2 = 53
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (4, –5) and radius Þ Radius = a 2 + b2 - a 2 - b2 + k 2 = k

53 . Let (p, q) be the coordinates of the centre of the given circle.

(iv) The given equation is Then,
2x2 + 2y2 – x = 0 p = a cos a + b sin a and q = a sin a – b cos a

x To find the locus of (p, q) we have to eliminate a.

or x 2 + y2 - =0
2 Squaring and adding these two, we get

p2 + q2 = (a cos a + b sin a)2 + (a sin a – b cos a)2

æ 2 xö 2
or çx - ÷+ y = 0 Þ p2 + q2 = a2 (cos2 a + sin2 a) + b2 (sin2 a + cos2 a)
è 2ø
Þ p2 + q 2 = a 2 + b2
æ 2 x 1ö 2 1
or çx - + ÷+ y =
è 2 16 ø 16 Hence, the locus of (p, q) is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2

2 This is a circle having centre at (0, 0) and radius equal to a 2 + b2 .

æ 1ö 2 1
or çx - ÷ + y =
è 4ø 16
CIRCLES 62

Example – 12 Example – 14

Find the equation of the circle that passes through the

x y
points (1, 0), (–1, 0) and (0, 1). The straight line + = 1 cuts the coordinate axes at
a b
Sol. Let the required circle be x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i) A and B. Find the equation of the circle passing through
It passes through (1, 0), (–1, 0) and (0, 1). O (0, 0), A and B
Therefore, on substituting the coordinates of three points x y
successively in equation (i), we get Sol. The straight line + = 1 cuts the coordinate axes at A (a,
a b
1 + 2g + c = 0 ... (ii), 0) and B (0, b).
1 – 2g + c = 0 ... (iii), Let x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 be the circle passing through
1 + 2f + c = 0 ... (iv) O, A and B. Then, ... (i)
Subtracting (iii) from (ii), we get 0+0+c=0 ... (ii)
2
4g = 0 Þ g = 0 a + 2ga + c = 0 ... (iii)
2
Putting g = 0 in (ii), we obtain c = –1 b + 2fb + c = 0 ... (iv)

Now putting c = –1 in (iv), we get f = 0 Solving (ii), (iii) and (iv), we obtain

Substituting the values of g, f and c in (i), we obtain the a b

g = - , f = - and c = 0
equation of the required circle as x2 + y2 = 1 2 2
Substituting these values in (i), we obtain the equation of
Example – 13 the required circle as
Find the equation of the circle which passes through the x2 + y2 – ax – by = 0
points (5, –8), (2, –9) and (2, 1). Find also the coordinates
of its centre and radius. Example – 15
Sol. Let the required circle be Show that the points (9, 1), (7, 9) (–2, 12) and (6, 10) are
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i) concyclic.
It passes through (5, –8), (2, –9) and (2, 1). Therefore, Sol. Let the equation of the circle passing through (9, 1), (7, 9)
\ 89 + 10g – 16f + c = 0 ... (ii) and (–2, 12) be
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i)
85 + 4g – 18f + c = 0 ... (iii)
Then, 82 + 18g + 2f + c = 0 ... (ii)
5 + 4g + 2f + c = 0 ... (iv)
130 + 14g + 18f + c = 0 ... (iii)
Subtracting (iii) from (ii), we obtain
148 – 4g + 24f + c = 0 ... (iv)
4 + 6g + 2f = 0 Þ 2 + 3g + f = 0... (v)
Subtracting (ii) from (iii), we get
Subtracting (iv) from (iii), we get
48 – 4g + 16 f = 0 Þ 12 – g + 4f = 0 ... (v)
80 – 20f = 0 Þ f = 4
Subtracting (iii) from (iv), we get
Putting f = 4 in (v), we get g = –2
18 – 18g + 6f = 0 Þ 3 – 3g + f = 0 ... (vi)
Putting f = 4, g = –2 in (iv), we get
Solving (v) and (vi) as simultaneous linear equations in g and f,
5 – 8 + 8 + c = 0 Þ c = –5 we get
Substituting the values of g, f, c in (i), we obtain the equation f = –3, g = 0
of the required circle as
Putting f = –3, g = 0 in (ii), we get
x2 + y2 –4x + 8y – 5 = 0
82 + 0 –6 + c = 0 Þ c = – 76
The coordinates of the centre are (–g, –f) i.e., (2, –4) Substituting the values of g, f, c in (i), we get

and Radius = g 2 + f 2 - c = 4 + 16 + 5 = 5 x2 + y2 – 6y – 76 = 0
Clearly, point (6, 10) satisfies this equation. Hence, the given
points are concyclic.
CIRCLES 63

Example – 16 Sol. Equation of circle ( x - h) 2 + ( y - k ) 2 = k 2

Find the equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle It is passing through (-1, 1)
formed by the lines x + y = 6, 2x + y = 4 and x + 2y = 5.
( -1 - h) 2 + (1 - k ) 2 = k 2 Þ h 2 + 2h - 2k + 2 = 0, D ³ 0
Sol. Let the equations of sides AB, BC and CA of D ABC are
respectively
1
2k - 1 ³ 0 Þ k ³ .
x+y= 6 ... (i) 2
2x + y = 4 ... (ii)
and x + 2y = 5 ... (iii) Example – 18

Solving (i) and (iii), (i) and (ii); (ii) and (iii) we get the
A circle of radius 2 lies in the first quadrant and touches
coordinates of A, B and C.
both the axes of co-ordinates. Find the equation of the
The coordinates A, B and C are (7, –1), (–2, 8) and (1, 2) circle with centre at (6, 5) and touching the above circle
respectively. externally.
Let the equation of the circumcircle of DABC be Sol. Given, AC = 2 units
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (iv) and A º (2, 2), B º (6, 5)
It passes through A (7, –1), B (–2, 8) and C (1, 2). Therefore,
50 + 14g – 2f + c = 0 ... (v)
68 – 4g + 16f + c = 0 ... (vi)
5 + 2g + 4f + c = 0 ... (vii)
Subtracting (v) from (vi), we get
18 – 18g + 18f = 0 Þ 1 – g + f = 0 ... (viii)
Subtracting (v) from (vii), we get – 45 – 12g + 6f = 0 ... (ix)
Solving (viii) and (ix), we get g = –17/2, f = –19/2.
Putting the values of g and f in (v), we get c = 50.
Substituting the values of g, f and c in (iv), the equation of the
required circumcircle is
x2 + y2 – 17x – 19y + 50 = 0

Example – 17

Consider a family of circles which are passing through the

point (–1, 1) and are tangent to x–axis. If (h, k) are the then AB = (2 - 6) 2 + (2 - 5) 2 = 16 + 9 = 5
coordinate of the centre of the circles, then the set of
Since AC + CB = AB
values of k is given by the interval
\ 2 + CB = 5
1 1 1
(a) - £k£ (b) k £ \ CB = 3
2 2 2
Hence equation of required circle with centre at (6, 5) and radius 3 is
1 1 (x – 6)2 + (y – 5)2 = 32
(c) 0 £ k £ (d) k ³
2 2 or x2 + y2 – 12x – 10y + 52 = 0
Ans. (d)
CIRCLES 64

Example – 19 Example – 21

A variable circle passes through the fixed point A(p, q) If the point (1, 4) lies inside the circle x2 +y2-6x -10y + p = 0
and touches x–axis. The locus of the other end of the and the circle does not touch or intersect the coordinate
diameter through A is axes, then the set of all possible values of p is the interval:
(a) (y – p)2 = 4qx (b) (x – q)2 = 4py (a) (0, 25) (b) (25, 39)
(c) (x – p)2 = 4qy (d) (y – q)2 = 4px (c) (9, 25) (d) (25, 29)
Ans. (c) Ans. (d)
Sol. Let the other end of diameter be B (). Equation of circle Sol. (1, 4) lies inside circle
with AB as diameter is given by  1  16  6  40  P  0

( x  p)( x   )  ( y  q)( y   )  0  P  29  (1)

Now it does not touch or intersect co-ordinate axes
 x 2  y 2  x ( p   )  y ( q   )  p  q   0 ...(I) At x = 0

Now (I) touches x–axis on so put y = 0 in (I) y 2  10y  p  0

Hence, D < 0
 x 2  x( p   )  p  q   0 and D  0 100  4p  0
Or
 ( p   ) 2  4  p  q 
p  25
Hence
p  (25, 29)

Example – 22
A (p, q)
Find the shortest and largest distance from the point
x-axis (2, –7) to the circle x2 + y2 – 14x – 10y – 151 = 0
Sol. Let S  x2 + y2 – 14x – 10y – 151 = 0
 ( p   ) 2  4q   S1 = (2)2 + (–7)2 – 14 (2) – 10 (–7) – 151
= – 56 < 0
Now  x,   y

 ( p  x ) 2  4q ( y ) which is required locus of one end

point of the diameter.

Example – 20

The equation of the circle passing through the point

(1, 0) and (0, 1) and having the smallest radius is
(a) x2 + y2 + x + y – 2 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 7 = 0  P (2, –7) lies inside the circle
Ans. (c)
 radius of the circle r  ( 7) 2  ( 5) 2  151  15
Sol. Radius will be minimum when (1, 0) and (0,1) are end point
 Centre of circle C  (7, 5)
of diameter
 equation of circle is  CP  (7  2) 2  (5  7) 2  13
 Shortest distance = PA = r – CP = 15 – 13 = 2
( x  1)( x  0)  ( y  0)( y  1)  0
and Largest distance = PB = r + CP = 15 + 13 = 28
2 2
 x  y x y  0
CIRCLES 65

Example – 23 Let OM be the perpendicular from O on the line

4x – 3y – 10 = 0
Find the equation of the circle which touches the axis of y
at a distance of 4 units from the origin and cuts the intercept 4 ´ 1 - 3 ´ ( -2) - 10
of 6 units from the axis of x. then OM = =0
4 2 + ( - 3) 2
Sol. Q CM = NO = 4
In D PCM, (PC)2 = (3)2 + (4)2 Hence line 4x – 3y – 10 = 0 passes through the centre of the
\ PC = 5 circle.
hence intercepted length = diameter of the circle
= 2 × 5 = 10

Example – 25

No tangent can be drawn from the point (5/2, 1) to the

circumcircle of the triangle with vertices

1, 3 , 1, - 3 , 3, - 3
radius of circle = 5
\ NC = 5 Ans. True

centre of circle is (5, 4) Sol. The circle passe through

\ Equation of circle, if centre in I quadrant
A 1, 3 , B 1, - 3 and C 3, - 3
(x – 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25
If centre in II, III and IV quadrant, then equations are
Here line AB is parallel to y-axis and BC is
(x + 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25,
Parallel to x-axis Þ ÐABC = 90°
(x + 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25
and (x – 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25 Þ AC is diameter of circle
Hence, there are 4 circles which satisfy the given conditions.
Þ equation of circle is
They are
(x ± 5)2 + (y ± 4)2 = 25
( x - 1)( x - 3) + y - 3 y+ 3 =0
or x2 + y2 ± 10x ± 8y + 16 = 0

Example – 24 Þ x2 + y 2 - 4x = 0

Find the length of the intercept on the straight line

æ5 ö
4x – 3y – 10 = 0 by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0. the position of point ç ,1÷
è2 ø
Sol. Centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0 are
(1, –2) and 1 + 4 + 20 = 5 respectively.. with respect to circle is

25
S1 = + 1 - 10 < 0
4

Þ Point lies inside the circle

Þ No tangent can be drawn.
Þ given statement is true.
CIRCLES 66

Example – 26 Example – 27

Find the equations of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 =9, Find the length of tangents drawn from the point (3, –4) to
which the circle 2x2 + 2y2 – 7x – 9y – 13 = 0.
(i) are parallel to the line 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 Sol. The equation of the given circle is

(ii) are perpendicular to the line 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 2x2 + 2y2 – 7x – 9y – 13 = 0

Re-writing the given equation of the circle in standard form
(iii) make an angle of 60° with the x-axis
7 9 13
3 i.e., x 2  y2  x  y   0
Sol. (i) Slope of 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 is  2 2 2
4
7 9 13
3
Let S  x 2  y2  x  y 
Let m   2 2 2
4
7 9 13
and equation of circle is x2 + y2 = 9  S1  (3) 2  (4) 2   3   (4) 
2 2 2
 Equations of tangents are
21 13
 25   18 
  3 2
 2 2
3
y x3 1     
4   4  = 43 – 17 = 26
 
 Length of tangent  S1  26
 4y = –3x ± 15
or 3x + 4y ± 15 = 0
Example – 28
2
(ii) slope of 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is  If the length of tangent from (f, g) to the circle x2 + y2 = 6 be
3
twice the length of the tangent from (f, g) to circle
x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y = 0 then will f2 + g2 + 4f + 4g + 2 = 0 ?
3
 Slope of perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is  m (say)
2 Sol. According to the question

and given circle is x2 + y2 = 9

(g 2  f 2  6)  2 (f 2  g 2  3f  3g)
 Equations of tangents perpendicular to 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is
On squaring, g2 + f2 – 6 = 4f2 + 4g2 + 12f + 12g
2
3 3 or 3f2 + 3g2 +12f + 12g + 6 = 0
y x  3 1  
2 2 or f2 + g2 + 4f + 4g + 2 = 0
which is true, yes.
 2y  3x  3 13
Example – 29
or 3x  2y  3 13  0

(iii) Since tangent make an angle 60° with the x-axis Find the power of point (2, 4) with respect to the circle
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8 = 0
 m  tan 60  3
Sol. The power of the point (2, 4) with respect to the circle
and given circle x2 + y2 = 9
x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8 = 0 is ( S1 )2 or S1
 Equation of tangents are y  3x  3 1  ( 3) 2 where S = x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 8
 S1 = (2)2 + (4)2 – 6 × 2 + 4 × 4 – 8
or 3x  y  6  0 = 4 + 16 – 12 + 16 – 8 = 16
CIRCLES 67

Example – 30 Example – 31

The angle between a pair of tangents drawn from a point P Find the equations of the tangents to the circle
x2 + y2 = 16 drawn from the point (1, 4).
to the circle x2 +y2 +4x –6y +9 sin2 a + 13 cos2 a = 0 is 2a.
The equation of the locus of the point P is : Sol. Given circle is
x2 + y2 = 16 ... (1)
(a) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 4 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 9 = 0
Any tangent of (1) in terms of slope is
(c) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 4 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 9 = 0
Ans. (d) y = mx + 4 (1 + m 2 ) ... (2)

Sol. Centre of the circle which passes through (1, 4)

x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 6 y + 9 sin 2 a + 13cos 2 a = 0 is then 4 = m + 4 (1 + m 2 )

C(-2, 3) and its radius is Þ (4–m)2 = 16 (1 + m2)

( -2) 2 + (3) 2 - 9sin 2 a - 13cos 2 a 8

Þ 15m2 + 8m = 0 \ m = 0, –
15
= 13 - 13cos 2 a - 9sin 2 a From (2), equations of tangents drawn from (1, 4) are

= 13sin 2 a - 9sin 2 a = 4sin 2 a = 2 sin a 8 64

y = 4 and y = - x + 4 1+
15 225

or 8x + 15y = 68 respectively.

Example – 32

Find the equations of the tangents from the point A(3, 2)

to the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8 = 0.

Sol. Combined equation of the pair of tangents drawn from

A(3, 2) to the given circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8 = 0 can be
written in the usual notation.
p
Let P(h,k) be any point and ÐAPC = a , ÐPAC = T2 = SS1 namely
2
Þ [3x + 2y + 2(x + 3) + 3 (y + 2) + 8]2 = [x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8]
That is, triangle APC is a right angled triangle
[9 + 4 + 12 + 12 + 8]
AC 2sin a
\ sin a = = Þ (5x + 5y + 20)2 = 45 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8)
PC (h + 2)2 + (k - 3) 2
Þ 5 (x + y + 4)2 = 9 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 8)
Þ ( h + 2) 2 + ( k - 3) 2 = 4 Þ 5 (x2 + y2 + 2xy + 8x + 8y + 16) = 9 (x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y +8)

Þ h2 + 4 + 4h + k 2 + 9 - 6k = 4 Þ 4x2 + 4y2 – 10xy – 4x + 14y – 8 = 0

or 2x2 + 2y2 – 5xy – 2x + 7y – 4 = 0

Þ h 2 + k 2 + 4h - 6 k + 9 = 0
or (2x – y – 4) (x – 2y + 1) = 0
Thus, required equation of lous is
Hence the required tangents to the circle from A (3, 2) are
x2 + y2 + 4x - 6 y + 9 = 0
2x – y – 4 = 0 and x – 2y + 1 = 0
CIRCLES 68

Example – 33 | 0 + 0 - b2 |
 =c
(a 2 cos 2 θ + a 2 sin 2 θ)
Find the co–ordinates of the point from which tangents are
 b2 = ac  a, b, c are in G.P.
drawn to the circle x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y + 3 = 0 such that the mid
point of its chord of contact is (1, 1). Example – 35
Sol. Let the required point be P(x1, y1). Find the condition that chord of contact of any external
point (h, k) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 should subtend right
The equation of the chord of contact of P with respect to
angle at the centre of the circle.
the given circle is
Sol. Equation of chord of contact AB is
xx1 + yy1 – 3(x + x1) – 2(y + y1) + 3 = 0. ...(1) hx + ky = a2 ...(i)
Now we will find equation of pair of lines OA and OB by
Then equation of the chord with mid–point (1, 1) is
homogenising x2 + y2 = a2 with equation of chord of contact
x + y – 3(x + 1) – 2(y + 1) + 3 = 1 + 1 – 6 – 4 + 3 AB.
From (i) hx + ky = a2 . 1
 2x + y = 3.
hx  ky
Equating the ratios of the coefficients of x, y and the constant  1 ...(ii)
a2
terms and solving for x1, y1 we get x1 = – 1, y1 = 0 To homogenise circle x2 + y2 = a2 with equation of chord
of contact AB, we can write circle as x2 + y2 = a2 . 12 and
Example – 34 replace value of (1) from (ii).

2
 hx  ky 
The chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point  x2 + y2 = a2  2 
 a 
on the circle x2 + y2 = a2 to the circle x2 + y2 = b2
 a2 (x2 + y2) = (hx + ky)2
touches the circle x2 + y2 = c2. Show that a, b, c are in G.P.
 x2 (a2 – h2) – 2hkxy + y2 (a2 – k2) = 0
Sol. Let P (a cos , a sin ) be a point on the circle x2 + y2 = a2.
The equation represents pair of straight lines.
Then equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from
It is given that AB substends angle /2 at O. It implies
P (a cos , a sin ) to the circle x2 + y2 = b2 is

AOB 
2
 angle between pair of lines OA and OB is /2.
Angle between pair of lines is 90° if
coefficient of x2 + coefficient of y2 = 0
 a2 – h2 + a2 – k2 = 0
 h2 + k2 = 2a2

ax cos  + ay sin  = b2 ...(i)

This touches the circle x2 + y2 = c2 ...(ii)
 Length of perpendicular from (0, 0) to (i) = radius of (ii)
CIRCLES 69

Example – 36 Example – 39

Through a fixed point (h, k), secants are drawn to the A circle touches the x–axis and also touches the circle
circle x2 + y2 = r2. Show that the locus of mid point of the with centre at (0, 3) and radius 2. The locus of the centre of
portions of secants intercepted by the circle is the circle is
x2 + y2 = hx + ky. (a) a circle (b) an ellipse

Sol. Let P (x1, y1) be the middle point of any chord AB, which (c) a parabola (d) a hyperbola
passes through the point C (h, k). Ans. (c)

Sol. Let C1 (h, k) be the center of the circle.

Circle touches the x- axis then its radius r1 = k .

Also circle touches the circle with centre C 2 (0,3) and

radius r2 = 2.

\ C1C2 = r1 + r2

2 2
Þ h-0 + k -3 = k+2

Squaring
Equation of chord AB is T = S1
h 2 - 10k + 5 = 0
\ xx1 + yy1 – r2 = x12 + y12 – r2
Þ Locus is x 2 - 10y + 5 = 0 , which is parabola.
or x12 + y12 = xx1 + yy1

But since AB passes through C (h, k) then Example – 40

x12 + y12 = hx1 + ky1 The two circles x2 + y2 = ax and x2 + y2 = c2 (c > 0) touch
each other if
\ Locus of P (x1, y1) is x2 + y2 = hx + ky
(a) |a| = c (b) a = 2c
(c) |a| = 2c (d) 2|a| = c
Example – 37
Ans. (a)
2 2
Find the equation of the chord of x + y – 6x + 10y –9 =0 Sol. The centers and radii of the circles
which is bisected at (–2, 4).
2
æ aö 2 a2 2 2 2
Sol. The equation of the required chord is ç x - ÷ + y = , x + y = c are
è 2 ø 4
–2x + 4y –3 (x – 2) + 5 (y + 4) – 9 = 4 + 16 + 12 + 40 – 9
Þ –5x + 9y – 46 = 0 æa ö a
C1 ç ,0 ÷ , C2 0, 0 , r1 = , r2 = c
or 5x – 9y + 46 = 0 è2 ø 2

Two circles touch each other if C1C2 = r1 ± r2

Example – 38

If two tangents are drawn from a point on the circle a a

Þ = ±c
x2 + y2 = 50 to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 then find the angle 2 2
between the tangents.
a a
Sol. Q x2 + y2 = 50 is the director circle of x2 + y2 = 25 Þ = c-
2 2
Hence angle between tangents = 90°
\ a = c.
CIRCLES 70

Example – 41 Example – 43

Prove that the circles x 2 + y 2 + 2ax + c 2 = 0 and Show that the common tangents to the circles
1 1 1 x2 + y2 – 6x = 0 and x2 + y2 + 2x = 0 form are equilateral
x2 + y2 + 2by + c2 = 0 touch each other, if 2
 2 2 triangle.
a b c
Sol. For the circle x2 + y2 – 6x = 0
Sol. Given circles are
centre C1  (3, 0) and r1 = 3
x2 + y2 + 2ax + c2 = 0 ... (1)
And for the circle x2 + y2 + 2x = 0
and x2 + y2 + 2by + c2 = 0 ... (2)
centre C2 (–1, 0) and r2 = 1
Let C 1 and C 2 be the centres of circles (1) and (2)
respectively and r1 and r2 be their radii, then

C1 = (–a, 0), C2 = (0, –b), r1  a 2  c 2 , r2  b 2  c 2

Here we do not find the two circles touch each other

internally or externally.

For touch, C1 C2  r1  r2

or (a 2  b 2 )  ( a 2  c 2 )  (b 2  c 2 )

Now C1C2 = [3  ( 1)]2  0  4 and r1 + r2 = 4

On squaring a2 + b2 = a2 – c2 + b2 – c2 ± 2 2 2 2
(a  c ) (b  c ) 2

 C1 C2 = r1 + r2
or c 2   a 2 b 2  c 2 (a 2  b 2 )  c 4 Hence the two circles touch each other externally,
therefore, there will be three common tangents.
Again squaring, c4 = a2b2 – c2 (a2 + b2) + c4
Equation of the common tangent at the point of contact is
or c2 (a2 + b2) = a2b2 S1 – S2 = 0
1 1 1  (x2 + y2 – 6x) – (x2 + y2 + 2x) = 0
or 2
 2  2
a b c  – 8x = 0
 x=0
Example – 42 Let the point of intersection of direct common tangent be
Q (h, k). Then Q divides C1 C2 externally in the ratio of 1 : 3.
Examine if the two circles x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 and
x2 + y2 – 8y – 4 = 0 touch each other externally or internally. 1.3  3. 1
 h = –3 and k = 0
Sol. Given circles are 1 3
x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 ... (1)  Q  (–3, 0)
2 2
and x + y – 8y – 4 = 0 ... (2) Let the equation of direct common tangent be :
Let centres and radii of circles (1) and (2) are represented by y – 0 = m (x + 3) or mx – y + 3m = 0 ...(i)
C1, r1 and C2, r2 respectively.
Apply condition of tangency with second circle to get :
 C1  (1, 2), r1  1  4  5 |  m  0  3m |
 =1  4m2 = m2 + 1
and C2  (0, 4), r2  0  16  4  2 5 m2 1

1
Now C1 C 2  (1  0) 2  (2  4) 2  3m2 = 1  m=±
3
C1C2  5  r2  r1 From(i), direct common tangents are :
Hence the two circles touch each other internally.
CIRCLES 71

tangents intersects C1C2 at D and C respectively then

x x
y= + 3 and y = - - 3 point D will divide C2 C1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (externally). And
3 3
the point C divide C2 C1 in the ratio 3 : 1 (internally)
Hence all common tangents are
æ 3 1 -1 - 3 3 3 - 1 1 ö
Þ Co–ordinates of D are ç , ÷
x=0 ...(ii) è 3 -1 3 -1 ø

x or (3, 4)
y= + 3 ...(iii)
3
æ 3 1 +1 - 3 3 3 +1 1 ö
and co–ordinates of C are ç , ÷
x è 3 +1 3 +1 ø
and y=- - 3 ....(iv)
3 or (0, 5/2)
Let P, Q, R be the point of intersection of these lines. Step 2 : (Equation of transverse common tangent)
On solving, we get : Equation of line through C º (0, 5/2) is y – 5/2 = mx
or mx – y + 5/2 = 0 ...(i)
P º (0, 3 ) ; Q º (–3, 0) and R º (0, – 3)
Step (i) Apply the usual condition of tangency using first
Now PQ = QR = RP = 2 3 circle to get :

Hence DPQR is an equilateral triangle. Thus common m ×1 - 3 + 5 / 2

\ = ±1
tangents form an equilateral triangle. m2 + 1

Example – 44 1
Þ m2 + – m = m2 + 1
4
Find equation of all the common tangents to the circles
x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y + 9 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 6x – 2y + 1 = 0 3
Þ 0. m2 – m – = 0.
Sol. For the circle x2 + y2 – 2x– 6y + 9 = 0 4

centre C1 º (1, 3) and r1 = 1 Þ m = ¥ and m = – 3/4

and for the circle x 2 + y2 + 6x – 2y + 1 = 0 Step (ii) Hence equations of transverse tangents are
centre C2 º (–3, 1) and r2 = 3 x = 0 and 3x + 4y – 10 = 0.
Step 3 : (Equation of direct common tangent)
Equation of any line through (3, 4) is y – 4 = m (x – 3)
Þ m x – y + 4 – 3m = 0
Step (iii) Apply the usual condition of tangency using
first circle to get :

m - 3 + 4 - 3m
=±1
m2 + 1
Now C1 C2 = 16 + 4 = 2 5 and r1 + r2 = 4
Þ (– 2m + 1)2 = m2 + 1
Þ C1 C2 > r1 + r2 Þ 3m2 – 4m = 0
Hence the circles do not intersect to each other. \ m = 0, m = 4/3
So there will be four common tangents between them. Step (iv) Equations of Direct common tangents are
Applying the working rule, we get : y = 4 and 4x – 3y = 0.
Step 1 : The direct common tangents and transverse common
CIRCLES 72

NOTES : then –g = 2
\ g = –2 ... (3)
When two circles S1 and S2 are of same radii then From (2), 1 – 2f + c = 0 ... (4)
(i) For Indirect tangents the approach is same as given 2 2
and given circle is x + y + 5x + 7y – 4 = 0 ... (5)
above.
Given the circles (1) and (5) cut each other orthogonally,
(ii) For Direct tangent we can use following approach.
5 7
\ 2g ´ + 2f ´ = c - 4
2 2
or 5g + 7f = c – 4
– 10 + 7f = c – 4 (from (3))
or –6 + 7f – c = 0 ... (6)
Let the slope of direct common tangent be m from figure Solving (4) and (6), we get
we have slope of C1C2 = m then equation of direct
f = 1 and c = 1
common tangent be y = mx + c, where ‘c’ is the unknown
variable parameter. Apply condition tangency to find the Substituting the values of g, f, c in (1), we get
value of c. x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 1 = 0

Example – 45 Example – 47

Show that the circles x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 8 = 0 and Find the equation of the circle passing through the point
x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 touch at (3, –1). of intersection of the circles x2 + y2 – 6x + 2y + 4 = 0,
Sol. Equation of tangent at (3, –1) of the circle x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 6 = 0 and with its centre on the line
x2 + y2 –4x + 6y + 8 = 0 is y= x

3x + (–1) y – 2 (x + 3) + 3 (y – 1) + 8 = 0 Sol. Equation of any circle through the point of intersection of

or x + 2y –1 = 0 ... (1) given circles is

and equation of tangent at (3, –1) of the circle (x2 + y2 – 6x + 2y + 4) + l (x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 6) = 0

x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 is
Þ x2 (1 + l) + y2 (1 + l) – 2x (3 – l) + 2y (1 – 2l) + (4–6l)=0
3 . x + (–1) . y – 5 (x + 3) – 3 (y – 1) + 14 = 0
or –2x – 4y + 2 = 0 2x(3 - l) 2y(1 - 2l) (4 - 6l)
or x 2 + y2 - + + = 0 ... (1)
or x + 2y – 1 = 0 ... (2) (1 + l) (1 + l) (1 + l)
which is the same as (1).
Hence the given circles touch at (3, –1). ì 3 - l 2l - 1 ü
Its centre í , ý lies on the line y = x
î1 + l 1 + l þ
Example – 46
2l - 1 3 - l
then =
Find the equation of the circle which cuts the circle 1+ l 1+ l
x2 + y2 + 5x + 7y – 4 = 0 orthogonally, has its centre on the
line x = 2 and passes through the point (4, –1). Þ l ¹ –1
Sol. Let the required circle be \ 2l – 1 = 3 – l
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (1) or 3l = 4
Since (4, –1) lie on (1) then
\ l = 4/3
17 + 8g – 2f + c = 0 ... (2)
Centre of (1) is (–g, –f) \ Substituting the value of l = 4/3 in (1), we get the required
equation as
Since centre lie on x = 2
7x2 + 7y2 – 10x – 10y – 12 = 0
CIRCLES 73

Example – 48 Example – 50

Find the equation of the circle through points of A tangent is drawn to each of t he cir cles
intersection of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 4 = 0 and the line x2 + y2 = a 2 ; x2 + y2 = b2. Show that if the two tangents are
x + 2y =4 which touches the line x + 2y = 0. perpendicular to each other, the locus of their point of
intersection is a circle concentric with the given circles.
Sol. Equation of any circle through points of intersection of the
Sol. Let P º (x1, y1) be the point of intersection of the tangents
given circle and the line is
PA and PB where A, B are points of contact with the two
(x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 4) + l (x + 2y – 4) = 0 circles respectively.

or x2 + y2 + (l – 2)x + (2l – 4) y + 4 (1 – l) = 0 ... (1) As PA perpendicular to PB. the corresponding radii OA

and OB are also perpendicular.
It will touch the line x + 2y = 0 if solution of equation (1) and
x = –2y be unique. Let ÐAOX = q
Þ ÐBOX = q + 90°
Þ (–2y)2 + y2 + (l – 2) (–2y) + (2l – 4) y + 4 (1 – l) = 0
Using the parametric form of the circles we can take :
2
or 5y + 4 (1 – l) = 0
A º (a cosq, a sin q)
Hence the roots of the equation must be equal. B º [b cos (q + 90°), b sin (q + 90°)]

Then 0 – 4.5.4 (1 – l) = 0 or 1 – l = 0 or l = 1 B º (–b sin q, b cos q)

The equation of PA is : x (a cos q) + y (a sin q) = a2
From (1), the required circle is x2 + y2 – x – 2y = 0
Þ x cosq + y sinq = a
Example – 49 The equation of PB is : x (–b sin q) + y (b cos q) = b2
Þ y cosq – x sinq = b
Find the equation of the circle described on the common chord
of the circles x2 + y2 – 4x – 5 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 8y + 7 = 0 as Þ P º (x1 , y1) lies on PA and PB both.
diameter. Þ x1 cosq + y1 sin q = a

Sol. Equation of the common chord is S1 – S2 = 0 and y1 cos q – x1 sin q = b

As q is changing quantity (different for different positions
Þ x + 2y + 3 = 0.
of P), we will eliminate.
Equation of the circle through the two circles is S1 + lS2 = 0
Squaring and adding, we get : x12 + y12 = a2 + b2
4 8ly 7l - 5
Þ x2 + y2 – x+ + = 0. Þ the locus of P is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 which is concentric with
1+ l 1+ l 1+ l
the given circles.

æ 2 4l ö
Its centre ç ,- ÷ lies on x + 2y + 3 = 0
è 1+ l 1+ l ø

2 8l
Þ - + 3 = 0 Þ 2 – 8l + 3 + 3l = 0 Þ l = 1.
1+ l 1+ l

Hence the required circle is x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0.

CIRCLES 74

Example – 51
Þ BC = 3 g 2 + f 2 - c
Find the area of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the
circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0. 3
\ Area of D ABC = (Side)2
Sol. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle 4
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 ... (i)
3
Let O (–g, –f) be the centre of the circle. Then, Þ Area of D ABC = × 3 (g2 + f2 – c) sq. units
4
OA = OB = OC = g 2 + f 2 - c
3 3 2 2
In D OBD, we have = (g +f –c) sq. units.
4
BD
sin 60° =
OB

3
Þ BD = g2 + f 2 - c
2
and BC = 2 BD
Teacher’s Note:

Mathematics is the most beautiful and most powerful creation of

human being, you love mathematics and it will open the doors to

success and happiness in your life.

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Pulkit Sir loves teaching Mathematics, he has been a

pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE and Olympiads.
He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7
(JEE ADVANCED), and thousands of more students who
have successfully cleared these competitive exams
in the last few years.
CIRCLES 76

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Standard Equation of a Circle 8. Two vertices of an equilateral triangle are (–1, 0) and
(1, 0), and its third vertex lies above the x-axis. Then the
1. The number of circles of a given radius which touch both
equation of the circumcircle of the triangle is :
the axes is
(a) x2 + y2 = 1
2. The equation ax2 + by2 + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents
a circle only if (b) 3 (x2 + y2) + 2y – 3 = 0
(a) a = b, h = 0
(c) 3 (x2 + y2) – 2y – 3 = 0
(b) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0
(d) none of these
(c) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – c > 0
9. Equation of the circle of radius 5 whose centre lies on
(d) a = b ¹ 0, h = 0, g2 + f2 – ac > 0
y-axis in first quadrant and passes through (3, 2) is
3. Equation of the circle which passes through the centre of
(a) x2 + y2 – 12y + 11 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 6y – 1 = 0
the circle x2 + y2 + 8x + 10y – 7 = 0 and is concentric with the
circle 2x2 + 2y2– 8x – 12y – 9 = 0 is (c) x2 + y2 – 8y + 3 = 0 (d) None of these
2 2
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 97 = 0 10. Centre of the circle x + y – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0 is –
(b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 87 = 0 (a) (–1, 2) (b) (1, –2)
2 2
(c) x + y – 2x – 8y – 95 = 0 (c) (1, 2) (d) (–1, –2)

(d) None of these 11. The equation of a circle which passes through the three
4. Equation of a circle concentric with the circle points (3, 0), (1, –6), (4, –1) is-

2x2 + 2y2 – 6x + 8y + 1 = 0 and of double its area is (a) 2x2 + 2y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0

(a) 2x2 + 2y2 – 12x + 16y + 1 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0

(b) 4x2 + 4y2 – 3x + 16y + 2 = 0 (c) x2 + y2 + 5x – 11y + 3 = 0
(c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 12x + 16y – 21 = 0 (d) 2x2 + 2y2 – 5x + 11y – 3 = 0
(d) None of these 12. The radius of the circle passing through the points
5. If (4, –2) is a point on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, (1, 2), (5, 2) & (5, –2) is :
which is concentric to x2 + y2 –2x + 4y + 20 = 0, then value 13. The equation of the circle which touches the axis of y at
of c is- the origin and passes through (3, 4) is-
6. The equation of the image of the circle (x – 3)2 + (y – 2)2=1 (a) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
by the line mirror x + y = 19 is
(b) 3 (x2 + y2) – 25x = 0
(a) (x – 14)2 + (y – 13)2 = 1
(c) 2 (x2 + y2) – 3x = 0
(b) (x – 15)2 + (y – 14)2 = 1
(d) 4 (x2 + y2) – 25x + 10 = 0
(c) (x – 16)2 + (y – 15)2 = 1
(d) (x – 17)2 + (y – 16)2 = 1 14. The length of the diameter of the circle which touches the
x-axis at the point (1, 0) and passes through the point (2, 3)
7. The equation of a circle which passes through the
is
point (1, –2) and (4, –3) and whose centre lies on the
line 3x + 4 y = 7 is
10 3
(a) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y – 55 = 0 (a) (b)
3 5
(b) 15 (x2 + y2) – 94 x + 18 y + 55 = 0
(c) 15 (x2 + y2) + 94 x – 18 y + 55 = 0 6 5
(c) (d)
5 3
(d) none of these
CIRCLES 77
15. The equation of the circle touches y axis and having centre Position/Distance of a Point with respect to a Circle
(–2, –3) is
22. The range of values of q Î [0, 2p] for which
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x – 9y – 4 = 0
(1 + cos q, sin q) is on interior points of the circle
(b) x2 + y2 + 4x + 9y + 4 = 0 x2 + y2 = 1, is
(c) x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 9 = 0 (a) (p/6, 5p/6) (b) (2p/3, 5p/3)
(d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 9 = 0 (c) (p/6, 7p/6) (d) (2p/3, 4p/3)
16. The circle passing through (1, –2) and touching the axis of
x at (3, 0) also passes through the point æ l l ö
23. If the point ç - 5 + , -3 + ÷ is an interior point of
(a) (–5, 2) (b) (2, –5) è 2 2ø

(c) (5, –2) (d) (–2, 5) the larger segement of the circles x2 + y2 = 16 cut off by the
line x + y = 2, then
17. The abscissae and ordinates of the points A and B are the
roots of the equations x 2 + 2ax + b = 0 and
(a) l Î -¥,5 2
x2 + 2cx + d = 0 respectively, then the equation of circle with
AB as diameter is
(b) l Î 4 2 - 14, 5 2
(a) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy + b + d = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy – b – d = 0
(c) l Î 4 2 - 14, 4 2 + 14
(c) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2cy + b + d = 0
(d) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2cy – b – d = 0 (d) none of these
18. A point A(2, 1) is outside the circle 24. The point (sin q, cos q), q being any real number, lie inside
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 & AP, AQ are tangents to the the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + l = 0, if
circle. The equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle
APQ is : (a) l <1+ 2 2 (b) l > 2 2 -1
(a) (x + g) (x – 2) + (y + f) (y – 1) = 0
(c) l < –1– 2 2 (d) l >1+ 2 2
(b) (x + g) (x – 2) – (y + f) (y – 1) = 0
25. The co-ordinate of the point on the circle
(c) (x – g) (x + 2) + (y – f) (y + 1) = 0
x2 + y2 – 12x – 4y + 30 = 0, which is farthest from the origin
(d) none of these
are:
19. The intercept on the line y = x by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x = 0 is
(a) (9, 3) (b) (8, 5)
AB. Equation of the circle on AB as a diameter is
(c) (12, 4) (d) none of these
(a) x2 + y2 + x + y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – x + y = 0
26. The greatest distance of the point P (10, 7) from the circle
(c) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + x – y = 0
x2 + y2 – 4x –2y – 20 = 0 is-
20. The Cartesian equation of the curve x = 7 + 4 cos a,
y = –3 + 4 sin a is Line and a Circle
(a) x2 + y2 – 14x + 6y + 42 = 0
27. A circle touches x axis at +3 distance and cuts an intercept
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x + 14y + 21 = 0 of 8 in +ve direction of y axis. Its equation is–
(c) x2 + y2 – 10x + 12y + 28 = 0 (a) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y – 9 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y – 9 = 0
(d) None of these (c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 9 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y + 9 = 0
21. a, b, g are the parametric angles of three point 28. The equation to a circle passing through the origin and
P, Q and R respectively on the circle x2 + y2 = 1 and A is the cutting of intercepts each equal to 5 of the axes is-
point (–1, 0). If a, b , g Î (0, p) and the lengths of the chords
(a) x2 + y2 + 5x – 5y = 0
a b g (b) x2 + y2 – 5x + 5y = 0
AP, AQ and AR are in G.P., then cos , cos and cos
2 2 2
(c) x2 + y2 – 5x – 5y = 0
are in
(d) x2 + y2 + 5x + 5y = 0
(a) A.P. (b) G.P.
(c) H.P. (d) none of these
CIRCLES 78

29. The length of intercept on y-axis, by a circle whose diameter 39. The line 3x – 2y = k meets the circle x2 + y2 = 4r2 at only one
is the line joining the points (–4, 3) & (12, –1) is- point, if k2 is

30. The circle x2 + y2 + 4x – 7y + 12 = 0 cuts an intercept on y- (a) 20r2 (b) 52r2

axis which is equal to 52 2 20 2
2 2
(c) r (d) r
31. The circle x + y – 3x – 4y + 2 = 0 cuts x-axis at 9 9
(a) (2, 0), (–3, 0) (b) (3, 0), (4, 0)
Tangent to a Circle
(c) (1, 0), (–1, 0) (d) (1, 0), (2, 0)
40. The centre of the circle passing through the point (0,1)
32. The length of the chord of the circle (x – 3)2 + (y – 5)2 = 80
and touching the curve y = x2 at (2, 4) is :
cut off by the line 3x – 4y – 9 = 0 is
33. If the straight line y = mx is outside the circle æ 16 27 ö æ 16 53 ö
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷
x2 + y2 –20y + 90 = 0, then è 5 10 ø è 7 10 ø

(a) m < 3 (b) |m| < 3

æ 16 53 ö
(c) m > 3 (d) |m| > 3 (c) ç - , ÷ (d) none of these
è 5 10 ø
34. If the chord y = mx + 1 of the circle x2 + y2 = 1 subtends an 41. The angle between the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 at
angle of measure 45° at the major segment of the circle (3, 4) and (4, –3) is :
then value of m is
p p
(a) 2 ± 2 (b) - 2 ± 2 (a) (b)
2 3

(c) - 1± 2 (d) ±1 p p
(c) (d)
4 6
35. The circle x2 + y2 = 4x + 8y + 5 intersects the line
3x – 4y = m at two distinct points, if 42. The equation of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 4, which
are parallel to x + 2y + 3 = 0, are
(a) – 85 < m < –35 (b) –35 < m < 15
(c) 15 < m < 65 (d) 35 < m < 85 (a) x – 2y = 2 (b) x + 2y = ± 2 3

Condition of Tangency (c) x + 2y = ± 2 5 (d) x - 2y = ± 2 5

36. The equation of circle with centre (1, 2) and tangent 43. The equations of the tangents to the circle
x + y – 5 = 0 is x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0 which are parallel to the line
4x + 3y + 5 = 0, are
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y + 6 = 0
(a) 4x + 3y + 11 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 8 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 3 = 0
(b) 4x + 3y – 9 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 7 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 8 = 0 (c) 4x + 3y + 19 = 0 and 4x + 3y – 31 = 0
2 2
(d) x + y – 2x – 4y + 8 = 0 (d) 4x + 3y – 10 = 0 and 4x + 3y + 12 = 0
37. The equation of the incircle of the triangle formed by the 44. If the equation of the tangent to the circle
axes and the line 4x + 3y = 6 is x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 6 = 0 parallel to 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 is
3x – 4y + k = 0, then the values of k are
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x – 6y + 9 = 0
(a) 5, – 35 (b) –5, 35
(b) 4(x2 + y2 – x – y) + 1 = 0
(c) 7, –32 (d) –7, 32
(c) 4(x2 + y2 + x + y) + 1 = 0
45. The equation of a tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 passing
(d) none of these through (–2, 11) is
38. The value of |c| for which the line y = 2x + c is a tangent to (a) 4x + 3y = 25 (b) 7x – 24y = 320
the circle x2 + y2 = 16, is (c) 3x + 4y = 38 (d) 24x + 7y + 125 = 0
CIRCLES 79

46. For the circle x2 + y2 +4x –7y +12 =0 the following statement 54. If from any point P on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
is true- tangents are drawn to the circle
(a) the length of tangent from (1, 2) is 7 x2 +y2 +2gx +2fy + csin2 a + (g2 + f 2) cos2 a = 0,
(b) Intercept on y-axis is 2 (a is acute) then the angle between the tangents is :
(c) intercept on x-axis is 2– 2 (a) a (b) 2 a
(d) None of these a
(c) (d) none of these
47. The square of the length of the tangent from (3, –4) to the 2
circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 3 = 0 is
55. The angle between the two tangents from the origin to the
48. Let A be the centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0, circle (x – 7)² + (y + 1)² = 25 equals :
and B (1,7) and D (4, –2) are points on the circle then, if
tangents be drawn at B and D, which meet at C, then area Position of two circles with respect to each other
of quadrilateral ABCD is-
56. The circles x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 and
Pair of Tangents, Chord of Contact, Chord with Mid-Point
x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 touch each other
49. The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the (a) externally at (0,1) (b) internally at (0,1)
point (4, 3) to the circle x² + y² = 9 and the line joining their
(c) externally at (1,0) (d) internally at (1,0)
point of contact is :
57. If the two circles (x – 1)2 + (y – 3)2 = r2 and
50. Let C be the circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 3 units. The
equation of the locus of the mid points of chord of the x2 + y2 – 8x + 2y + 8 = 0 intersect in two distinct points,
circle C that subtend an angle of 2p/3 at its centre is then

3 (a) r < 2 (b) r = 2

(a) x2 + y2 = (b) x2 + y2 = 1 (c) r > 2 (d) 2 < r < 8
2
58. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius = 1. If T
27 9
(c) x2 + y2 = (d) x2 + y2 = is the circle centred at (0, y), passing through origin and
4 4
touching the circle C externally, then the radius of T is
51. If two distinct chords, drawn from the point (p, q) on the equal to :
circle x2 + y2 = px + qy (where pq ¹ 0) are bisected by the
x-axis, then : 1 3
(a) (b)
(a) p2 = q2 (b) p2 = 8q2 4 2
(c) p2 < 8q2 (d) p2 > 8q2
52. The equation of tangent drawn from the origin to the circle 3 1
(c) (d)
x2 +y2 –2rx –2hy + h2 =0 is- 2 2
(a) y = 0 (b) x – y =0
59. The centre of a circle passing through the points (0, 0),
(c) (h2 – r2) x – 2rhy =0 (d) None of these (1, 0) and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is :
53. The angle between the tangents from (a, b) to the circle (a) (3/2, 1/2) (b) (1/2, 3/2)
x2 + y2 = a2 is –
æ1 ö
æ a ö æ a ö (c) (1/2, 1/2) (d) ç ± 2 ÷
-1 ç
÷ è 2 ø
(a) tan (b) 2 tan -1 ç ÷
ç S ÷ ç S ÷
è 1 ø è 1ø
60. The circles x2 + y2 + 6x + 6y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 12x – 12y =0
(a) touch each other internally
æ S1 ö
(c) 2 tan ç ÷
-1
(d) None of these (b) touch each other externally
ç a ÷
è ø
(c) intersect in two points
Where S1 = a2 + b 2 – a2 (d) cut orthogonally
CIRCLES 80
61. The two circles x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y + 6 = 0 and Radical Axis
2 2
x + y –5x + 6y + 15 = 0
69. If P and Q are the points of intersection of the circles
(a) intersect (b) are concentric
x2 + y2 + 3x + 7y + 2p – 5 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – p2 = 0, then
(c) touch internally (d) touch externally
there is a circle passing through P, Q and (1, 1) for
62. Which of the following statements is true regarding the
following two circles ? (a) all values of p (b) all except one value of p

x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 20 = 0 (c) all except two values of p (d) exactly one value of p
(a) These circles do not touch each other 70. If the circles x2 + y2 + 2ax + cy + a = 0 and
(b) These circles touch each other internally x2 + y2 – 3ax + dy – 1 = 0 intersect in two distinct points P
(c) These circles touch each other externally and Q then the line 5x + by – a = 0 passes through
(d) None of these P and Q for
63. The locus of the centre of a circle, which touches externally (a) no value of a (b) exactly one value of a
the circle x2 +y2 –6x –6y +14 =0 and also touches the
y-axis is given by the equation : (c) exactly two value of a (d) infinitely many values of a
(a) x2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (b) x2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 Orthogonal Circles
(c) y2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (d) y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
71. If a circle passes through the point (a, b) and cuts the
Common tangents of two circles
circle x2 + y2 = 4 orthogonally, then the locus of its centre
64. The set of all real values of l for which exactly two common is
tangents can be drawn to the circles (a) 2ax – 2by + (a2 + b2 + 4) = 0
x2 + y2 - 4x - 4y + 6 = 0 and x2 + y2 - 10x - 10y + l = 0 is the (b) 2ax + 2by – (a2 + b2 + 4) = 0
interval:
(c) 2ax + 2by + (a2 + b2 + 4) = 0
(a) (12, 32) (b) (18, 42)
(c) (12, 24) (d) (18, 48) (d) 2ax – 2by – (a2 + b2 + 4) = 0

65. The number of common tangents that can be drawn to two 72. The value of l, for which the circle
circles x2 + y2 = 6x and x2 + y2 + 6x + 2y + 1 = 0 is x2 + y2 + 2lx + 6y + 1 = 0 inersects the circle
66. The number of common tangents to the circles
x2 + y2 + 4x + 2y = 0 orthogonally, is
2 2 2 2
x + y – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 and x + y – 12x – 16y + 91 = 0 is
73. The value of k for which the circles x2 + y2 + 5x + 3y + 7 = 0
67. For the two circles x2 + y2 = 16 and x2 + y2 - 2y = 0, there is/
and x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y + k = 0 intersects orthogonally.
are:
(a) one pair of common tangents 74. The locus of the centre of the circle passing through (1,1)
(b) two pairs of common tangents and intersecting the circle x2 + y2 = 9 orthogonally is

(c) three common tangents (a) x + y – 10 = 0 (b) x + y – 5 = 0

(d) no nommon tangent (c) 2x + 2y – 5 = 0 (d) None of these
68. The centre of the circle passing through (0, 0) and (1, 0)
Family of Circles
and touching the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is
75. The equation of the circle passing through (1, –3) & the
æ1 1ö æ1 ö
(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç ,- 2 ÷ points common to the two circle,
è2 2ø è 2 ø 2 2 2 2
x + y – 6x + 8y – 16 = 0, x + y + 4x – 2y – 8 = 0 is.
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 24 = 0
æ3 1ö æ1 3ö
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷ (b) 2x2 + 2y2 + 3x + y – 20 = 0
è2 2ø è2 2ø
(c) 3x2 + 3y2 – 5x + 7y – 19 = 20
(d) none of these
CIRCLES 81

76. The circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 3ky – 2 = 0 passes through the fixed Locus based problems
point :
80. The line joining (5, 0) to (10 cosq, 10 sinq) is divided
(a) 1+ 3 ,0 (b) - 1+ 3 ,0 internally in the ratio 2 : 3 at P. If q varies then the locus of
P is :
(c) - 3 - 1,1 (d) 1 - 3 ,1 (a) a pair of straight lines (b) a circle
77. If y = 2x is a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 10x, then the (c) a straight line (d) none of these
equation of the circle whose diameter is this chord is 81. The centres of a set of circles, each of radius 3, lie on the
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y = 0 circle x2 + y2 = 25. The locus of any point in the set is
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (d) None of these (a) 4 £ x2 + y2 £ 64 (b) x2 + y2 £ 25
78. If the line y =x +3 meets the circle x2 + y2 = a2 at A and B, (c) x2 + y2 ³ 25 (d) 3 £ x2 + y2 £ 9
then the equation of the circle having AB as a diameter will be-
(a) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
(d) None of these
79. The equation of the circle described on the chord
3x + y + 5 = 0 of the circle x2 + y2 = 16 as diameter is
(a) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 11 = 0
(b) x2 + y2 + 3x + y +1 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 2 = 0
(d) x2 + y2 + 3x + y - 22 = 0
CIRCLES 82

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. The number of common tangents to the circles 8. A line drawn through the point P (4, 7) cuts the circle
x2 + y2 –4x – 6y –12 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 6x + 18y + 26 = 0, is: x2 + y2 = 9 at the points A and B. Then PA.PB is equal to :
(2015) (2017/Online Set–1)
(a) 3 (b) 4
(a) 53 (b) 56
(c) 1 (d) 2
(c) 74 (d) 65
2. Let the tangents drawn to the circle, x2 + y2 = 16 from the
9. If a point P has co-ordinates (0, –2) and Q is any point on the
point P(0, h) meet the x-axis at points A and B. If the area
circle, x2 + y2 – 5x – y + 5 = 0, then the maximum value of
of DAPB is minimum, then h is equal to :
(PQ)2 is : (2017/Online Set–1)
(2015/Online Set–1)

(a) 4 2 (b) 4 3 25 + 6
(a) (b) 14 + 5 3
2
(c) 3 2 (d) 3 3
3. If a circle passing through the point (-1, 0) touches 47 + 10 6
(c) (d) 8 + 5 3
y-axis at (0, 2) then the length of the chord of the circle 2
along the x-axis is : (2015/Online Set–2)
10. If two parallel chords of a circle, having diameter 4 units,
3 lie on the opposite sides of the centre and subtend angles
(a) (b) 3
2 æ1ö
cos -1 ç ÷ and sec–1(7) at the centre respectively, then
è7ø
5
(c) (d) 5 the distance between these chords, is :
2
4. If one of the diameters of the circle, given by the equation, (2017/Online Set–1)
x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 12 = 0 is a chord of a circle S, whose centre
4 8
is at (–3, 2), then the radius of S is : (2016) (a) (b)
7 7
(a) 5 3 (b) 5
8 16
(c) 10 (d) 5 2 (c) (d)
7 7
5. A circle passes through (–2, 4) and touches the y-axis at
11. Let the orthocentre and centroid of a triangle be
(0, 2). Which one of the following equations can represent
a diameter of this circle ? (2016/Online Set–1) A (–3,5) and B (3, 3) respectively. If C is the circumcentre
of this triangle, then the radius of the circle having line
(a) 4x + 5y – 6 = 0 (b) 2x – 3y + 10 = 0
segment AC as diameter, is : (2018)
(c) 3x + 4y – 3 = 0 (d) 5x + 2y + 4 = 0
6. Equation of the tangent to the circle, at the point (1, –1), 3 5
(a) (b) 10
whose centre is the point of intersection of the straight lines 2
x – y = 1 and 2x + y = 3 is : (2016/Online Set–2)
(a) 4x + y – 3 = 0 (b) x + 4y + 3 = 0 5
(c) 2 10 (d) 3
(c) 3x – y – 4 = 0 (d) x – 3y – 4 = 0 2
7. The radius of a circle, having minimum area, which touches 12. A circle passes through the points (2, 3) and (4, 5). If its
the curve y = 4 – x2 and the lines, y = |x| is: (2017) centre lies on the line, y – 4 x + 3 = 0, then its radius is
equal to : (2018/Online Set–1)
(a) 2 2 +1 (b) 2 2 -1
(a) 2 (b) 5
(c) 4 2 -1 (d) 4 2 +1
(c) (d) 1
2
CIRCLES 83
13. The tangent to the circle C1 : x2 + y2 – 2x – 1 = 0 at the point 19. A rectangle is inscribed in a circle with a diameter lying
(2, 1) cuts off a chord of length 4 from a circle C2, whose along the line 3 y = x + 7 . If the two adjacent vertices of
centre is (3, -2). The radius of C2 is :
the rectangle are (–8,5) and (6,5) then the area of the
(2018/Online Set–2)
rectangle (in sq. units) is: (9-4-2019/Shift -2)
(a) 2 (b) 2 (a) 84 (b) 98

(c) 3 (d) (c) 72 (d) 56

6
14. If a circle C, whose radius is 3, touches externally the 20. If the circles x 2 + y 2 + 5Kx + 2y + K = 0 and
circle, x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 at the point (2, 2), then the
length of the intercept cut by this circle C, on the x-axis is 2 x 2 + y 2 + 2Kx + 3y - l = 0, ( K Î R), intersect at the
equal to : (2018/Online Set–3)
points P and Q, then the line 4 x + 5 y - K = 0 passes
(a) 2 5 (b) 3 2 through P and Q, for: (10-4-2019/Shift -1)
(c) 5 (d) 2 3 (a) infinitely many values of K
15. The sum of the squares of the lengths of the chords (b) no value of K.
intercepted on the circle, x2 +y2= 16, by the lines, (c) exactly two values of K
x + y = n, n ÎN, where N is the set of all natural numbers, (d) exactly one value of K
is : (8-4-2019/Shift -1)
21. The line x = y touches a circle at the point 1,1 . If the
16. The tangent and the normal lines at the point to circle also passes through the point (1, –3), then its radius
2 2
the circle x + y = 4 and the x-axis form a triangle. The area is: (10-4-2019/Shift -1)
of this triangle (in square units) is :
(a) 3 (b) 2 2
(8-4-2019/Shift -2)
(c) 2 (d) 3 2
(a) (b) 22. The locus of the centres of the circles, which touch the
circle, x 2 + y 2 = 1 externally, also touch the y - axis
(c) (d) and lie in the first quadrant, is: (10-4-2019/Shift -2)

(a) (b)
17. If a tangent to the circle intersects the
coordinate axes at distinct points P and Q, then the locus (c) (d)
of the mid-point of PQ is: (9-4-2019/Shift -1)
23. If the angle of intersection at a point where the two circles
(a) with radii 5 cm and 12 cm intersect is 90°, then the length
(in cm) of their common chord is :
(b) (12-4-2019/Shift -1)

(c) 13 120
(a) (b)
3 13
(d)
60 13
18.
2 2
The common tangent to the circles x + y = 4 and (c) (d)
13 2
x 2 + y 2 + 6 x + 8 y - 24 = 0 also passes through the point: 24. A circle touching the X- axis at (3, 0) and making an
(9-4-2019/Shift -2) intercept of length 8 on the Y- axis passes through the
(a) (4, –2) (b) (–6, 4) point: (12-4-2019/Shift -2)

(c) (6, –2) (d) (–4, 6) (a) (3, 10) (b) (3, 5)
(c) (2, 3) (d) (1, 5)
CIRCLES 84

25. Three circles of radii a, b, c (a < b < c) touch each other 31. Two circles with equal radii are intersecting at the points
externally. If they have x- axis as a common tangent, then: (0, 1) and (0, –1). The tangent at the point (0, 1) to one of
(9-1-2019/Shift -1) the circles passes through the centre of the other circle.
Then the distance between the centres of these circles is:
1 1 1 1 1 1 (11-1-2019/Shift -1)
(a) = + (b) = +
a b c b a c
32. A circle cuts a chord of length 4a on the x-axis and passes
through a point on the y-axis, distant 2b from the origin.
(c) a, b, c are in A.P (d) a , b , c are in A.P.
Then the locus of the centre of this circle, is :
26. If the circles x 2 + y 2 - 16 x - 20 y + 164 = r 2 and (11-1-2019/Shift -1)
(a) A hyperbola (b) An ellipse
( x - 4)2 + ( y - 7) 2 = 36 intersect at two distinct points,
(c) A straight line (d) A parabola
then: (9-1-2019/Shift -1)
33. Let C1 and C2 be the centres of the circles x2 + y -2x - 2y –
(a) r > 11 (b) 0 < r < 1 2 = 0 and x2 + y2- 6x - 6y + 14 = 0 respectively. If P and Q are
(c) r = 11 (d) 1 < r < 11 the points of intersection of these circles then, area (in
27. If a circle C passing through the point (4, 0) touches the sq. units) of the quadrilateral PC1QC2is : ______

circle x 2 + y 2 + 4 x - 6 y = 12 externally at the point (12-1-2019/Shift -1)

(a) 8 (b) 6
1, -1 . then the radius of C is: (10-1-2019/Shift -1)
(c) 9 (d) 4
28. If the area of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle,
34. If a circle of radius R passes through the origin O and
is then c is intersects the coordinate axes at A and B, then the locus
equal to: (10-1-2019/Shift -2) of the foot of perpendicular from O on AB is :
(a) 13 (b) 20 (12-1-2019/Shift -2)
(c) –25 (d) 25
(a)
29. A square is inscribed in the circle

x 2 + y 2 - 6 x + 8 y - 103 = 0 with its sides parallel to the (b)

coordinate axes. Then the distance of the vertex of this
square which is nearest to the origin is : (c)
(11-1-2019/Shift -1)

(a) 6 (b) 137 (d)

(c) (d) 13 35. The number of integral values of k for which the line,
41
30. The straight line x + 2y = 1 meets the coordinate axes at A 3x + 4y = k intersects the circle, x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4 y + 4 = 0
and B. A circle is drawn through A, B and the origin. Then at two distinct points is …….. (2-9-2020/Shift -1)
the sum of perpendicular distances from A and B on the
tangent to the circle at the origin is :
(11-1-2019/Shift -1)

5
(a) (b) 2 5
2

5
(c) (d) 4 5
4
CIRCLES 85
36. The diameter of the circle , whose centre lies on the line 41. Let the tangents drawn from the origin to the circle,
x + y = 2 in the first quadrant and which touches both the
x 2 + y 2 - 8 x - 4 y + 16 = 0 touch it at the points A and B.
lines x = 3 and y = 2, is …….. (2-9-2020/Shift -1)
The (AB)2 is equal to : (7-1-2020/Shift -2)
37. The circle passing through the intersection of the circles,
x2 + y2 – 6x = 0 and x2 + y2 – 4y = 0, having its centre on the 32 64
line, 2x – 3y + 12 = 0, also passes through the point: (a) (b)
5 5
(4-9-2020/Shift -2)
(a) (–1, 3) (b) (1, –3) 52 56
(c) (d)
5 5
(c) (–3, 6) (d) (–3, 1)
38. Let PQ be a diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 9. If a and b are 42. If a line, y = mx + c is a tangent to the circle,
the lengths of the perpendiculars from P and Q on the
( x - 3) 2 + y 2 = 1 and it is perpendicular to a line L1, where
straight line, x + y = 2 respectively, then the maximum
value of ab is _____ (4-9-2020/Shift -2) 2 2
L1 is the tangent to the circle, x + y = 1 at the point
39. If the length of the chord of the circle, x2 + y2 = r 2 (r > 0)
along the line, y – 2x = 3 is r, then r2 is equal to: æ 1 1 ö
ç , ÷ ; then: (8-1-2020/Shift -2)
(5-9-2020/Shift -2) è 2 2ø

24 (a) c 2 + 7c + 6 = 0 (b) c 2 - 6c + 7 = 0
(a) 12 (b)
5
(c) c 2 - 7c + 6 = 0 (d) c 2 + 6c + 7 = 0
9 12 43. A circle touches the y- axis at the point (0,4) and passes
(c) (d)
5 5 through the point (2,0). Which of the following lines is
40. The centre of the circle passing through the point (0, 1) not a tangent to the circle? (9-1-2020/Shift -1)
and touching the parabola y = x2 at the point (2, 4) is: (a) 4x – 3y + 17 = 0 (b) 3x + 4y – 6 = 0
(6-9-2020/Shift -2) (c) 4x + 3y – 8 = 0 (d) 3x – 4y – 24 = 0

æ 3 16 ö æ 6 53 ö 44. If the curves x 2 - 6 x + y 2 + 8 = 0 and

(a) ç , ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è 10 5 ø è 5 10 ø
x 2 - 8 y + y 2 + 16 - k = 0, k > 0 touch each other at a
æ -16 53 ö æ -53 16 ö point, then the largest value of k is _________.
(c) ç , ÷ (d) ç , ÷
è 5 10 ø è 10 5 ø
(9-1-2020/Shift -2)
CIRCLES 86

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. The equation of the circle which is touched by y = x, has its
centre on the positive x-axis & cuts off a chord of length 2
1. A rhombus is inscribed in the region common to the two
circles x2 + y2 – 4x – 12 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 4x – 12 = 0 with two units along the line 3 y – x = 0 is-
of its vertices on the line joining the centres of the circles.
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 8x + 8 = 0
The area of the rhombus is :
(c) x2 + y2 – 4x + 1 = 0 (d) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0
(a) 8 3 sq. units (b) 4 3 sq. units
8. From the point A(0, 3) on the circle x² + 4x + (y – 3)² = 0, a
chord AB is drawn & extended to a point M such that
(c) 16 3 sq. units (d) none of these
AM = 2AB. The equation of the locus of M is :
2. A circle and a square have the same perimeter. Then (a) x² + 8x + y² = 0 (b) x² + 8x + (y – 3)² = 0
(a) their areas are equal (c) (x – 3)² + 8x + y² = 0 (d) x² + 8x + 8y² = 0
(b) the area of the circle is large 9. The circle x² + y² – 6x – 10y + c = 0 does not intersect or
(c) the area of the square is larger touch either axis & the point (1, 4) is inside the circle. Then
(d) the area of the circle is p times the area of the square the range of possible values of c is given by :
3. AB is a diameter of a circle and C is any point on the (a) c > 9 (b) c > 25
circumference of the circle. Then : (c) c > 29 (d) 25 < c < 29
(a) the area of D ABC is maximum when it is isosceles 10. Two thin rods AB & CD of lengths 2a & 2b move along OX
(b) the area of D ABC is minimum when it is isosceles & OY respectively, when 'O' is the origin. The equation of
(c) the perimeter of D ABC is minimum when it is isosceles the locus of the centre of the circle passing through the
extremities of the two rods is :
(d) none of these
(a) x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (b) x2 – y2 = a2 – b2
4. The abscissa of two points A and B are the roots of the
equation x2 + 2ax – b2 = 0 and their ordinates are the roots (c) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2 (d) x2 – y2 = a2 + b2
of the equation y2 + 2 py – q2 = 0. The radius of the circle 11. Equation of chord of the circle x2 + y2 – 3x – 4y – 4 = 0
with AB as a diameter will be- which passes through the origin such that origin divides
it in the ratio 4 : 1, is
(a) a2 + b2 + p 2 + q2 (b) b2 + q 2
(a) x = 0 (b) 24x + 7y = 0
(c) 7x + 24y = 0 (d) 7x – 24y = 0
(c) a 2 + b2 - p2 - q2 (d) a 2 + p2
12. If a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 8 makes equal intercepts of
5. The circle described on the line joining the points (0, 1), length a on the coordinate axes, then-
(a, b) as diameter cuts the x-axis in points whose abscissae
are roots of the equation : (a) |a| < 8 (b) |a| < 4 2
(a) x2 + ax + b = 0 (b) x2 – ax + b = 0 (c) |a| < 4 (d) |a| > 4
2 2
(c) x + ax – b = 0 (d) x – ax – b = 0 13. The equation of a circle which touches x-axis and the line
6. Let x and y be the real numbers satisfying the equation 4x –3y +4 =0, its centre lying in the third quadrant and lies
x² – 4x +y² +3 =0. If the maximum and minimum values of on the line x –y –1 =0, is-
x² + y² are M & m respectively, then the numerical value of (a) 9 (x2 +y2) + 6x + 24y + 1 =0
M – m is :
(b) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x – 24y + 1 =0
(a) 221 (b) 8
(c) 9 (x2 +y2) – 6x + 2y + 1 =0
(c) 15 (d) none of these
(d) None of these
CIRCLES 87

14. The value of 'c' for which the set, 20. From a point R(5, 8) two tangents RP and RQ are drawn to
{(x, y) | x²+y² +2x < 1} Ç {(x, y)| x–y + c > 0} contains only a given circle S = 0 whose radius is 5. If circumcentre of the
one point in common is : triangle PQR is (2, 3), then the equation of circle
S = 0 is
(a) (–¥, –1) È [3, ¥) (b) {–1, 3}
(a) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 20 = 0
(c) {–3} (d) {–1}
(b) x2 + y2 + x + 2y – 10 = 0
15. A line meets the co-ordinate axes in A & B. A circle is
(c) x2 + y2 – x – 2y – 20 = 0
circumscribed about the triangle OAB. If d1 and d2 are the
distances of the tangent to the circle at the origin O from (d) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0
the points A and B respectively, the diameter of the circle 21. If tangent at (1, 2) to the circle c1 : x2 + y2 = 5 intersects the
is: circle c 2 : x 2 + y2 = 9 at A and B and tangents at
A and B to the second circle meet at point C, then the
2d1 + d 2 d1 + 2d 2 co-ordinates of C are :
(a) (b)
2 2
æ 9 18 ö
(a) (4, 5) (b) ç , ÷
d1d 2 è 15 5 ø
(c) d1 + d2 (d) d + d
1 2
æ 9 18 ö
(c) (4, – 5) (d) ç , ÷
16. If the squares of the lengths of the tangents from a point P è5 5 ø
to the circles x2 + y2 = a2, x2 + y2 = b2 and x2 + y2 = c2 are in
22. If the tangents are drawn from any point on the line
A.P., then
x + y = 3 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9, then the chord of contact
(a) a, b, c are in GP (b) a, b, c are in AP passes through the point
(c) a2, b2, c2 are in AP (d) a2, b2, c2 are in GP (a) (3, 5) (b) (3, 3)
17. The length of the tangent drawn from any point on the (c) (5, 3) (d) none of these
circle x² + y² + 2gx + 2fy + p = 0 to the circle 23. If the straight line ax + by = 2, b ¹ 0, touches the circle
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + q = 0 is : x2 + y2 – 2x = 3 and is normal to the circle x2 + y2 – 4y = 6, then
the values of a and b can be
(a) q-p (b) p-q
(a) a = 1, b = 2 (b) a = 1, b = –1
(c) a = –4/3, b = 1 (d) None of these
(c) q+p (d) none of these
24. The equation of the circle whose radius is 3 and which
touches the circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0 internally at the
18. If C1 : x2 + y2 = (3 + 2 2 )2 be a circle and PA and PB are pair
point (–1, –1) is-
of tangents on C1 where P is any point on the director
2 2
circle of C1, then the radius of smallest circle which touch æ 4ö æ 7ö 2
C1 externally and also the two tangents PA and PB is (a) ç x - ÷ + ç y + ÷ = 3
è 5ø è 5ø

(a) 2 2 –3 (b) 2 2 –1 2 2
æ 4ö æ 7ö 2
(b) ç x - ÷ + ç y - ÷ = 3
(c) 2 2 +1 (d) 1 è 5 ø è 5 ø

19. If the radius of the circumcircle of the triangle TPQ, where (c) (x–8)2 + (y–1)2 = 32
PQ is chord of contact corresponding to point T with (d) None of these
respect to circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 11 = 0, is 6 units, then 25. If the two circles, x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y = 0 and
minimum distance of T from the director circle of the given
x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y = 0 touch each other then
circle is :
(a) 6 (b) 12 (a) f1g1 = f2g2 (b) f1 f 2
=
g1 g 2
(c) 6 2 (d) 12 - 4 2
(c) f1f2 = g1g2 (d) none of these
CIRCLES 88
26. If r1 and r2 be the radius of smallest and largest circle which 33. If a circle passes through the point (a, b) & cuts the circle
passes through (5, 6) and touches the circle x2 + y2 = K2 orthogonally, then the equation of the locus of
(x – 2)2 + y2 = 4, then r1r2 is its centre is :
(a) 2ax + 2by – (a2 + b2 + K2) = 0
4 41
(a) (b) (b) 2ax + 2by – (a2 – b2 + K2) = 0
41 4
(c) x2 + y2 – 3ax – 4by + (a2 + b2 – K2) = 0
5 41 (d) x2 + y2 – 2ax – 3by + (a2 – b2 – K2) = 0
(c) (d)
41 6
34. The circumference of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 8y – q = 0 is
27. The centre of the smallest circle touching the circles bisected by the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 12y + p = 0, then
x2 + y2 – 2y – 3 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x – 18y + 93 = 0 is : p + q is equal to :
(a) (3, 2) (b) (4, 4) (a) 25 (b) 100
(c) (2, 7) (d) (2, 5) (c) 10 (d) 48
28. The number of common tangents to the circles x2 +y2= 4 35. The distance from the centre of the circle x² + y² = 2x to the
and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y = 24 is : straight line passing through the points of intersection of
(a) 0 (b) 1 the two circle ;

(c) 3 (d) 4 x² + y² + 5x – 8y + 1 = 0, x² + y² – 3x + 7y – 25 = 0 is

29. The angle of intersection of the two circles (a) 1 (b) 2

x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0 and x2 + y2 = 4, is– (c) 3 (d) none of these

(a) 30° (b) 60° 36. The value of 'a' for which the common chord of the circles
C1 : x2 + y2 = 8 and C2 : (x – a)2 + y2 = 8 subtends a right angle
(c) 90° (d) 45°
at the origin are :
30. A circle touches a straight line lx + my + n = 0 & cuts the
circle x2 + y2 = 9 orthogonally. The locus of centres of such (a) ± 2 (b) ± 2
circle is :
(c) ± 4 (d) none of these
2 2 2 2 2
(a) (lx + my + n) = (l + m ) (x + y – 9)
37. The length of the common chord of the circles (x – a)2 + y2
(b) (lx + my – n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 – 9) = c2 and x2 + (y – b)2 = c2 is-
(c) (lx + my + n)2 = (l 2 + m2) (x2 + y2 + 9)
(a) c2 + a 2 + b2 (b) 4c 2 + a 2 + b 2
(d) none of these
31. Minimum radius of circle which is orthogonal with both (c) 4c 2 - a 2 - b 2 (d) c2 - a 2 - b2
the circle x2 + y2 –12x + 35 =0 and x2 + y2 + 4x +3 =0 is
38. If the circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 16 intersects another circle C2 of
(a) 4 (b) 3
radius 5 in such a manner that the common chord is of
(c) 15 (d) 1 maximum length and has a slope equal to 3/4, then the co-
ordinates of the centre of C2 are :
32. If a circle passes through the point (1, 2) and cuts the circle
x2 + y2 = 4 orthogonally, then the locus of its centre is-
æ 9 12 ö æ 9 12 ö
(a) x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y – 7 = 0 (a) ç ± ,± ÷ (b) ç ± ,m ÷
è 5 5ø è 5 5ø
(b) x2 + y2 – 3x – 8y + 1 = 0
(c) 2x + 4y – 9 = 0 æ 12 9 ö æ 12 9 ö
(c) ç ± ,± ÷ (d) ç ± ,m ÷
(d) 2x + 4y – 1 = 0 è 5 5ø è 5 5ø
CIRCLES 89

39. On the line segment joining (1, 0) and (3, 0) an equilateral

triangle is drawn having its vertex in the fourth quadrant, æ 7 ö÷
45. A circle passes through the point ç 3, and touches
then radical centre of the circle described on its sides as ç 2 ÷ø
è
diameter is
the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0. The co-ordinates of the
æ 1 ö
(a) çç 3,- ÷÷ (b) 3,- 3 centre of the circle are :
è 3ø
(a) (4, 0) (b) (5, 0)

æ 1 ö (c) (6, 0) (d) (0, 4)

(c) çç 2,- ÷÷ (d) 2,- 3
è 3ø 46. Coordinates of the centre of a circle, whose radius is 2 unit
and which touches the line pair x2 – y2 – 2x + 1 = 0, are
40. Two circles x2 + y2 = 6 and x2 + y2 – 6x + 8 = 0 are given.
Then the equation of the circle through their points of
(a) (4, 0) (b) 1 + 2 2 ,0
intersection and the point (1, 1) is :
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 4 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0
(c) (4, 1) (d) 1, 2 2
(c) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (d) none of these
41. The equation of the circle passing through (1, 1) and 47. If the area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents from
the points of intersection of x2 + y2 + 13 x – 3y = 0 and the origin to the circle x2 + y2 + 6x – 10y + C = 0 and the radii
2x2 + 2y2 + 4x – 7y – 25 = 0 is : corresponding to the points of contact is 15, then a value
(a) 4x2 + 4y2 – 30x – 10 y = 25 of C is
(b) 4x2 + 4y2 + 30x – 13 y – 25 = 0
(a) 9 (b) 4
(c) 4x2 + 4y2 – 17x – 10 y + 25 = 0
(c) 5 (d) 25
(d) none of these
48. Point M moved on the circle (x – 4)2 + (y – 8)2 = 20. Then it
42. A variable circle having fixed radius ‘a’ passes through origin
and meets the coordinate axes in point A and B. Locus of broke away from it and moving along a tangent to the
centroid of triangle OAB, ‘O’ being the origin, is circle, cuts the x–axis at the point (–2, 0). The
(a) 9(x2 + y2) = 4a2 (b) 9(x2 + y2) = a2 co–ordinates of a point on the circle at which the moving
(c) 9(x2 + y2) = 2a2 (d) 9(x2 + y2) = 8a2 point broke away is

Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]

æ 3 46 ö æ 2 44 ö
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷
43. Let x, y be real variable satisfying the è 5 5 ø è 5 5 ø
x2 + y2 + 8x – 10y – 40 = 0. Let a = max
(c) (6, 4) (d) (3, 5)
( x + 22 ) + ( y - 3) 2 and b = min ( x + 22 ) + ( y - 3) 2 , 49. Consider the circle x2 + y2 – 10x – 6y + 30 = 0. Let O be the
centre of the circle and tangent at A(7, 3) and B(5, 1) meet
then
at C. Let S = 0 represents family of circles passing through
(a) a + b = 18 (b) a + b = 4 2 A and B, then

(c) a – b = 4 2 (d) a . b = 73 (a) area of quadrilateral OACB = 4

44. The equation of the chords of length 5 and passing through (b) the radical axis for the family of circles S=0 is x+y=10
the point (3, 4) on the circle 4x2 + 4y2 – 24x – 7y = 0 are (c) the smallest possible circle of the family S = 0 is
(a) 4x + 3y = 0 (b) 4x – 3y = 0 x2 + y2 – 12x – 4y + 38 = 0
(c) 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 (d) 4x + 3y – 12 = 0 (d) the coordinates of point C are (7, 1)
CIRCLES 90

50. Two circles passing through A(1, 2) and B(2, 1) touch the Numerical Value Type Questions
lines 4x + 8y – 7 = 0 at C and D such that ACED is
parallelogram, then 53. The circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle
which has two of its sides along the coordinate axes. The
(a) mid point of AE must lie on CD.
locus of the circumcentre of the triangle is
(b) mid point of AE must lie on AC.
x + y – xy + k (x2 + y2)1/2 = 0, then the value of k must be
æ 13 ö 54. If the minimum radius of the circle which contains the
(c) E must be the point ç , - 4 ÷
è 2 ø three circles x2 + y2 – 4y – 5 = 0, x2 + y2 + 12x + 4y + 31 = 0

15 9 æ 5 ö
(d) E must be the point æç , - ö÷ and x2 + y2 + 6x + 12y + 36 = 0 is ç 3 + l ÷, then the
è 2 2ø è 36 ø
value of l must be
51. If the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 is inscribed in a triangle
whose two sides are axes and one side has negative slope 55. The line Ax + By + C = 0 cuts the circle
cutting intercepts a and b on x and y axis, then x2 + y2 + ax + by + c = 0 in P and Q. The lines
A’x + B’y + C’ = 0 cuts the circle x2 + y2 + a’x + b’y + c’=0 in
1 1 1 1 R and S. If P, Q, R, S are concyclic, then the value of
(a) + - 1 = - 2 + 2
a b a b
a - a ¢ b - b¢ c - c ¢
1 1 A B C is
(b) + - 1 is negative
a b A¢ B¢ C¢

1 1 56. Circle with radii 3, 4 and 5 touch each other externally. If P

(c) + >1
a b is the point of intersection of tangent to these circles at
their point of contact. And the distance of P from point of
1 1 1 1 contact is d. Then [d] is.
(d) + -1 = + 2 + 2
a b a b
ASSERTION REASON
52. A straight line through the vertex P of a triangle PQR,
intersects the side QR at the point S and the circum-circle (A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a
of the triangle PQR at the point T. If S is not the circumcentre correct explanation for ASSERTION.
of the triangle, then (B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not
a correct explanation for ASSERTION.
1 1 2
(a) + < (C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false.
PS ST QS ´ SR
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true.

1 1 2 57. Assertion : for two non–intersecting circles, direct

(b) + >
PS ST QS ´ SR common tangents subtends a right angle at either of
point of intersection of circles with line segment joining
the centres of circles.
1 1 4
(c) + < Reason : If distance between the centres is more than
PS ST QR
sum of radii, then circles are non–intersecting

1 1 4 (a) A (b) B
(d) + >
PS ST QR (c) C (d) D
CIRCLES 91

58. Assertion : Number of common tangents of Match the Following

x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 95 =0 and x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 16 =0 is
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
zero. representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Reason : If C1 C2 < |r1 – r2|, then there will be no common Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
tangent. (where C1, C2 are the centre and r1, r2 are radii of to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
circles) corresponding to the correct matching.

(a) A (b) B 62. Match the items of Column I with those of Column II.

(c) C (d) D Column I Column II

59. Assertion : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate (A) Equations of the ci rcle (P) x2 + y2 – 9x –9y + 36 = 0
a common chord which subtends complimentary angles circumscribing the rectangle
at their circumferences. whose sides are x – 3y – 4 = 0,

Reason : Two orthogonal circles intersect to generate a 3x + y – 22 = 0, x – 3y – 14 = 0

common chord which subtends supplementary angles and 3x + y – 62 = 0 is
at their centres
(B) Two vertices of an equilateral (Q) 3 (x 2 + y 2 ) - 2y - 3 = 0
(a) A (b) B
triangle are (–1, 0) and (1, 0)
(c) C (d) D
and its third vertex lies above
60. Assertion : The equations of the straight lines joining
the x-axis. The equation of its
origin to the points of intersection of
circumcircle is
x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y = 4 and x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 is
(C) The equation of a circle (R) x2 + y2 – 9 = 0
2
(y – x) = 0
with origin at centre and
Reason : y + x = 0 is a common chord of
passing through the vertices
x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y = 4 and x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0
of an equilateral triangle
(a) A (b) B whose median is of length
(c) C (d) D 6 units is
2 2
61. Assertion : Let S1 : x + y – 10x – 12y – 39 = 0 (D) The vertices of a triangle (S) x2 + y2 – 27x – 3y +142 = 0
S2 : x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 are (6, 0), (0, 6) and (7, 7).
2 2
S3 : 2x + 2y – 20x – 24y + 78 = 0 The equation of the incircle

The radical centre of these circles taken pairwise is of the triangle is

(–2, –3) (T) x2 + y2 – 16 = 0
Reason : Point of intersection of three radical axis of The correct matching is :
three circles taken in pairs is known as radical centre (a) (A–S; B–Q; C–T; D–P)
(a) A (b) B (b) (A–Q; B–S; C–T; D–P)
(c) C (d) D (c) (A–S; B–Q; C–P; D–T)
(d) (A–T; B–Q; C–S; D–P)
CIRCLES 92

63. Column–I Column–II (C) Number of distinct chords of the (r) 32

(A) If ax + by – 5 = 0 is the equation (p) 6
circle 2x ( x  2 ) + y(2y – 1) = 0;
of the chord of the circle
chords are passing through the
(x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 4, which passes
through (2, 3) and at the greatest  1
point  2 ,  and are bisected
distance from the centre of the  2
circle, then |a + b| is equal to on x–axis is
(B) Let O be the origin and P be a (q) 3 (D) one of the diameters of the circle (s) 36
variable point on the circle circumscribing the rectangle
x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y = 0. If the ABCD is 4y = x + 7. If A and B are
locus of mid–point of OP is the points (–3, 4) and (5, 4) resp-
2 2
x + y + 2gx + 2fy = 0, then the ectively, then the area of the re-
value of (g + f) is equal to ctangle is.
(C) The x–coordinates of the centre (r) 2 The correct matching is :
of the smallest circle which cuts (a) (A – r; B – p; C – s; D –q)
the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 (b) (A – q; B – s; C – p; D –r)
and x2 + y2 – 10x + 12y + 52 = 0 (c) (A – p; B – s; C – q; D –r)
orthogonally, is (d) (A – s; B – q; C – p; D –r)
(D) If  be the angle between two (s) 1
tangents which are drawn to the Using the following passage, solve Q.65 to Q.67

circle x2 + y2 – 6 3 x – 6y + 27 Passage – 1

= 0 from the origin, then 2 3 P is a variable point on the line L = 0. Tangents are drawn to
the circle x2 + y2 = 4 from P to touch it at Q and R. The
tan  equals to parallelogram PQSR is completed
The correct matching is : 65. If L  2x + y – 6 = 0, then the locus of circumcentre of PQR
(a) (A – r; B – s; C – q; D – p) is
(b) (A – s; B – r; C – q; D – p) (a) 2x – y = 4 (b) 2x + y = 3
(c) (A – r; B – s; C – p; D – q) (c) x – 2y = 4 (d) x + 2y = 3
(d) (A – p; B – s; C – q; D – r) 66. If P  (6, 8), then the area of QRS is
64. Column–I Column–II
(a)
63 / 2 sq. units (b)
243 / 2 sq. units
(A) The length of the common chord (p) 1
25 25
of two circles of radii 3 and 4 units
which intersect orthogonally is 48 6 192 6
(c) sq. units (d) sq. units
k/5, then k equals to 25 25
(B) The circumference of the circle (q) 24 67. If P  (3, 4), then coordinate of S is
2 2
x + y + 4x + 12y + p = 0 is
 46 63   51 68 
bisected by the circle x2 + y2 – 2x (a)   ,  (b)   , 
 25 25   25 25 
+ 8y – q = 0,
then p + q is equal to :  46 68   68 51 
(c)   ,  (d)   , 
 25 25   25 25 
CIRCLES 93

Using the following passage, solve Q.68 to Q.70 Subjective Type

Passage – 2 71. A circle passes through three points A, B and C with the
line segment AC as its diameter. A line passing through A
A system of circles is said to be coaxial when every pair of the intersects the chord BC at a point D inside the circle. If
circles has the same radical axis. It follows from this definition angles DAB and CAB are a and b respectively and the
that : distance between the point A and the mid point of the line
1. The centres of all circles of a coaxial system lie on one segment DC is d, prove that the area of the circle is
straight line, which is perpendicular to the common radical
pd 2 cos 2 a
axis.
cos 2 a + cos 2 b + 2 cos a cos b cos (b - a)
2. Circles passing through two fixed points form a coaxial
system for which the line joining the fixed points is the 72. C1 and C2 are two concentric circles, the radius of C2 being
common radical axis. twice that of C1. From a point P on C2, tangents PA and PB
3. The equation to a coaxial system, of which two members are drawn to C1. Prove that the centroid of the triangle
are S1 = 0 and S2 = 0, is S1 + lS2 = 0, l is parameter. If we PAB lies on C1.
choose the line of centres as x–axis and the common radical 73. Show that the line 3x – 4y = 1 touches the circle
axis as y–axis, then the simplest form of equation of coaxial x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 1 = 0. Find the co-ordinates of the point
circles is x2 + y2 + 2gx + c = 0 ...(1) of contact.
where c is fixed and g is arbitrary. 74. Let T1, T2 and be two tangents drawn from (–2, 0) onto the
circle C : x2 + y2 = 1. Determine the circles touching C and
If g = ± c , then the radius g 2 - c vanishes and the circles having T1, T2 as their pair of tangents. Further, find the
equations of all possible common tangents to these circles
become point circles. The points (± c , 0) are called the limiting when taken two at a time.
points of the system of coaxial circles given by (1). 75. Consider a curve ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 1 and a point P not on
68. The equation of the circle which belongs to the coaxial the curve. A line drawn from the point P intersect the curve
system of circles for which the limiting points are at points Q and R. If the product PQ . PR is independent of
(1, –1), (2, 0) and which passes through the origin is the slope of the line, then show that the curve is a circle.
(a) x2 + y2 – 4x = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 4x = 0 76. Let C be any circle with centre (0, 2) . Prove that at the
(c) x2 + y2 – 4y = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 4y = 0 most two rational points can be there on C.
69. If origin be a limiting point of a coaxial system one of (A rational point is a point both of whose coordinates are
whose member is x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2by + c = 0, then the other rational numbers.)
limiting point is

æ ca cb ö æ ca cb ö
(a) çç 2 2
,- 2 ÷
÷ (b) çç 2 , 2 ÷
÷
è a +b a + b2 ø
2
è a +b a +b
2
ø

æ ab ca ö æ cb ca ö
(c) çç 2 2
, 2 2
÷
÷ (d) çç - 2 2
, 2 ÷
2 ÷
è a +b a +b ø è a +b a +b ø

70. The equation of the radical axis of the system of coaxial

circles x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2by + c+ 2l(ax – by + 1) = 0 is
(a) ax – by + 1 = 0 (b) bx + ay – 1 = 0
(c) 2(ax + by) + 1 = 0 (d) 2(bx – ay) + 1 = 0
CIRCLES 94

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The locus of the centre of circle which touches (y –1)2 +x2 = 1
externally and also touches x axis is : (2005)
1. The triangle PQR is inscribed in the circle x2 + y2 = 25. If Q
(a) x2 = 4 y È (0, y), y < 0
and R have coordinates (3, 4) and (–4, 3) respectively,
then ÐQPR is equal to : (2000) (b) x2 = y
(a) p/2 (b) p/3 (c) y = 4x2
(c) p/4 (d) p/6 (d) y2 = 4 x È (0, y), y Î R
2. If the circle x 2 + y 2 + 2x + 2ky + 6 = 0 and 9. Let ABCD be a quadrilateral with area 18, with side AB
x2 + y2 + 2ky + k = 0 intersect orthogonally, then k is : parallel to the side CD and AB = 2CD . Let AD be
(2000) perpendicular to AB and CD. If a circle is drawn inside the
(a) 2 or –3/2 (b) –2 or –3/2 quadrilateral ABCD touching all the sides, then its radius
(c) 2 or 3/2 (d) –2 or 3/2 is : (2007)
3. Let PQ and RS be tangents at the extremities of the diameter (a) 3 (b) 2
PR of a circle of radius r. If PS and RQ intersect at a point
X on the circumference of the circle, then 2r equals. (2001) 3
(c) (d) 1
2
PQ + RS
(a) PQ.RS (b) 10. Consider the two curves
2
C1 : y2 = 4x
2PQ × RS PQ 2 + RS2 C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0, then (2008)
(c) (d)
PQ + RS 2
(a) C1 and C2 touch each other only at one point
4. Let AB be a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = r2 subtending a (b) C1 and C2 touch each other exactly at two points
right angle at the centre. Then the locus of the centroid of
(c) C1 and C2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly two
the triangle PAB as P moves on the circle is : (2001)
points
(a) a parabola (b) a circle
(d) C1 and C2 neither intersect nor touch each other
(c) an ellipse (d) a pair of straight lines.
11. Tangents drawn from the point P (1, 8) to the circle
5. If the tangent at the point P on the circle x2+y2+6x+6y = 2
x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y – 11 = 0 touch the circle at the points A and
meets the straight line 5x – 2y + 6 = 0 at a point Q on the
y-axis, then the length of PQ is : (2002) B. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle PAB is
(2009)
(a) 4 (b) 2 5
(a) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y + 19 = 0

(c) 5 (d) 3 5 (b) x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y + 19 = 0

(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y – 29 = 0
6. The centre of circle inscribed in square formed by the lines
x2 – 8x + 12 = 0 and y2 – 14y + 45 = 0, is : (2003) (d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 4y + 19 = 0
(a) (4, 7) (b) (7, 4) 12. The locus of the mid-point of the chord of contact of
(c) (9, 4) (d) (4, 9) tangents drawn from points lying on the straight line
4x – 5y = 20 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9 is (2012)
7. If one of the diameters of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x –6y +6 =0 is
a chord to the circle with centre (2, 1), then the radius of (a) 20 (x2 + y2) – 36x + 45 y = 0
the circle is : (2004) (b) 20 (x2 + y2) + 36x – 45 y = 0
(a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 36 (x2 + y2) – 20x + 45 y = 0

(c) 3 (d) 2 (d) 36 (x2 + y2) + 20x – 45 y = 0

CIRCLES 95

13. A line y = mx + 1 intersect the circle (x – 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = 25 17. Let RS be the diameter of the circle x2 + y2 = 1, where S is
at points P and Q. If the midpoint of the line segment PQ the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable point (other than R and
S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at S and P meet
3 at the point Q. The normal to the circle at P intersects a
has x-coordinate - then which one of the following
5 line drawn through Q parallel to RS at point E. Then the
options is correct. (2019) locus of E passes through the point(s) (2016)

(a) 6 £ m < 8 (b) 2 £ m < 4 æ1 1 ö æ1 1ö

(a) çè , ÷ (b) çè , ÷
3 3ø 4 2ø
(c) 4 £ m < 6 (d) -3 £ m < -1
æ1 1 ö æ1 1ö
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option] (c) çè 3 , - ÷ (d) çè 4 , - 2 ÷ø
3ø

14. Circle(s) touching x-axis at a distance 3 from the origin and Numerical Value Type Questions
having an intercept of length 2 7 on y-axis is (are)
18. The centres of two circles C1 and C2 each of unit radius
(2013) are at a distance of 6 unit from each other. Let P be the mid
point of the line segment joining the centres of C1 and C2
(a) x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y + 9 = 0
and C be a circle touching circles C1 and C2 externally. If a
(b) x2 + y2 – 6x + 7y + 9 = 0 common tangents to C1 and C passing through P is also a
(c) x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 9 = 0 common tangent to C2 and C, then the radius of the circle
C is ...... (2009)
(d) x2 + y2 – 6x – 7y + 9 = 0
19. For how many values of P, the circle
15. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and is orthogonal
to the circles (x – 1)2 + y2 = 16 and x2 + y2 = 1. Then x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – P = 0 and the coordinate axes have
exactly three common points ? (2017)
(2014)
20. Let the point B be the reflection of the point A(2,3) with
(a) radius of S is 8
respect to the line 8x – 6y – 23 = 0. Let G A and G B be
(b) radius of S is 7
circles of radii 2 and 1 with centres A and B respectively.
(c) centre of S is (–7, 1) Let T be a common tangent to the circles G A and G B
(d) centre of S is (–8, 1) such that both the circles are on the same side of T. If C is
16. The circle C1 : x2 + y2 = 3, with centre at O, intersects the the point of intersection of T and the line passing through
parabola x2 = 2y at the point P in the first quadrant. Let the A and B, then the length of the line segment AC is…..

tangent to the circle C1 at P touches other two circles C2 (2019)

and C3 at R2 and R3, respectively. Suppose C2 and C3 have
21. Let O be the centre of the circle x 2 + y 2 = r 2 , where
equal radii 2 3 and centres Q2 and Q3, respectively. If Q2

and Q3 lie on the y-axis, then. (2016) Suppose PQ is a chord of this circle and the
(a) Q2Q3 = 12
equation of the line passing through P and Q is
(b) R2R3 = 4 6
2 x + 4 y = 5. If the centre of the circumcircle of the triangle
(c) area of the triangle OR2R3 is 6 2 OPQ lies on the line x + 2 y = 4, then the value of r is
_____. (2020)
(d) area of the triangle PQ2Q3 is 4 2
CIRCLES 96

ASSERTION REASON (C) Two circles, one strictly (r) do not have a common

(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a inside the other tangent
correct explanation for ASSERTION. (D) Two branches of a (s) do not have a common
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not hyperbola normal
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. The correct matching is :
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. (a) (A-p,q; B-p,q; C-q,r; D-q,r)
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. (b) (A-q,r; B-p,q; C-p,q; D-q,r)

22. Assertion : Tangents are drawn from the point (17, 7) to (c) (A-p,q; B-q,r; C-q,r; D-p,q)
the circle x2 + y2 = 169. The tangents are mutually (d) (A-q,r; B-q,r; C-p,q; D-p,q)
perpendicular. 25. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16
Reason : The locus of the points from which mutually intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another
perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the given circle is circle C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following
x2 + y2 = 338. (2007) conditions.

(a) A (b) B (i) centre of C 3 is collinear with the centres of C1& C 2,

(c) C (d) D (ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and

23. Consider (iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N

L1 : 2x + 3y + p – 3 = 0 Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and

let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the
L2 : 2x + 3y + p + 3 = 0
parabola x2 = 8ay
where p is a real number and There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose
C : x2 + y2 – 6x + 10y + 30 = 0 values are given in list-II below :
Assertion : If line L1 is a chord of circle C, then line L2 is List–I List–II
not always a diameter of circle C. and (I) 2h + k (P) 6
Reason : If line L1 is a diameter of circle C, then line L2
is not a chord of circle C. (2008) length of ZW
(II) (Q) 6
length of XY
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Area of DMZN 5
(III) Area of DZMW (R)
Match the Following 4

Each question has two columns. Four options are given 21

representing matching of elements from Column-I and (IV) a (S)
5
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option (T) 2 6
corresponding to the correct matching.
10
24. Match the conditions/expressions in Column I with (U)
3
statement in Column II. (2007)
Which of the following is the only correct combination?
Column I Column II
(2019)
(A) Two intersecting circles (p) have a common tangent
(a) (II) - (T) (b) (I) - (S)
(B) Two mutually external (q) have a common normal
(c) (II) - (Q) (d) (I) - (U)
circles.
CIRCLES 97

26. Let the circle C1: x2 + y2 = 9 and C2: (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 = 16 28. A circle touches the line L and the circle C1 externally such
intersect at the points X and Y. Suppose that another circle that both the circles are on the same side of the line, then
C3: (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 satisfies the following conditions. the locus of centre of the circle is (2006)
(i) centre of C3 is collinear with the centres of C1& C2, (a) ellipse (b) hyperbola
(ii) C1& C2 both lie inside C3 and (c) parabola (d) parts of straight line
(iii) C3 touches C1 at M and C2 at N 29. A line M through A is drawn parallel to BD. Point S moves
Let the line through X and Y intersect C3 at Z and W and such that its distances from the line BD and the vertex A
let a common tangent of C1& C3 be a tangent to the are equal. If locus of S cuts M at T2 and T3 and AC at T1,
parabola x2 = 8ay then area of DT1 T2 T3 is (2006)
There are some expressions given in the list-I, whose
values are given in list-II below : 1 2
(a) sq unit (b) sq unit
List–I List–II 2 3
(I) 2h + k (P) 6 (c) 1 sq unit (d) 2 sq unit

length of ZW
(II) (Q) 6 Using the following passage, solve Q.30 to Q.32
length of XY
Passage – 2
Area of DMZN 5
(III) Area of DZMW (R)
4 A circle C of radius 1 is inscribed in an equilateral triangle
PQR. The points of contact of C with the sides PQ, QR, RP
21 are D, E, F respectively. The line PQ is given by the equation
(IV) a (S)
5
æ3 3 3ö
ç ÷
(T) 2 6 3 x + y – 6 = 0 and the point D is ç 2 , 2 ÷. Further, it is
è ø
10
(U) given that the origin and the centre of C are on the same side
3
of the line PQ.
Which of the following is the only incorrect combination? 30. The equation of circle C is (2008)
(2019)
(a) (IV) - (S) (b) (I) - (P) (a) ( x - 2 3 ) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 1

(c) (III) - (R) (d) (IV) - (U)

2
2 æ 1ö
(b) ( x - 2 3 ) + ç y + ÷ = 1
Using the following passage, solve Q.27 to Q.29 è 2ø

Passage – 1
(c) ( x - 3 ) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 1
Let ABCD be a square of side length 2 unit. C2 is the circle
through vertices A, B, C, D and C1 is the circle touching all the (d) ( x - 3 ) 2 + ( y - 1) 2 = 1
sides of square ABCD. L is the line through A.
31. Points E and F are given by (2008)
27. If P is a point of C 1 and Q is a point on C 2, then

PA2 + PB 2 + PC 2 + PD 2 æ 3 3ö æ 3 1ö
QA2 + QB 2 + QC 2 + QD 2
is equal to (2006) (a) çç , ÷, ( 3 ,0) (b) çç , ÷, ( 3 ,0)
è 2 2 ÷ø è 2 2 ÷ø

(a) 0.75 (b) 1.25

(c) 1 (d) 0.5 æ 3 3ö æ 3 1ö æ3 3ö æ 3 1ö
(c) çç , ÷, ç , ÷
÷ ç 2 2÷ (d) çç , ÷, ç , ÷
÷ ç 2 2÷
è 2 2 øè ø è 2 2 øè ø
CIRCLES 98

32. Equations of the sides QR, RP are (2008) Using the following passage, solve Q.35 and Q.36

2 2 Passage – 4
(a) y = x + 1, y = - x -1
3 3
Let S be the circle in the xy-plane defined by the equation
1 x2 + y2 = 4. (2018)
(b) y = x, y = 0
3 35. Let E1 E2 and F1F2 be the chords of S passing through the
point P0 (1, 1) and parallel to the x-axis and the y-axis,
3 3 respectively. Let G1 G2 be the chord of S passing through
(c) y = x + 1, y = - x -1 P0 and having slope -1. Let the tangents to S at E1 and E2
2 2
meet at E3, the tangents to S at F1 and F2 meet at F3, and
(d) y = 3 x, y = 0 the tangents to S at G1 and G2 meet at G3. Then, the points
E3, F3, and G3 lie on the curve
(a) x + y = 4 (b) (x - 4)2 + (y - 4)2 = 16
Using the following passage, solve Q.33 and Q.34
(c) (x - 4)(y - 4) = 4 (d) xy = 4
Passage – 3 36. Let P be a point on the circle S with both coordinates
being positive. Let the tangent to S at P intersect the
A tangent PT is drawn to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 at the point coordinate axes at the points M and N. Then, the mid-
P 3,1 . A straight line L, perpendicular to PT is a tangent to point of the line segment MN must lie on the curve
2 2 4
the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 1.
2
(a) (x + y) = 3xy (b) x3 + y3 = 23
33. A common tangent of the two circles is (2012)
(a) x = 4 (b) y = 2 (c) x2 + y2 = 2xy (d) x2 + y2 = x2y2

Subjective Type
(c) x + 3 y = 4 (d) x + 2 2 y = 6

34. A possible equation of L is (2012) 37. Let 2x2 + y2 – 3xy = 0 be the equation of a pair of tangents
drawn from the origin O to a circle of radius 3 with centre
(a) x - 3 y =1 (b) x + 3 y =1 in the first quadrant. If A is one of the points of contact,
find the length of OA. (2001)
(c) x - 3 y =- 1 (d) x + 3 y = 5 38. Let C1 and C2 be two circles with C2 lying inside C1. A
circle C lying inside C1 touches C1 internally and C2
externally. Identify the locus of the centre of C. (2001)
39. Find the equation of circle touching the line
2x + 3y + 1 = 0 at the point (1, –1) and is orthogonal to the
circle which has the line segment having end points
(0, –1) and (–2, 3) as the diameter. (2004)

CIRCLES

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
Teacher’s Note:

Mathematics is the most beautiful and most powerful creation of

human being, you love mathematics and it will open the doors to

success and happiness in your life.

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Pulkit Sir loves teaching Mathematics, he has been a

pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE and Olympiads.
He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7
(JEE ADVANCED), and thousands of more students who
have successfully cleared these competitive exams
in the last few years.
CONIC SECTIONS
 Chapter 03 101

CONIC SECTIONS

(i) Section of a right circular cone by a plane passing

1. CONIC SECTIONS
through its vertex is a pair of straight lines passing
A conic section, or conic is the locus of a point which through the vertex as shown in fig. 2
moves in a plane so that its distance from a fixed point is in
a constant ratio to its perpendicular distance from a fixed
straight line.
• The fixed point is called the Focus.
• The fixed straight line is called the Directrix.
• The constant ratio is called the Eccentricity denoted
by e.
• The line passing through the focus & perpendicular to
the directrix is called the Axis.
• A point of intersection of a conic with its axis is called
a Vertex.

(ii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to its base is a circle as shown in the fig. 3.

2. SECTION OF RIGHT CIRCULAR CONE BY

DIFFERENT PLANES
A right circular cone is as shown in the fig. 1

(iii) Section of a right circular cone by a plane parallel

to a generator of the cone is a parabola as shown
in the fig. 4.
CONIC SECTIONS
102

(iv) Section of a right circular cone by a plane neither PARABOLA

parallel to any generator of the cone nor
perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the cone is 5. DEFINITION AND TERMINOLOGY
an ellipse or hyperbola as shown in the fig. 5 & 6. A parabola is the locus of a point, whose distance from a
fixed point (focus) is equal to perpendicular distance from
a fixed straight line (directrix).
PS = PM

3. GENERAL EQUATION OF A CONIC :

FOCAL DIRECTRIX PROPERTY
Four standard forms of the parabola are
The general equation of a conic with focus (p, q) & directrix y² = 4ax ; y² = –4ax ; x² = 4ay ; x² = –4ay
lx + my + n = 0 is obtained using the relation PS 2 = e2PM2 For parabola y² = 4ax :
This gives (l² + m²)[(x – p)² + (y – q)²] = e²(lx + my + n)² (i) Vertex is (0, 0) (ii) Focus is (a, 0)
º ax² + 2hxy + by² + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 (iii) Axis is y = 0 (iv) Directrix is x + a = 0
Focal Distance : The distance of a point on the parabola
4. DISTINGUISHING VARIOUS CONICS from the focus.
Focal Chord : A chord of the parabola, which passes
The nature of the conic section depends upon the position through the focus.
of the focus S w.r.t. the directrix & also upon the value of Double Ordinate : A chord of the parabola perpendicular
the eccentricity e. Two different cases arise. to the axis of the symmetry.
Latus Rectum : A double ordinate passing through the
Case (I) When The Focus Lies On The Directrix.
focus or a focal chord perpendicular to the axis of parabola
In the case D º abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0 & the general is called the Latus Rectum (L.R.).
equation of a conic represents a pair of straight lines if : For y² = 4ax. Þ Length of the latus rectum = 4a
Þ ends of the latus rectum are
e > 1 º h2 > ab, the lines will be real and distinct intersecting
L(a, 2a) & L' (a, –2a).
at S.
e = 1 º h2 = ab, the lines will coincident. NOTES :
e < 1 º h2 < ab, the lines will be imaginary. (i) Perpendicular distance from focus on directrix = half the
latus rectum
Case (II) When The Focus Does Not Lie On Directrix.
(ii) Vertex is middle point of the focus & the point of
a parabola : e = 1, D ¹ 0, h² = ab intersection of directrix & axis.
an ellipse : 0 < e < 1; D ¹ 0, h² < ab (iii) Two parabolas are said to be equal if they have the same
latus rectum.
a hyperbola : e > 1; D ¹ 0, h² > ab
(iv) If vertex of parabola y2 = 4ax is shifted to (h, k) without
rectangular hyperbola : e > 1 ; D ¹ 0, h² > ab; a + b = 0 rotation, then equation of new parabola is
(y – k)2= 4a(x – h)
CONIC SECTIONS
103

6. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION 9. TANGENTS TO THE PARABOLA y² = 4ax

The simplest & the best form of representing the (i) y y1 = 2a (x + x1) at the point (x1, y1) ;(T = O, Point form)
co-ordinates of a point on the parabola is (at2, 2at) i.e. the
equations x = at2 & y = 2at together represents the parabola a æ a 2a ö
(ii) y = mx + (m ¹ 0) at ç 2 , ÷ (Slope from)
y2 = 4ax, t being the parameter. m èm m ø

(iii) t y = x + at2 at point (at2, 2at).(Parametric form)

7. POSITION OF A POINT RELATIVE TO A PARABOLA
The point (x1 y1) lies outside, on or inside the parabola NOTES :
y2 = 4ax according as the expression y12 – 4ax1 is positive,
zero or negative. Point of intersection of the tangents at the point t1 & t2 is
[at1 t2, a(t1 + t2)].
8. LINE & A PARABOLA

The line y = mx + c meets the parabola y² = 4ax in : 10. NORMALS TO THE PARABOLA y2 = 4ax
• two real points if a > mc
–y1
• two coincident points if a = mc (i) y – y1= (x – x1) at (x1, y1)
2a
• two imaginary points if a < mc
Þ condition of tangency is, c = a/m. (ii) y = mx – 2am – am3 at point (am2, – 2am)

Length of the chord intercepted by the parabola on the (iii) y + tx = 2at + at3 at point (at2, 2at).
line y = mx + c is :
NOTES :
æ 4 ö 2
ç 2 ÷ a(1 + m )(a - mc) (i) If the normals to the parabola y² = 4ax at the point t1
èm ø
meets the parabola again at the point t 2 then
The equation of a chord joining t1 & t2 is
2x – (t1 + t2)y + 2 at1t2 = 0. æ 2ö
t2 = – çç t1 + ÷÷
è t1 ø
NOTES :
(ii) If the normals to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the points t1 &
(i) If t1 and t2 are the ends of a focal chord of the parabola t2 intersect again on the parabola at the point 't3' then
y2 = 4ax then t1t2 = –1.
t1t2 = 2 ; t3 = –(t1 + t2) and the line joining t1 & t2 passes
Hence the co-ordinates at the extremities of a focal chord through a fixed point (–2a, 0).
æ a 2a ö
can be taken as : (at2, 2at) & ç 2 ,- ÷ 11. PAIR OF TANGENTS
èt t ø

(ii) Lenght of focal chord with (at2, 2at) as one of its end The equation to the pair of tangents which can be drawn
2 from any point (x1, y1) to the parabola y2 = 4ax is given by:
æ 1ö
point is a ç t + ÷ SS1 = T2 where :
è tø
S º y2 – 4ax ; S1 = y12 – 4ax1 ; T º y y1 – 2a(x + x1).
(iii) Length of the focal chord making an angle a with the
x-axis is 4 a cosec2a.
CONIC SECTIONS
104

12. DIRECTOR CIRCLE (iv) Any tangent to a parabola & the perpendicular on it from
the focus meet on the tangent at the vertex.
Locus of the point of intersection of the perpendicular (v) Semi latus rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax, is the harmonic
tangents to a curve is called the director circle. For parabola
mean between segments of any focal chord of the parabola.
y2 = 4ax it's equation is
x + a = 0 which is parabola's own directrix. (vi) The area of the triangle formed by three points on a parabola
is twice the area of the triangle formed by the tangents at
13. CHORD OF CONTACT these points.
(vii) If normal are drawn from a point P(h, k) to the parabola
Equation to the chord of contact of tangents drawn from a
y2 = 4ax then
point P(x1, y1) is yy1 = 2a (x + x1) ; (i.e., T = 0)
k = mh – 2am – am3
NOTES : am3 + m(2a – h) + k = 0.

The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the point m1 + m2 + m3 = 0;
(x1, y1) & the chord of contact is Where m1, m2 & m3 are the slopes of the three concurrent
(y12 – 4ax1)3/2 / 2a. normals.
* algebraic sum of the slopes of the three concurrent
14. CHORD WITH A GIVEN MIDDLE POINT normals is zero.
* algebraic sum of the ordinates of the three conormal
Equation of the chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax whose
middle point is : (x1 y1) is : points on the parabola is zero

2a * Centroid of the triangle formed by three co-normal

y – y1 = y (x – x1) º T = S1. points lies on the x-axis.
1
* Condition for three real and distinct normals to be
15. IMPORTANT RESULTS drawn from a point P(h, k) is

(i) If the tangent & normal at any point ‘P’ of the parabola 4
h > 2a & k 2 < ( h - 2 a )3
intersect the axis at T & G then ST = SG = SP where ‘S’ is 27 a
the focus. In other words the tangent and the normal at a
(viii) Length of subnormal is constant for all points on the
point P on the parabola are the bisectors of the angle
parabola & is equal to the semi latus rectum.
between the focal radius SP & the perpendicular from P on
the directrix. From this we conclude that all rays emanating ELLIPSE
from S will become parallel to the axis of the parabola after
reflection. Ellipse is a conic with 0 < e < 1.
(ii) The portion of a tangent to a parabola cut off between the
directrix & the curve subtends a right angle at the focus. 16. STANDARD EQUATION AND DEFINITIONS
(iii) The tangents at the extremities of a focal chord intersect at
Standard equation of an ellipse referred to its principal
right angles on the directrix, and hence a circle on any
axes along the co-ordinate axes is
focal chord as diameter touches the directrix. Also a circle
on any focal radii of a point P (at2, 2at) as diameter touches
x2 y2
the tangent at the vertex and intercepts a chord of length + = 1 where a>b & b2 = a2 (1 – e2).
a2 b2
a 1 + t 2 on a normal at the point P..
CONIC SECTIONS
105

NOTES :

x 2 y2
(i) If the equation of the ellipse is given as + =1
a 2 b2
and nothing is mentioned then the rule is to assume
that a > b.
(ii) If b > a is given, then the y-axis will become major axis
and x-axis will become the minor axis and all other points
and lines will change accordingly.
(iii) If centre of standard ellipse is shifted to (h, k) without
b2
Eccentricity : e = 1 - 2 , (0 < e < 1) x–h
2
y–k
2
a rotation, then new ellipse is + =1
a2 b2
Foci : S º (a e, 0) & S' º (–a e, 0)

a a 17. AUXILIARY CIRCLE/ECCENTRIC ANGLE

Equations of Directrices : x = &x =-
e e
A circle described on major axis as diameter is called the
Major Axis : The line segment A'A in which the foci S'
& S lie is of length 2a & is called the major axis auxiliary circle. Let Q be a point on the auxiliary circle
(a > b) of the ellipse. Point of intersection of major axis x2 + y2 = a2 such that QP produced is perpendicular to
with directrix is called the foot of the directrix (Z). the x-axis then P & Q are called as the Corresponding
Points on the ellipse and the auxiliary circle respectively.
Minor Axis : The y-axis intersects the ellipse in the
points B' º (0, –b) and B º (0, b). The line segment 'q' is called the Eccentric Angle of the point P on the
B'B of length 2b (b < a) is called the minor axis of the ellipse. ellipse (–p < q £ p).

Principal Axis : The major and minor axis together are

called principal axis of the ellipse.
Vertices : A' º (–a, 0) & A º (a, 0).
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the major
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum : The focal chord perpendicular to the
major axis is called the latus rectum.
Length of latus rectum (LL’) :
NOTES :
2b 2 (minor axis)2
= = 2a(1 – e2)
a major axis l(PN ) b Semi major axis
(i) = =
l(QN) a Semi major axis
= 2e (distance from focus to the corresponding directrix).
Centre : (ii) If from each point of a circle perpendiculars are
The point which bisects every chord of the conic drawn drawn upon a fixed diameter then the locus of the
through it is called the centre of the conic. C º (0, 0) points dividing these perpendiculars internally in a
given ratio is an ellipse of which the given circle
x 2 y2
the origin is the centre of the ellipse + =1 is the auxiliary circle.
a 2 b2
CONIC SECTIONS
106

18. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION xx1 yy 1

(b) Point form: + = 1 is tangent to the ellipse
2
a b2
The equation x = a cos  & y = b sin  together represent
at (x1,y1). (Using T = 0)
x 2 y2
the ellipse  1 xcosθ ysinθ
a 2 b2 (c) Parametric form: + = 1 is tangent
a b
Where  is a parameter. Note that if
to the ellipse at the point (a cos , b sin ).
P()  (a cos , b sin ) is on the ellipse then;
Q ()  (a cos , a sin ) is on the auxiliary circle.
NOTES :
19. POSITION OF A POINT W.R.T. AN ELLIPSE
(i) There are two tangents to the ellipse having the same
The point P (x1, y1) lies outside, inside or on the ellipse
m, i.e. there are two tangents parallel to any given
according as ; direction. These tangents touches the ellipse at
x12 y12 extremities of a diameter.
2
 2 –1>0 (outside)
a b (ii) Point of intersection of the tangents at the point  &
x12 y12  is :
2
 2 –1<0 (inside)
a b
x12 y12
 –1=0 (on)     
a2 b2  cos sin 
a 2 ,b 2 
20. LINE AND AN ELLIPSE  cos    cos    
 
 2 2 
x 2 y2
The line y = mx + c meets the ellipse   1 in two
a 2 b2
points real, coincident or imaginary according as c² is (iii) The eccentric angles of point of contact of two parallel
<, = or > a2m2 + b2. tangents differ by .

x 2 y2
Hence y = mx + c is tangent to the ellipse  1
a 2 b2
if c2 = a2m2 + b2.
22. NORMALS
The equation to the chord of the ellipse joining two points
(i) Equation of the normal at (x1, y1) is
with eccentric angles  and  is given by

x α +β y α +β α -β a2 x b2 y
cos + sin = cos - = a2 – b2 = a2e2.
. x1 y1
a 2 b 2 2

21. TANGENTS (ii) Equation of the normal at the point (acos , bsin ) is;
ax sec – by cosec = (a2 – b2).

(a) Slope form: y = mx ± a 2m 2 + b 2 is tangent to (iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is

the ellipse for all values of m. (a 2 - b 2 )m

y = mx -
a2 + b 2m2

SCAN CODE
Conic Sections
CONIC SECTIONS
107

(i) PF. PG = b2
23. DIRECTOR CIRCLE
(ii) PF. Pg = a2
Locus of the point of intersection of the tangents which
(iii) PG. Pg = SP. S'P
meet at right angles is called the Director Circle. The
equation to this locus is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 i.e. a circle (iv) CG. CT = CS2
whose centre is the centre of the ellipse & whose radius (v) locus of the mid point of Gg is another
is the length of the line joining the ends of the major & ellipse having the same eccentricity as
minor axis. that of the original ellipse.
[Where S and S' are the foci of the ellipse and T
NOTES : is the point where tangent at P meet the major
axis]
Pair of tangents, Chord of contact, Chord with a given Middle
* The circle on any focal distance as diameter
point are to be interpreted as they are in Parabola/Circle.
touches the auxiliary circle. Perpendiculars from
the centre upon all chords which join the ends
24. IMPORTANT RESULTS of any perpendicular diameters of the ellipse are
of constant length.
x 2 y2 * If the tangent at the point P of a standard ellipse
Referring to the ellipse + =1
a 2 b2 meets the axis in T and t and CY is the
(a) If P be any point on the ellipse with S & S' as perpendicular on it from the centre then :
to foci then l(SP) + l(S'P) = 2a. (i) T t. PY = a2 – b2 and
(b) The tangent & normal at a point P on the ellipse (ii) least value of T t is a + b.
bisect the external and internal angles between
the focal distances of P. This refers to the well HYPERBOLA
known reflection property of the ellipse which
The Hyperbola is a conic whose eccentricity is greater
states that rays from one focus are reflected
through other focus & vice-versa. Hence we than unity (e > 1).(S)
can deduce that the straight lines joining each
focus to the foot of the perpendicular from the 25. STANDARD EQUATION & DEFINITION (S)
other focus upon the tangent at any point P meet
on the normal PG and bisects it where G is the
point where normal at P meets the major axis.
(c) The product of the length's of the perpendicular
segments from the foci on any tangent to the
ellipse is b² and the feet of these perpendiculars
lie on its auxiliary circle and the tangents at these
feet to the auxiliary circle meet on the ordinate
of P and that the locus of their point of
intersection is a similar ellipse as that of the
original one.
(d) The portion of the tangent to an ellipse between
the point of contact & the directrix subtends a x2 y 2
Standard equation of the hyperbola is - =1,
right angle at the corresponding focus. a2 b2
(e) If the normal at any point P on the ellipse with where b2 = a2 (e2 – 1).
centre C meet the major and minor axes in G & 2
g respectively & if CF be perpendicular upon b2 æ C.A ö
Eccentricity (e) : e2 = 1 + 2 = 1+ç ÷
this normal then : a è T.A ø
CONIC SECTIONS
108

(C.A ® Conjugate Axis;

26. RECTANGULAR OR EQUILATERAL HYPERBOLA
T.A ® Transverse Axis)
Foci : S º (ae, 0) & S' º (–ae, 0). The particular kind of hyperbola in which the lengths of
the transverse and conjugate axis are equal is called an
a a Equilateral Hyperbola. Note that the eccentricity of the
Equations of Directrix : x = &x =-
e e
rectangular hyperbola is 2.
Transverse Axis : The line segment A'A of length 2a in
which the foci S' & S both lie is called the transverse axis
27. CONJUGATE HYPERBOLA
of the hyperbola.
Conjugate Axis : The line segment B'B between the Two hyperbolas such that transverse & conjugate axes
two points B' º (0, –b) & B º (0, b) is called as the of one hyperbola are respectively the conjugate & the
conjugate axis of the hyperbola. transverse axes of the other are called Conjuagate
Principal Axes : The transverse & conjugate axis Hyperbolas of each other.
together are called Principal Axes of the hyperbola.
x2 y2 x2 y2
Vertices : A º (a, 0) & A' º (–a, 0) e.g. – =1 & – + = 1 are conjugate
a2 b2 a2 b2
Focal Chord : A chord which passes through a focus is
hyperbolas of each other.
called a focal chord.
Double Ordinate : A chord perpendicular to the transverse
NOTES :
axis is called a double ordinate.
Latus Rectum (l) L : The focal chord perpendicular to (a) If e 1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the hyperbola
the transverse axis is called the latus rectum. and its conjugate then e1–2 + e2–2 = 1.
(b) The foci of a hyperbola and its conjugate are concyclic
2b 2 (C.A.)2 and form the vertices of a square.
l= = = 2a (e2 – 1)
a T.A.
(c) Two hyperbolas are said to be similiar if they have the
same eccentricity.
NOTES : (d) Two similiar hyperbolas are said to be equal if they
have same latus rectum.
(i) l (L.R.) = 2 e (distance from focus to corresponding
directrix). (e) If a hyperbola is equilateral then the conjugate
hyperbola is also equilateral.
(ii) Centre : The point which bisects every chord of the
conic drawn through it is called the centre of the conic.
C º (0, 0) the origin is the centere of the hyperbola 28. AUXILIARY CIRCLE
2 2
x y
2
- 2 =1 A circle drawn with centre C & T.A. as a diameter is
a b called the Auxiliary Circle of the hyperbola. Equation of
(iii) Since the fundamental equation to the hyperbola only the auxiliary circle is x2 + y2 = a2.
differs from that to the ellipse in having –b2 instead Note from the figure that P & Q are called the
of b2 it will be found that many propositions for the "Corresponding Points" on the hyperbola and the
hyperbola are derived from those for the ellipse by auxiliary circle.
simply changing the sign of b2.
In the hyperbola any ordinate of the curve does not meet
(iv) If centre of standard hyperbola is shifted to (h, k) the circle on AA' as diameter in real points. There is
without rotation, then hyperbola equation is therefore no real eccentric angle as in the case of the
2 2 ellipse.
x–h y–k
– =1
a2 b2
CONIC SECTIONS
109

32. TANGENTS

(i) Slope Form : y = mx + a 2 m 2 - b 2 can be taken

x 2 y2
as the tangent to the hyperbola - =1
a 2 b2
(ii) Point Form : Equation of tangent to the

x 2 y2
hyperbola - = 1 at the point (x1 y1) is
a 2 b2

xx1 yy1
- = 1 (Using T = 0)
29. PARAMETRIC REPRESENTATION a2 b2
(iii) Parametric Form : Equation of the tangent to the
The equation x = a sec q & y = b tan q together
x 2 y2
hyperbola - = 1 at the point (a sec q, b tan q)
a 2 b2
x 2 y2
represents the hyperbola - = 1 where q is a
a 2 b2 xsecθ ytanθ
- = 1.
parameter. a b

Note that if P(q) º (a secq, b tan q) is on the hyperbola NOTES :

then ;
(i) Point of intersection of the tangents at q1 & q2 is :
Q (q) º (a cosq, a sinq) is on the auxiliary circle.
q1 - q 2
cos
30. POSITION OF A POINT 'P' W.R.T. A HYPERBOLA x=a 2 , y = b tan æç q1 + q 2 ö÷
q1 + q 2 è 2 ø
cos
2
x12 y12
The quantity S1 = - –1 is positive, zero or
a 2 b2 (ii) If |q1 + q2 | = p, then tangents at these points
(q1 & q2) are parallel.
negative according as the point (x1, y1) lies inside, on or
(iii) There are two parallel tangents having the same slope
outside the curve.
m. These tangents touches the hyperbola at the
extremities of a diameter.
31. LINE AND A HYPERBOLA

The straight line y = mx + c is a secant, a tangent or 33. NORMALS

(i) The equation of the normal to the hyperbola
x2 y2
passes outside the hyperbola - = 1 according as
a 2 b2 x 2 y2
- = 1 at the point P (x 1 , y1) on it is
: c2 > or = or < a2m2 – b2, respectively. a 2 b2
a2x b2y
The equation to the chord of the hyperbola joining two + = a2 + b2 = a2e2
x1 y1
points with eccentric angles a and b is given by
(ii) The equation of the normal at the point
x α–β y α+β α+β P (a sec q, b tan q) on the hyperbola
cos – sin = cos .
a 2 b 2 2
CONIC SECTIONS
110

x2 y2 ax by
35. RECTANGULAR HYPERBOLA (xy = c2)
2
- 2 = 1 is + = a2 + b2 = a2e2.
a b secθ tanθ
(iii) Equation of a normal in terms of its slope 'm' is It is referred to its asymptotes as axes of co-ordinates.

(a 2 + b 2 )m Vertices : (c, c) and (–c, –c) ;

y = mx ± .
a 2 - b2 m 2

NOTES :

Equation to the chord of contact, chord with a given middle

point, pair of tangents from an external point is to be
interpreted as in parabola/circle.

34. DIRECTOR CIRCLE Foci : ( 2c, 2c) & (- 2c, - 2 c),

The locus of the intersection point of tangents which are Directrices : x + y = ± 2c

at right angles is known as the Director Circle of the
Latus Rectum (l) : l = 2 2 c = T.A. = C.A.
hyperbola. The equation to the director circle is :
Parametric equation x = ct, y = c/t, t Î R – {0}
x2 + y2 = a2 – b2.
Equation of a chord joining the points P(t1) & Q(t2) is
If b2 < a2 this circle is real. x + t1t2y = c(t1 + t2).
If b2 = a2 (rectangular hyperbola) the radius of the circle
x y
is zero and it reduces to a point circle at the origin. In Equation of the tangent at P (x1 y1) is x + y = 2 and
1 1
this case the centre is the only point from which the
tangents at right angles can be drawn to the curve. x
at P(t) is + ty = 2c.
t
If b2 > a2, the radius of the circle is imaginary, so that
Equation of the normal at P(t) is xt3 – yt = c(t4 – 1).
there is no such circle & so no pair of tangents at right
Chord with a given middle point as (h, k) is kx + hy = 2hk.
angle can be drawn to the curve.

36. IMPORTANT RESULTS

NOTES :
(i) The difference of of focal distances of any point
A simple method to find the co-ordinates of the centre of P on hyperbola constant, i.e, |PS – PS’| = 2a
the hyperbola expressed as a general equation of degree 2
should be remembered as : (ii) Locus of the feet of the perpendicular drawn from
Let f(x y) = 0 represents a hyperbola. x 2 y2
focus of the hyperbola - = 1 upon any
a 2 b2
¶f ¶f
Find & . Then the point of intersection of tangent is its auxiliary circle i.e.
¶x ¶y x2 + y2 = a2 & the product of the feet of these
perpendiculars is b2.
¶f ¶f (iii) The portion of the tangent between the point of
=0& = 0 gives the centre of the hyperbola.
¶x ¶y contact & the directrix subtends a right angle at
the corresponding focus.
CONIC SECTIONS
111

(iv) The tangent & normal at any point of a

hyperbola bisect the angle between the focal x2 y2
hyperbola + =1
radii. This spell the reflection property of the a 2 - k 2 k 2 - b2
hyperbola as "An incoming light ray" aimed (a > k > b > 0) are confocal and therefore
towards one focus is reflected from the outer orthogonal.
surface of the hyperbola towards the other focus.
(v) The foci of the hyperbola and the points P and
It follows that if an ellipse and a hyperbola have
Q in which any tangent meets the tangents at
the same foci, they cut at right angles at any of
the vertices are concyclic with PQ as diameter of
their common point.
the circle.
(vi) A rectangular hyperbola circumscribing a triangle
also passes through the orthocentre of this

æ cö
triangle. If çç ct i , ÷÷ i = 1, 2, 3 be the angular
è ti ø
points P, Q, R then orthocentre is

æ -c ö
çç ,-ct1 t 2 t 3 ÷÷.
è t 1t 2 t 3 ø

(vii) If a circle and the rectangular hyperbola xy = c2

meet in the four points, t1, t2, t3 and t4, then
(a) t1 t2 t3 t4 = 1
(b) The centre of the circle through the points t1,
x2
y2 t2, and t3 is :
Note that the ellipse 2
+ 2 = 1 & the
a b
ìï c æ 1 ö cæ 1 1 1 öüï
í çç t1 + t 2 + t 3 + ÷÷, çç + + + t1 + t 2 + t 3 ÷÷ý
ïî 2 è t1t 2 t 3 ø 2 è t1 t 2 t 3 øïþ
CONIC SECTIONS 112

SOLVED EXAMPLES

PARABOLA Example - 2

Example - 1 Find the equation of the parabola with its vertex at (3, 2)
and its focus at (5, 2).
Find the equation of the parabola with latus rectum joining
the points (3, 6) and (3, –2) Sol. Let Vertex A (3, 2) and focus is S (5, 2)

-2 - 6
Sol. Slope of (3, 6) and (3, –2) is = ¥ since latus rectum 2-2
3-3 Slope of AS = = 0 (which is parallel to x-axis)
5-3
is perpendicular to axis. Hence axis parallel to x-axis. The
equation of the two possible parabolas will be of the form
2
(y – k) = ± 4a (x – h) ... (1)

Hence axis of parabola parallel to x-axis.

Since latus rectum = (3 - 3) 2 + (6 + 2) 2 = 8 The equation is of the form

2
\ 4a = 8 (y – k) = 4a (x – h)
2
a=2 or (y – 2) = 4a (x – 3)
2
\ From (1), (y – k) = ± 8 (x – h)
as (h, k) is the vertex (3, 2)
Since (3, 6) and (3, –2) lie on the parabola, then
2 a = distance between the focus and the vertex
(6 – k) = ± 8 (3 – h) ... (2)
2
and (–2 – k) = ± 8 (3 – h) ... (3)
= (5 - 3)2 + (2 - 2)2
Solving (2) and (3) we get
k=2 =2
From (2) + 16 = 8 (3 – h), Hence the required equation is
\ h=3±2 2
(y – 2) = 8 (x – 3)
\ h = 5, 1
2
or y – 8x – 4y + 28 = 0
Hence values of (h, k) are (5, 2) and (1, 2). The required
parabolas are
2 2
(y – 2) = –8 (x – 5) and (y – 2) = 8 (x – 1)
CONIC SECTIONS 113

Example - 3 Sol. (t2, 2t) -one end of focal chord

Let L1 be the length of the common chord of the curves æ 1 -2 ö

ç 2 , t ÷ other end Q t1t2 = -1
x2 + y2 = 9 and y2 = 8x, and L2 be the length of the latus èt ø
rectum of y2 = 8x, then: Length of focal chord
(a) L1 > L2 (b) L1 = L2
2 2
æ 2 1ö æ 1ö
L1 = çt - 2 ÷ + 4çt + ÷
(c) L1 < L2 (d) = 3 è t ø è tø
L2
2
Ans. (c) 1 æ 1ö
=t+ çt - ÷ + 4
Sol. For intersection of x2 + y2 = 9 and y2 = 8x t è tø
x2 + 8x = 9 Þ (x + 9)(x - 1) = 0 Þ x = - 9 or x = 1
2
x = –9 not possible æ 1ö
=çt + ÷
Hence, x = 1 è tø

Now y2 = 8 Þ y = ± 2 2 Example - 6

The two points are 1, 2 2 and 1, -2 2 A chord is drawn through the focus of the parabola y2=6x
such that its distance from the vertex of this parabola is
L1 = 2 ´ 2 2 = 4 2
5
, then its slope can be :
L2 = 4a = 8 2
Hence, L2>L1
5 3
(a) (b)
Example - 4 2 2

2 2
For the parabola y2 = 8x point (2, 5) is (c) (d)
5 3
(a) inside the parabola
(b) Focus Ans. (a)
(c) outside the parabola Sol. Let the slope of chord be ‘m’ equation of chord through
(d) On the parabola 3 æ 3ö
focus ( ,0) is y - 0 = m çx- 2÷
Ans. (c) 2 è ø
Sol. For y2 = 8x
3m
25 - 8 (2) > 0 Þ mx - y - =0
2
Þ(2, 5) lies outside parabola
5
distance from (0,0 ) is
Example - 5 2

0-0- 3 m
If (t2, 2t) is one end of a focal chord of the parabola, 5 2
y2 = 4x then the length of the focal chord will be : =
2 m2 + 1
2
æ 1ö æ 1ö æ 2 1 ö 5 3m
(a) ç t + ÷ (b) ç t + ÷ ç t + 2 ÷ Þ =
è tø è tø è t ø 2 2 m2 + 1
Þ 5 (m2 + 1) = 9m2
æ 1ö æ 2 1 ö Þ 5 = 4m2
(c) ç t - ÷ ç t + 2 ÷ (d) none of these
è tø è t ø 5
Þm =
Ans. (a) 2
CONIC SECTIONS 114

Example - 7 x = X + (–b) and y=Y+0

Þ x+b=X and y=Y ...(ii)
If the line x + y – 1 = 0 touches the parabola y2 = kx, then the
value of k is from (i), Y2 = 4aX ...(iii)

(a) 4 (b) –4 x y X -b Y
and the line + = 1 reduces to + =1
(c) 2 (d) –2 l m l m
Ans. (b)
æ X-bö
Þ Y = m ç1 - ÷
a è l ø
Sol. c=
m
æ mö æ bö
k Þ Y = ç - ÷ X + m ç1 + ÷ ...(iv)
è lø è lø
Þ Þ k = -4
1= 4
-1 The line (iv) will touch the parabola (iii), if

æ bö a
m ç1 + ÷ = é aù
Example - 8 è l ø æ- m ö
ç ÷ êc = m ú
è lø ë û
Show that line x cos a + y sin a = p touches the parabola
y2 = 4ax if p cos a + a sin2 a = 0 and that the point of
m2 æ bö
contact is (a tan2 a, – 2a tan a). Þ ç1 + ÷ = -a
l è lø
Sol. The given line is
Þ m2 (l + b) + al 2 = 0
x cos a + y sin a = p
Alternative Method :
Þ y = – x cot a + p cosec a
Then given line and parabola are
Comparing this line with y = mx + c
\ m = – cot a and c = p cosec a x y
+ =1 ...(i)
since the given line touches the parabola l m
and y2 = 4a (x + b) ...(ii)
a
\ c= Þ cm = a respectively.
m
Substituting the value of x from (i),
Þ (p cosec a) (– cot a) = a
Þ a sin2 a + p cos a = 0 æ yö
i.e., x = l ç1 - ÷ in (ii)
è mø
æ a 2a ö
and point of contact is ç 2 , ÷ i.e.
èm m ø ì æ yö ü
then y2 = 4a ílç1 - ÷ + bý
î è mø þ
æ a 2a ö
ç 2
,- ÷ Þ (a tan2 a, – 2a tan a). 4 al
è cot a cot a ø Þ y2 + y – 4a(l + b) = 0 ...(iii)
m

Example - 9 Since the line (i), touches the parabola (ii) then the roots
of equation (iii) are equal
x y 2
Prove that the line + = 1 touches the parabola æ 4al ö
l m \ ç ÷ – 4.1 {–4a (l + b)} = 0
è m ø
y2 = 4a (x + b) if m2 (l + b) + al2 = 0.
Sol. The given parabola is
al 2
y2 = 4a (x + b) ...(i) Þ + (l + b) = 0
m2
Vertex of this parabola is (–b, 0).
Þ al2 + m2 (l + b) = 0
Now shifting (0, 0) at (–b, 0) then
Þ m2 (l + b) + al2 = 0.
CONIC SECTIONS 115

Example - 10 Example - 12

If y1, y2 are the ordinates of two points P and Q on the Two tangents are drawn from a point (-2, -1) to the curve,
parabola and y3 is the ordinate of the point of intersection y2 = 4x. If a is the angle between them, then | tan a | is
of tangents at P and Q, then equal to :
(a) y1, y2, y3 are in A.P. (b) y1, y3, y2 are in A.P.
1 1
(c) y1, y2, y3 are in G.P. (d) y1, y3, y2 are in G.P. (a) (b)
3 3
Ans. (b)
(c) 3 (d) 3
Sol. Let y1= 2at1, y2 = 2at2.then y3 = a ( t1 + t2)
Ans. (d)
Þ2y3 = 2at1 + 2at2 = y1 + y2
Sol. Let the equation of tangent to the parabola y = 4x be
Þy1, y3 ,y2 AP
1
y=mx+
Example - 11 m
this tangent passes through (–2,–1)
(a) Find the equation of the tangents drawn to
y2 + 12x = 0 from the point (3, 8). 1
Þ - 1 = - 2m +
(b) Find the equation of tangents to the parabola m
y2 = 4x + 5 which is parallel to the line y = 2x + 7. Þ 2m2 - m - 1 = 0
Sol. (a) y2 + 12x = 0 Þ y2 = – 12x. Let m1 and m2 be the root of this equation where
Þ a = – 3. m1 and m2 are slopes of two tangents drawn from (-2,-1) to
the curve y2=4x.
3 é aù
Let tangent be y = mx –
m
. êQ y = mx + m ú 1 -1
ë û Now, m1 + m2 = and m1 m2 =
2 2

3 Given ‘a’ is the angle between these tangents,

Since tangent passes through (3, 8), 8 = 3m –
m
2
m 2 - m1 m1 + m2 - 4m1m 2
Þ 3m2 – 8m – 3 = 0 Þ (m – 3) (3m + 1) = 0 Þ tan a = 1 + m m
-
1 2 1 + m1m2
1
Þ m = 3, m = – Þ Tangent are y = 3x – 1
3
2
æ -1ö æ -1ö
x ç ÷ -4ç ÷
è2ø è2ø
and y=– + 9. Þ tan a=
3 æ -1ö
1+ç ÷
è2ø
(b) Any line || to given is y = 2x + l.
If it is tangent to the parabola then it will meet it in two
coincident points.
æ1ö
Eliminating x, we get : y2 – 5 = 2 (y – l) ç ÷+2
è4ø 3
Þ y2 – 2y + 2l – 5 = 0. Roots are equal. = 1 = ´ 2 =3
2
2
Þ b2 – 4ac = 0 Þ 4 – 4(2l – 5) = 0

Þl =3 Þ y = 2x + 3
Now tan a = 3 = 3
CONIC SECTIONS 116

Example - 13
a 1/ 3
Þ y=– x – a2/3 b1/3
Find the equation of common tangent to the circle b1 / 3
x2 + y2 = 8 and parabola y2 = 16x.
Þ a1/3 x + b1/3 y + a2/3 b2/3 = 0
Sol. Let ty = x + at2 (where a = 4) be a tangent to parabola which
also touches circle. Example - 15
Þ ty = x + 4t2 and x2 + y2 = 8
Show that the locus of a point, such that two of the three
have only one common solution.
normals drawn from it to the parabola y2 = 4ax are
Þ (ty – 4t2)2 + y2 = 8 perpendicular is y2 = a (x – 3a).
has equal roots as a quadratic in y. Sol. Let P º (x1, y1) be the point from where normals AP, BP, CP
Þ (1 + t2) y2 – 8t3y + 16t4 – 8 = 0 has equal roots. are drawn to y2 = 4ax.
Let y = mx – 2am – am3 be one of these normals.
Þ 64t6 = 64t6 + 64t4 – 32 – 32t2 éëb 2 = 4 ac ùû
P lies on it Þ y1 = mx1 – 2am – am3.
Þ t2 + 1 – 2t4 = 0
Slopes m1, m2, m3 of AP, BP, CP are roots of the cubic
Þ t2 = 1, – 1/2
y1 = mx1 – 2am – am2.
Þ t=±1
Þ am3 + (2a – x1) m + y1 = 0 Þ m1 + m2 + m3 = 0
Þ the common tangents are
2a - x1
y = x + 4 and y = – x – 4. Þ m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 =
a
Example - 14

Find the equation of the common tangents to the parabola

y2 = 4ax and x2 = 4by.
Sol. The equation of any tangent in terms of slope (m) to the
parabola y2 = 4ax is

a
y = mx + ...(i)
m y1
Þ m1m2m3 = –
a
If this line is also tangent to the parabola x2 = 4ay then (i)
meets x2 = 4by in two coincident points. As two of the three normals are perpendicular, we take m1m2
Substituting the value of y from (i) in x2 = 4by we get = – 1. (i.e. we assume AP perpendicular BP)
To get the locus, we have to eliminate m1, m2, m3,
æ aö 4ab
x2 = 4b ç mx + ÷ Þ x2 – 4bmx – =0 2a - x1
è mø m m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 =
a
The roots of this quadratic are equal provided “B 2 = 4AC”
2a - x1
æ - 4ab ö Þ –1 + m3 (–m3) =
i.e., (–4bm)2 = 4.1. ç ÷ a
è m ø
2
Þ 16b2m3 + 16ab = 0, m ¹ 0 æ + y1 ö 2a - x 1
Þ –1– ç ÷ =
Þ m3 = – a/b \ m = – a1/3/b1/3 è a ø a
Substituting the value of m in (i) the required equation is [using m1m2m3 = – y1/a and m1m2 = – 1]

a1/3 ab1/ 3 Þ a + y1 = – 2a2 + ax1

2 2
y=- x -
b1/3 a1/ 3 Þ y12 = a (x1 – 3a)
Þ y2 = a (x – 3a) is the required locus.
CONIC SECTIONS 117

Example - 16 Example - 17

Show that the locus of the middle points of normal chords

Find the locus of the mid points of the chords of the
of the parabola y2 = 4ax is
parabola y2 = 4ax which subtend a right angle at the vertex
y4 – 2a (x – 2a) y2 + 8a4 = 0.
of the parabola.

Sol. Let P (h, k) be mid point of a chord QR of the parabola y2

= 4ax, then equation of chord QR is
Sol.
T = S1

Þ yk – 2a (x + h) = k2 – 4ah

Þ yk – 2ax = k2 – 2ah ...(i)

Equation of the normal chord at any point (at2, 2at) of the
parabola y2 = 4ax is
y + tx = 2at + at3 ...(i)
But if M (x1, y1) be its middle point, its equation must be
also
T = S1
yy1 – 2a (x + x1) = y12 - 4ax1
Þ yy1 – 2ax = y12 – 2ax1 ...(ii)
As Equations (i) and (ii) are identical. Comparing them
If A is the vertex of the parabola. For combined equation of
1 t 2at + at 3
AQ and AR, Making homogenous of y2 = 4ax with the help = = 2
y1 - 2a y1 - 2ax1
of (i)

\ y2 = 4 ax . 1 From first two relations t = –

2a
...(iii)
y1

æ yk - 2ax ö From last two relations

\ y2 = 4ax ç 2 ÷
è k - 2ah ø
t 2at + at 3
= 2
Þ y2 (k2 – 2ah) – 4akxy + 8a2x2 = 0 - 2a y1 - 2ax1

Since ÐQAR = 90°.

y12 - 2ax1
Þ = 2a + at2
\ Co–efficient of x2 + Co–efficient of y2 = 0 - 2a

Þ k2 – 2ah + 8a2 = 0 2
y12 - 2ax1 æ - 2a ö
çç ÷÷ [from equation (iii)]
Hence the locus is P (h, k) is y2 – 2ax + 8a2 = 0. Þ = 2a + a
- 2a è y1 ø

y12 - 2ax1 2ay12 + 4a 3

Þ =
- 2a y12

Þ y 4 - 2a x - 2a y 2 + 8a 4 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 118

Example - 18
ELLIPSE
Find the locus of the point of intersection of the tangents
Example - 19
to the parabola y2 = 4ax which include an angle of 45°.

Find the equation of an ellipse whose focus is (–1, 1),

1
eccentricity is and the directrix is x – y + 3 = 0
2

Sol. Let P (x, y) be any point on the ellipse whose focus is

S (–1, 1) and the directrix is x – y + 3 = 0. Draw PM
Sol.
perpendicular from P (x, y) on the directrix x – y + 3 = 0.
Then by definition

P  (at12, 2 at1) and Q  (at22, 2at2). T  (x1, y1)

 x1 = a t1t2 ...(i) and y1 = a (t1 + t2) ... (ii)

m1  m 2
As PTQ = 45°, tan 45° =
1  m1m 2

1 1

t1 t 2 t t  1 1
=  2 1  As m1  and m2  
1 1  t1t 2  t1 t2 
1
t1 t 2

SP = ePM
 (t2 – t1)2 = (1 +t1 t2)2 
2 2
(SP) = e (PM)
2

 (t2 + t1)2 – 4 t1t2 = (1 + t1t2)2 ...(iii)

2
Replace values of t1 + t2 and t1 t2 from (i) and (ii) in (iii) to get 1  x  y  3
 (x  1) 2  (y  1)2   
4 2 
2
y12 x1  x 1  2 2 2 2
2
4  1    8 (x + y + 2x – 2y + 2)= x + y + 9 – 2xy + 6x – 6y
a a  a 
2 2
 7x + 7y + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0
 Required locus  y2 – 4ax = (x + a)2 which is the required equation of the ellipse.
CONIC SECTIONS 119

Example - 20
x2 y2
Sol. Let + =1(a>b)
If the angle between the straight lines joining foci and the a 2
b2
x2 y2
end of minor axis of the ellipse + = 1 is 90°, find its Given 2b=8 ...(i)
a2 b2
eccentricity. and 2ae=6 ...(ii)

x2 y2 b 4
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is + =1. By (i) and (ii) we have =
a2 b2 ae 3

The ends of minor axis are B (0, b) and B’ (0, –b). If the
eccentricity of the ellipse is e, then the foci are S (ae, 0) b2 16 2
Þ = e
and S’ (–ae, 0). a2 9

16 2
Þ 1- e2 = e (\ b2 = a2 (1-e 2) as a>b)
9

3
Þe=
5

Example - 22

A focus of an ellipse is at the origin. The directrix is the

line x = 4 and the eccentricity is 1/2. Then the length of the
b-0 b
\ Slope of BS is m1 = =- semi–major axis is
0 - ae ae
(a) 5/3 (b) 8/3
b-0 b
and Slop of BS’ is m2 = = (c) 2/3 (d) 4/3
0 + ae ae
Ans. (b)
\ The angle between BS and BS’ is 90°,
Sol. Obviously the major axis is along the x-axis
b b
\ m1m2 = – 1 Þ - ´ = -1 The distance between the focus and the corresponding
ae ae
Þ b 2 = a 2 e2 a
directrix = - ae =4
Þ a2 (1 – e2) = a2e2 Þ 1 – e2 = e2 e

1
Þ 2e2 = 1 \e = . a æ a ö
2 Þ - ae =4 ç note that > ae ÷
e è e ø

Example - 21
æ1 ö æ 1ö
In an ellipse, the distance between its focii is 6 and minor Þ a ç - e ÷ =4Þ a ç 2 - ÷ =4
èe ø è 2ø
axis is 8. Then its eccentricity is
(a) 3/5 (b) 1/2
3 8
Þ a. = 4 \a =
(c) 4/5 (d) 1/ 5 2 3

Ans. (a)
CONIC SECTIONS 120

Example - 23 i.e., (0, –6)

Find the lengths and equations of the focal radii drawn \ Equation of SP is
2 2
from the point (4 3, 5) on the ellipse 25x + 16y = 1600 6-5
y-5 = (x - 4 3)
Sol. The equation of the ellipse is 0-4 3
2 2
25x + 16y = 1600
-4 3y + 20 3 = x - 4 3
2 2
x y
or + =1
64 100 or x + 4 3 y - 24 3 = 0

and equation of S’ P is

-6 - 5
\ y-5 = (x - 4 3)
0-4 3

Þ -4 3y + 20 3 = -11x + 44 3

or 11x - 4 3y - 24 3 = 0

Example - 24

If P = (x, y), F1 = (3, 0), F2 = (–3, 0)

Here b > a
and 16x2 + 25y2 = 400, then PF1 + PF2 equals
2 2
a = 64, b = 100
(a) 8 (b) 6
2 2 2
a = b (1 – e )
(c) 10 (d) 12
2
\ 64 = 100 (1 – e )
Ans. (c)
Þ e = 3/5
Sol. Given, 16x2+25y2=400 [given]
Let P(x1 , y1 ) º (4 3,5)
x 2 y2
Þ + =1
be a point on the ellipse then SP and S’P are the focal radii 25 16
\ SP = b – ey1 and S’P = b + ey1
Here, a2=25,b2=16

3 3 But b2=a2(1-e2)
\ SP = 10 - ´ 5 and S¢P = 10 + ´ 5
5 5
16
Þ SP = 7 and S’P = 13 Þ16=25(1-e2)Þ =1-e2
25
Also S is (0, be)
16 9 3
æ 3ö Þe2=1- = Þe=
i.e., 25 25 5
ç 0,10 ´ ÷ i.e., (0,6)
è 5ø
Now, foci of the ellipse are (±ae,0)º(±3,0)
and S’ is (0, –be)
Now, PF1+PF2=Major axis=2a

æ 3ö = 2 × 5 = 10
i.e., ç 0, - 10 ´ ÷
è 5ø
CONIC SECTIONS 121

Example - 25 Example - 26

The eccentric angles of the extremities of latus rectum of

x 2 y2
x 2 y2 The line x = at2 meets the ellipse + = 1 in the real
the ellipse + = 1 is a 2 b2
a 2 b2
points if -
-1 æ ± ae ö æ ± be ö
(a) tan ç ÷ (b) tan -1 ç ÷ (a) | t | < 2 (b) | t | £ 1
è b ø è b ø
(c) | t | > 1 (d) None of these
-1 æ ± b ö -1 æ ± a ö
(c) tan ç ÷ (d) tan ç ÷ Ans. (b)
è ae ø è be ø
Sol. Solving these 2 equations simultaneously
Ans. (c)
b2t4 + y2 – b2 = 0 Þ y2 = b2 –b2 t4
Sol. Latus rectum is perpendicular to the major axis and passes
through the focus. For real ‘y’: b2 – b2 t4 ³ 0
X - co - ordinate of latus rectum = ae Þ t4 £1 Þ t2 £1 Þ | t | £ 1

x2 y2
Equation of ellipse: + =1 Example - 27
a 2 b2

Putting the value x = ae we get: For what value of l does the line y = x + l touches the

2
ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144.
ae y2
+ 2 =1 Sol. Equation of ellipse is 9x2 + 16y2 = 144
a2 b

y2 x 2 y2
Þ e2 + =1 Þ + =1
b2 16 9

y2
Þ = 1 - e2 x2 y2
b2 Comparing this with + =1
a2 b2

y 2 b2 b2
Þ 2
= 2 Þy=± then we get a2 = 16 and b 2 = 9 and comparing the line
b a a
y = x + l with y = mx + c

æ b2 ö æ b2 ö \ m = 1 and c = l
Extremities are ç ae, ÷ and ç ae, - ÷
è a ø è a ø
If the line y = x + l touches the ellipse

9x2 + 16y2 = 144, then

b2
b sin q = ± , a cos q = ae
a c2 = a2m2 + b2

Dividing, Þ l2 = 16 × 12 + 9

b Þ l2 = 25
tan q = ±
ae \ l=±5
CONIC SECTIONS 122

Example - 28 Example - 29

x2 y2 x2 y 2
A tangent to an ellipse + = 1 touches it at a point P If the normal at a point P(q) to the ellipse + =1
a2 b2 14 5
intersect it again at Q (2q). Show that cos q = – 2/3.
in the first quadrant and meets the axes in A and B
respectively. If P divides AB is 3 : 1, find the equation of Sol. The equation of normal at P(q) is :
tangent. ax by
Sol. Let the coordinates of the point P º (a cosq, b sinq)
- = a2 – b2
cos q sin q
Þ the equation of the tangent at P is : As Q º (a cos 2q, b sin 2q) lies on it, we can have :

x cos q y sin q a b
+ =1 ...(i) (a cos 2q) – (b sin 2q) = a2 – b2
a b cos q sin q

Þ The coordinates of the points A and B are : (2 cos 2 q - 1)

Þ a2 – 2b2 cosq = a2 – b2
cos q
æ a ö æ b ö
Aº ç ,0 ÷ and B º ç 0, ÷ Put a2 = 14, b2 = 5 in the above equation to get :
è cos q ø è sin q ø
14(2 cos2q – 1) – 10 cos2q = 9 cosq
Þ 18cos2q– 9cosq – 14 = 0
Þ (6 cos q – 7) (3 cos q + 2) = 0
Þ cosq = 7/6 (reject) or cosq = – 2/3
Hence cosq = – 2/3.
Example - 30

Prove that in general four normals can be drawn to an

ellipse from any point and the sum of the eccentric angles
of the feet of these normal is equal to an odd multiple of
two right angles.

ax by
Sol. Equation of Normal º - = a 2 – b2
cos q sin q

ah bk
As it passes through (h, k) º - = a2 – b 2
By section formula, the coordinates of P are cos q sin q

æ a 3b ö 1- t2 2t q
ç , ÷ º (a cos q, b sin q) Replace cosq = , sinq = , where t = tan
è 4 cos q 4 sin qø 1+ t 2
1+ t 2 2
Þ bk t4 + 2 (ah + a2 – b2) t3 + 2 (ah – a2 + b2) t – bk = 0
a 3b
Þ = a cos q and = b sin q æq ö
4 cos q 4 sin q It roots are tan ç r ÷ , r = 1, 2, 3, 4
è 2ø
1 3
Þ cos q = ± and sin q = ± æ q1 q 2 q 3 q 4 ö S1 - S3 p
2 2 tan ç + + + ÷=
1 - S + S = ¥ = tan
è 2 2 2 2 ø 2 4 2
Þ q = 60°
For equation of tangent, replace the value of q in (i) æ bk ö
ç as S2 = 0, S 4 = - = -1÷
è bk ø
x 3y
Þ The equation of tangent is : + = 2. q1 + q 2 + q 3 + q 4 p
a b \ = np +
2 2
Þ q1 + q2 + q3 + q4 = (2n+ 1)p
CONIC SECTIONS 123

Example - 31 Example - 32

Product of the perpendiculars from the foci upon any A stair-case of length l rests against a vertical wall and a
floor of a room. Let P be a point on the stair-case, nearer to
x 2 y2 its end on the wall, that divides its length in the ratio 1 : 2.
tangent to the ellipse + = 1 is
a 2 b2 If the stair-case begins to slide on the floor, then the locus
of P is:
(a) b (b) a
1
(a) an ellipse of accentricity
(c) a2 (d) b2 2

Ans. (d)
3
(b) an ellipse of eccentricity
Sol. We can assume an arbitrary tangent to this ellipse to be 2

y = mx + a 2 m 2 + b 2 ... (1) l
(c) a circle of radius
2
The perpendicular distances of the two foci, F 1(ae, 0) and
3
F2(–ae, 0) from the line given by (1) are (d) a circle of radius l
2

Ans. (b)
mae + a 2 m 2 + b2
d1 = Sol. Let b be the height and a be the length intercepted by the
1 + m2
staircase. By section formula, we can write the coordinates
of P as:

-mae + a 2 m 2 + b 2 æ a 2b ö
d2 = ç , ÷
1+ m 2 è3 3 ø

Now, the length of the staircase is constant

We thus have, Hence, a2+b2=l2
Let P be (x,y)
a 2 m 2 + b 2 - a 2 m2 e2
d1d 2 =
1 + m2 æ 3y ö
2
é 3y ù
Hence, (3x) + ç ÷ =l2
2
êQ a = 3x and b = 2 ú
è 2 ø ë û

a 2 m2 1 - e 2 + b2
= x2 y2
1+ m 2 +
Þ l2 4l 2 =1
9 9

m2b 2 + b 2 This represents the equation of an ellipse,

=
1 + m2
1
1-e2=
4
= b2

3
Hence, e=
2
CONIC SECTIONS 124

Example - 33 Example - 34

Show that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular drawn Find the locus of a point from which the two tangents to
the ellipse are inclined at an angle a.
x2 y2 Sol. Equation of tangent of slope m is
from the centre of the ellipse + = 1 on any tangent
a2 b2
º y = mx + a 2m 2 + b2 ...(i)
is(x2 + y2)2 = a2 x2 + b2 y2.

Sol.

Point P º (x1, y1) lies on (i)

Þ y1 = mx1 + a 2m 2 + b2

Let the tangent be y = mx + a 2m 2 + b2 . Þ m2 ( x12 - a 2 ) – 2x1y1 m + ( y12 - b 2 ) = 0

Draw CM perpendicular to tangent and let M º (x1, y1). Let roots be m1 and m2

M lies on tangent, 2 x 1 y1
Þ m1 + m2 =
x 12 - a 2
Þ y1 = mx1 + 2
a m +b2 2 ...(i)

Slope (CM) = – 1/m y12 - b 2

and m1 m2 =
x 12 - a 2
y1 1 x1
Þ =- Þ m=– y ...(ii)
x1 m 1 m1 - m 2
tan a =
1 + m1 m 2
Replace the value of m from (ii) into (i) and take square to
get : Þ tan2 a (1 + m1 m2)2 = (m1 + m2)2 –4 m1 m2 ...(ii)
Using (ii),
(x12 + y12 ) 2 = a 2 x12 + b 2 y12
2
æ y12 - b 2 ö 4 x 12 y12 y12 - b 2
Hence the required locus is : tan2 a çç1 + 2 ÷ = ( x 2 - a 2 ) 2 – 4 x 12 - a 2
2 ÷
è x1 - a ø 1
(x2 + y2)2 = a2 x2 + b2 y2.
Þ Locus is tan2 a (x2 + y2 – a2 – b2)2 = 4 [x2b2 + a2y2 – a2b2]
CONIC SECTIONS 125

Example - 35 Example - 37

A tangent to the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4 meets the ellipse Obtain the equation of a hyperbola with co-ordinate axes
x2 + 2y2 = 6 at P and Q. Prove that the tangents at P and Q
of the ellipse x2 + 2y2 = 6 are at right angles. as principal axes given that the distances of one of its

Sol. Chord of contact of vertices from the focii are 9 and 1 units.

Sol. Let equation of hyperbola is

x 2 y2 hx ky
+ = 1 is + =1 ...(i)
6 3 6 3
x 2 y2
Equation of any tangent to - =1 ... (1)
a 2 b2

x 2 y2 x
+ = 1 is cos q + y sin q = 1. ...(ii) If vertices are A (a, 0) and A’ (–a, 0) and foci are S (ae, 0)
4 1 2
and S’ (–ae, 0)
Compare (i) and (ii), eliminate q and get locus of (h, k)
i.e. x2 + y2 = 9 (i.e. a2 + b2) Given l (S’A) = 9 and l (SA) = 1
i.e. director circle of 2nd ellipse. Þ a + ae = 9 and ae – a = 1

HYPERBOLA or a (1 + e) = 9 and a (e – 1) = 1

Example - 36 a(1 + e) 9
\ =
a(e - 1) 1
Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum
is half of its transverse axis.
Sol. Let the equation of hyperbola be 5
Þ 1 + e = 9e - 9 Þ e =
4
x 2 y2
- =1
a 2 b2 Q a (1 + e) = 9

2b 2
Then transverse axis = 2a and latus-rectum = æ 5ö
a \ a ç1 + ÷ = 9
è 4ø
2b 2 1
According to question = (2a)
a 2 Þ a=4
2 2
Þ 2b = a
2 2 2
Þ 2a (e – 1) = a æ 25 ö
b 2 = a 2 (e 2 - 1) = 16 ç - 1÷
Þ
2
2e – 2 = 1 è 16 ø

3 2
Þ e2 = \ b =9
2
From (1) equation of hyperbola is
3
\ e=
2 x 2 y2
- =1
16 9
3
Hence the required eccentricity is .
2
CONIC SECTIONS 126

Example - 38 Foci : The co–ordinates of foci are (0, ± be)

\ X = 0, Y = ± be
Show that the equation 7y2 – 9x2 + 54x – 28y – 116 = 0 represents
a hyperbola. Find the co–ordinates of the centre, length 4
of transverse and conjugate axes, eccentricity, latus rectum, Þ x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = ± 3 × .
3
co–ordinates of foci and vertices, equations of the
directrices of the hyperbola.
Þ 3, 6 and 3, –2
Sol. We have 7y2 – 9x2 + 54x – 28y – 116 = 0
Vertices : The co–ordinates of vertices are (0, ± b).
Þ 7 (y2 – 4y) – 9 (x2 – 6x) – 116 = 0
Þ X = 0, Y = ± b
Þ 7 (y2 – 4y + 4) – 9 (x2 – 6x + 9) = 116 + 28 – 81
Þ x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = ± 3
Þ 7 (y – 2)2 – 9 (x – 3)2 = 63
Þ (3, 2 ± 3)
2 2
( y - 2) ( x - 3) Þ vertices are (3, 5) and (3, –1)
Þ - =1
9 7 Equation of directrices :
The equation of directrices are
Y2 X2
Þ - = 1 [where X = x – 3 and Y = y – 2]
9 7 3
Y=±
4/3
This equation represents conjugate hyperbola. Comparing
it with
9
Þ y–2=
4
Y2 X2 2 2
2
- 2
= 1 we get b = 9 and a = 7
b a
9
Þ y = 2±
4
\ b = 3 and a = 7.

Centre : X = 0, Y = 0. 1 17
Þ y =– ,y =
i.e., x – 3 = 0, y – 2 = 0 \ Centre is (3, 2) 4 4

Length of transverse axis :

Example - 39
Length of transverse axis = 2b = 6.
Length of conjugate axis : If 5x2 + ly2 = 20 represents a rectangular hyperbola, then l=
(a) 5 (b) – 5
Length of conjugate axis = 2a = 2 7 .
(c) 4 (d) –4
Eccentricity : The eccentricity e is given by
Ans. (b)

a2 7 4 Sol. For a rectangular hyperbola, equation is of the type

e = 1+ = 1+ =
b2 9 3 x2 – y2 = a2
So, 5x2 + ly2 = 20
Length of latus rectum :

l y2
2a 2 Þ x2 + =4
The length of latus rectum = . 5
b

2(7 ) 14 l
= . Þ = -1
= 5
3 3
Þl=–5
CONIC SECTIONS 127

Example - 40 Example - 42

For what value of c does the line y = 2x + c touches the Find the locus of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from
hyperbola 16x2 – 9y2 = 144 ?
x2 y2
Sol. Equation of hyperbola is focus S of hyperbola - = 1 to any tangent.
a2 b2
x 2 y2
16x2 – 9y2 = 144 Þ - =1 Sol. Let the tangent be y = mx + a 2m 2 - b2 .
9 16
Let M (x1, y1) be the foot of perpendicular SM drawn to the
x2 y2 tangent from focus S (ae, 0).
comparing this with - = 1 , we get a2 = 9, b2 = 16.
a2 b2 Slope (SM) × Slope (PM) = – 1
and comparing this line y = 2x + c with y = mx + c.
æ y1 - 0 ö
\ m = 2 and c Þ ç ÷
ç x - ae ÷ m = – 1 Þ x1 + my1 = ae ...(i)
è 1 ø
If the line y = 2x + c touches the hyperbola
16x2 – 9y2 = 144 then c2 = a2m2 – b2 As M lies on tangent, we also have

Þ c2 = 9 (2)2 – 16 = 36 – 16 = 20 y1 = mx1 + a 2m 2 - b2
\ c = ± 2 5.
Þ – mx1 + y1 = a 2m2 - b2 ...(ii)
Example - 41
We can now eliminate m from (i) and (ii).
The locus of a point P(a, b) moving under the condition Substituting value of m from (i) in (ii) leads to a lot of
that the line y = ax + b is a tangent to the hyperbola simplification and hence we avoid this step.
By squaring and adding (i) and (ii), we get :
x2 y2
- = 1 is
a2 b2 x12 (1 + m 2 ) + y12 (1 + m 2 ) = a 2 e 2 + a 2 m 2 - b 2
(a) a circle (b) an ellispe
( x12 + y12 )(1 + m 2 ) = a 2 (1 + m 2 )
(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola
Ans. (c) Þ x12 + y12 = a 2

x2 y2 Þ Required Locus is : x2 + y2 = a2.

Sol. Given y = ax + b and - =1
a2 b2 Note : M lies on the auxiliary circle.

using condition of tangency,

c2 = a2m2–b2

Þ b 2 = a 2a 2 - b2

Þ a 2a 2 - b 2 = b2
Þa2 x2 - y2 = b2. (Hyperbola)
CONIC SECTIONS 128

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

2nd DEGREE EQUATION AS A CONIC 10. Coordinates of the focus of the parabola
x2 – 4x – 8y – 4 = 0 are
1. The name of the conic represented by the equation
(a) (0, 2) (b) (2, 1)
x2 + y2 – 2xy + 20x + 10 = 0 is
(c) (1, 2) (d) (–2, –1)
(a) a hyperbola (b) an ellipse
11. The length of the latus-rectum of the parabola
(c) a parabola (d) circle
x = ay2 + by + c is
2. The equation lx2 + 4xy + y2 + lx + 3y + 2 = 0 represents a
parabola, if l is a a
(a) (b)
3. The name of the curve described parametrically by the 4 3
equations x = t2 + t + 1, y = t2 – t + 1 is 1 1
(c) (d)
(a) a circle (b) an ellipse a 4a
(c) a hyperbola (d) a parabola 12. Vertex, focus, latus rectum, length of the latus rectum and
equation of directrix of the parabola y2 = 4x + 4y are
PARABOLA
(a) (1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 4, x = –2
4. The equation of the parabola whose focus is (–1, 1) and (b) (–1, 2), (0, 2), x = 0, 4, x = –2
directrix is 4x + 3y – 24 = 0 is (c) (–1, 2), (1, 2), x = 0, 4, x = 2
(a) 9x2 + 16y2 – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0 (d) (–1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 2, y = –2
13. Given the two ends of the latus rectum, the maximum
(b) 16x2 + 9y2 – 24xy + 242x + 94y – 526 = 0
number of parabolas that can be drawn, is
(c) 2x2 – 23y2 + 7xy + 32x + 17y + 40 = 0
14. If the vertex = (2, 0) and the extremities of the latus rectum
(d) none of these are (3, 2) and (3, –2), then the equation of the parabola is
5. If the parabola y2 = 4ax passes through the point (–3, 2), (a) y2 = 2x – 4 (b) x2 = 2y – 8
k (c) y2 = 4x – 8 (d) none of these
and the length of its latus rectum is . Then the value of
3 15. The focus of the parabola is (1, 1) and the tangent at the
k is vertex has the equation x + y = 1. Then which of the
following is incorrect
6. The equation of the directrix of the parabola y2 = 12 x is –
(a) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 2 (x + y – 1)
(a) x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3 = 0
(b) equation of the parabola is (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 1)
(c) x – 3 = 0 (d) y – 3 = 0
7. The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola æ1 1ö
(c) the co-ordinates of the vertex are ç , ÷
x2 = –12y is– è2 2ø
(a) y = 3 (b) x = 3
(c) y = –3 (d) x = –3 (d) length of the latus rectum is 2 2

8. A double ordinate of the parabola y2 = 8px is of length 16p. If 16. If focus of a parabola is (2, 0) and one extremity of latus
rectum is (2, 2), then its equation is
the angle subtended by it at the vertex of the parabola is
(a) y2 = 4 (3 – x) (b) y2 = 4x – 4
p
, then the value of k is (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
k
17. Equation of parabola which has its axis along x-axis and
9. The coordinates of an end-point of the latus-rectum of the which passes through the points (3, 2) and (–2, –1) is
parabola (y–1)2 = 4(x+1) are (a) 5y2 = 3x + 11 (b) y2 = 3x – 1
(a) (0, –3) (b) (0, –1) (c) y2 = x + 3 (d) none of these
(c) (0, 1) (d) (1, 3)
CONIC SECTIONS 129

18. The equation of the parabola whose axis is parallel to 28. The length of the chord of the parabola x2 = 4ay passing
y-axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9) through the vertex and having slope tan a, is
and (–2, 6) is given by
(a) 4a cosec a cot a (b) 4a tan a sec a
(a) 2y2 + 3y – x + 4 = 0 (b) 3x2 + 2x + y – 4 = 0
(c) 4a cos a cot a (d) 4a sin a tan a
(c) 2x2 + 3x – y + 4 = 0 (d) none of the above
29. If a ¹ 0 and the line 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 passess through the
19. The equation of the parabola having its axis parallel to points of intersection of the parabolas y2 = 4ax and
x-axis and which passes through the points (1, 2), (–1,3)
x2 = 4ay, then
and (–2, 1) is
(a) d2 + (2b – 3c)2 = 0 (b) d2 + (3b – 2c)2 = 0
(a) 5y2 + 2x – 21y + 20 = 0 (b) 5y2 – 2x – 21y + 20 = 0
(c) 5x2 – 2x – 21y – 20 = 0 (d) none of the above (c) d2 + (2b + 3c)2 = 0 (d) d2 + (3b – 2c)2 = 0

20. The parametric equation of the curve (y – 2)2 = 12 (x – 4) 30. If the line 2x –3y = k touches the parabola y2 = 6x, then the
are– value of k is
(a) 6t, 3t2 (b) 2 + 3t, 4 + t2 (a) 27/4 (b) –81/4
(c) 4 + 3t2, 2 + 6t (d) None of these (c) –7 (d) –27/4
21. The point on y2 = 4ax nearest to the focus has its abscissa 31. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 16x, which is perpendicular
equal to
to a line y – 3x – 1 = 0 is
22. The parametric equation of a parabola is x = t 2 + 1,
(a) 3y + x + 36 = 0 (b) 3y – x – 36 = 0
y = 2t + 1. The Cartesian equation of its directrix is
(a) x = 0 (b) x + 1 = 0 (c) x + y – 36 = 0 (d) x – y + 36 = 0

(c) y = 0 (d) none of these 1ö

2 æ
32. If y = 2x –3 is a tangent to the parabola y = 4a ç x - ÷ ,
23. Any point on the parabola whose focus is (0, 1) and the è 3ø
directrix is x + 2 = 0 is given by
(a) (t2 + 1, 2t–1) (b) (t2 + 1, 2t + 1) k
and a is equal to - , then the value of k is
2
(c) (t , 2t) 2
(d) (t – 1, 2t + 1) 3
24. The equation of a parabola is y2 = 4x,P (1, 3) and Q (1, 1) are 33. The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax
two points in the xy-plane. Then, for the parabola
at point (a/t2, 2a/t) is
(a) P and Q are exterior points
(a) ty = xt2 + a (b) ty = x + at2
(b) P is an interior point while Q is an exterior point
(c) y = tx + at2 (d) y = tx + (a/t2)
(c) P and Q are interior points
34. If P (t2, 2t) t Î [0, 2] is an arbitrary point on parabola
(d) P is an exterior point while Q is an interior point
y2 = 4x. Q is foot of perpendicular from focus S on the
25. The point (a, 2a) is an interior point of the region bounded
tangent at P, then maximum area of DPQS is
by the parabola y2 = 16x and the double ordinate through
the focus. Then, a belongs to the open interval 35. The angle between the tangents drawn to the parabola
(a) a < 4 (b) 0 < a < 4 y2 = 12x from the point (–3, 2) in degrees is
(c) 0 < a < 2 (d) a > 4 36. The angle between the tangents drawn from the point
26. The length of a focal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax at a (1, 4) to the parabola y2 = 4x in degree is
distance b from the vertex is c. Then, 37. If two tangents drawn from the point (a, b) to the parabola
(a) 2a2 = bc (b) a3 = b2c y2 = 4x be such that the slope of one tangent is double of
(c) ac = b2 (d) b2c = 4a3 the other then
27. If the latus rectum of a parabola whose focal chord is PSQ
2 2 2
k (a) b = a (b) a = b2
such that SP = 3 and SQ = 2 is given by . Then the value 9 9
5
of k is (c) 2a = 9b2 (d) none of these
CONIC SECTIONS 130

38. The equations of common tangents to y 2 = 4ax and 44. The locus of the vertex of the family of parabolas
2 2 2
(x + a) + y = a are
a 3x 2 a 2 x
y= + – 2a is
æ a ö 3 2
æ x ö
(a) y = ç +a÷ (b) y = ± ç 3x + ÷
è 3 ø è 3ø
105 3
(a) xy = (b) xy =
64 4
æ x ö
(c) y = ± ç + 3 a÷ (d) none of these 35 64
è 3 ø (c) xy = (d) xy =
16 105
39. Two common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2a2 and 45. Let P be the point (1, 0) and Q a point on the locus
parabola y2 = 8ax are y2 = 8x. The locus of mid point of PQ is
(a) x = ± (y + 2a) (b) y = ± (x + 2a) (a) x2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (b) x2 + 4y + 2 = 0
(c) x = ± (y + a) (d) y = ± (x + a) (c) y2 + 4x + 2 = 0 (d) y2 – 4x + 2 = 0

40. The slope of the line touching both the parabolas y2 = 4x ELLIPSE
and x2 = –32y is :
46. The equation to the ellipse, whose focus is the point
2 1 (–1, 1), whose directrix is the straight line x – y + 3 = 0, and
(a) (b)
3 2 1
whose eccentricity is is
2
3 1 (a) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0
(c) (d)
2 8 (b) x2 + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
(c) 3x2 + xy + 10x – 10y + 3 = 0
41. The normal at the point ( bt12 , 2bt1) on a parabola meets (d) None of these

the parabola again in the point (bt 22 , 2bt 2 ), then x2 y2

47. The equation + = 1 represents an ellipse, if
10 - a 4 - a
2 2 (a) a < 4 (b) a > 4
(a) t2 = – t1 + (b) t2 = t1 –
t1 t1 (c) 4 < a < 10 (d) a > 10
48. A line of fixed length a + b moves so that its ends are
2 2 always on two fixed perpendicular straight lines; then
(c) t2 = t1 + (d) t2 = – t1 – the locus of a point, which divides this line into
t1 t1
portions of length a and b, is a/an
42. If the normals from any point to the parabola x2 = 4y cuts (a) ellipse (b) parabola
the line y = 2 in points whose abscissae are in A.P., then (c) straight line (d) none of these
the slopes of the tangents at the three conormal points are 49. The curve represented by x = 2 (cos t + sin t),
in y = 5 (cos t – sin t) is
(a) A.P. (b) G.P. (a) a circle (b) a parabola
(c) H.P. (d) none of these (c) an ellipse (d) a hyperbola

43. If the chord of contact of tangents from a point P to the 50. If the centre of the ellipse 8x2 + 6y2 – 16x + 12y + 13 = 0 is
(a, b), then 2a + b equals
parabola y2 = 4ax touches the parabola x2 = 4by, the
51. The equation of the latus rectum of the ellipse
locus of P is :
9x2 + 4y2 –18x – 8y – 23 = 0 are
(a) circle (b) parabola
(c) ellipse (d) hyperbola (a) y = ± 5 (b) y = - 5

(c) y = 1 ± 5 (d) x = -1 ± 5
CONIC SECTIONS 131

52. An ellipse has its centre at (1, –1) and semi major axis equal 60. If P is a moving point in the xy–plane in such a way that
to 8. If this ellipse passes through the point (1, 3), its perimeter of triangle PQR is 16
eccentricity is equal to
{where Q º (3, 5 ), R º (7, 3 5 )} then maximum area
(a) 1/ 2 (b) 1/2 of triangle PQR is
(a) 6 sq. unit (b) 12 sq. unit
(c) 3/2 (d) none of these
(c) 18 sq. unit (d) 9 sq. unit
53. The equation of the ellipse which passes through origin
and has its foci at the points (1, 0) and (3, 0) is - x 2 y2
61. Parametric equation of the ellipse + = 1 is
(a) 3x2 + 4y2 = x (b) 3x2 + y2 = 12x 16 9
(c) x2 + 4y2 = 12x (d) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12x (a) x = 4 cos q, y = 3 sin q
54. If the latus rectum of an ellipse is half of its minor axis, its (b) x = 3 cos q, y = 3 sin q
eccentricity is (c) x = 4 cos q, y = 4 sin q
(a) 3/4 (b) 1/4 (d) x = 3 cos q, y = 4 sin q
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2 62. The parametric representation of a point on the ellipse

55. The length of the latus rectum of an ellipse is one third of 1

whose foci are (–1,0) and (7, 0) and eccentricity is
the major axis, its eccentricity would be 2

(a) 2/3 (b) (2 / 3) (a) (3 + 8cos q, 4 3 sin q) (b) (8cos q, 4 3 sin q)

(c) 1/ 3 (d) 1/ 2 (c) (3 + 4 3 cos q, 8sin q) (d) none of these

x2 y 2 x 2 y2
56. S and T are the foci of the ellipse + = 1 and B is 63. The equation of auxiliary circle of the ellipse + =1
a 2 b2 9 16
an end of the minor axis. If STB is an equilateral triangle, is
1 (a) x2 + y2 = 9 (b) x2 + y2 = 16
and the eccentricity of the ellipse is . Then the value
k (c) x2 + y2 = 25 (d) none of these
of k is
x2 y2
57. Equation of the ellipse whose foci are (4, 0) and (–4, 0) and 64. Let E be the ellipse + = 1 and C be the circle
9 4
e = 1/3 is
x2 + y2 = 9. Let P and Q be the points (1, 2) and (2, 1)
(a) x2 /9 + y2/8 = 16 (b) x2/8 + y2/9 = 16 respectively. Then
(c) x2/9 + y2/8 = 32 (d) none of these (a) Q lies inside C but outside E
58. The eccentricity of an ellipse, with its centre at the origin, (b) Q lies outside both C and E
is 1/2. If one of the directrices is x = 4, then the equation of (c) P lies inside both C and E
the ellipse is (d) P lies inside C but outside E
(a) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (b) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 65. The number of real tangents that can be drawn to the
(c) x2 + y2 = 1 (d) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1 ellipse 3x 2 + 5y2 = 32 passing through (3, 5) is
59. Equation of ellipse whose minor axis is equal to the distance
x2 y2
between the foci and whose latus rectum is 10, is given by 66. The ellipse + = 1 and the straight line y = mx + c
a 2 b2
(take origin as centre and major axis along x-axis)
intersect in real points only, if
(a) 2x2 + y2 = 100 (b) x2 + 2y2 = 100
(a) a 2m2 < c2 – b 2 (b) a 2m2 > c 2 + b 2
(c) 2x2 + y2 = 50 (d) none of these (c) a 2m2 ³ c2 – b 2 (d) c ³ b
CONIC SECTIONS 132

72. The minimum area of a triangle formed by any tangent to

2
x2 y2
67. The line y = 2t intersects the ellipse + = 1 in real
9 4 x 2 y2
the ellipse + = 1 and the co-ordinate axes is:
points, if 16 81

(a) | t | £ 1 (b) | t | < 2 (a) 12 (b) 18

(c) | t | > 1 (d) | t | ³ 1 (c) 26 (d) 36
68. The number of values of c such that the straight line 73. If the angle between pair of tangents drawn to the ellipse

x2 æ k ö
y = 4x + c touches the curve + y 2 = 1 is 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1, 2) is tan -1 ç ÷ . Then k
4 è 5ø
(a) 0 (b) 1 equals
(c) 2 (d) infinite 74. A circle of radius r is concentric with an ellipse
69. The equation of the tangents to the ellipse 4x2 + 3y2 = 5
x 2 y2
which are parallel to the line y = 3x + 7 are + = 1. If common tangent is inclined to the
a 2 b2
155 155 2
(a) y = 3x ± (b) y = 3x ± major axis at an angle of q , then tan q equals-
3 12
r 2 - b2 r 2 - b2
(a) (b)
95 a 2 - b2 a2 - r2
(c) y = 3x ± (d) none of these
12
r 2 - b2 r2 - a2
(c) (d)
x 2 y2 r2 - a2 b2 - r 2
70. Equation of tangents to the ellipse + = 1, which are
9 4
perpendicular to the line 3x + 4y = 7, are x2 y 2
75. Any ordinate MP of an ellipse + = 1 meets the
25 9
(a) 4x - 3y = ± 6 5 (b) 4x - 3y = ± 12
auxiliary circle in Q, then locus of point of intersection of
normals at P and Q to the respective curves, is
(c) 4x - 3y = ± 2 (d) 4x – 3y = ± 1
(a) x2 + y2 = 8 (b) x2 + y2 = 34
x2 y2 (c) x2 + y2 = 64 (d) x2 + y2 = 15
71. The points on the ellipse + = 1 , such that the
a 2 b2 76. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the
tange nt at that point makes eq ual angles with centre of the ellipse x2 + 3y2 = 6 on any tangent to it is :
coordinate axes is (a) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (b) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2
(c) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2 (d) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2
é a2 b2 ù
(a) ê ± 2 2
,±
2 2
ú
HYPERBOLA
ë a +b a +b û

77. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is

é b2 a2 ù
(b) ê ± , ± ú
a2 + b2 a 2 + b2 û 2x + y = 1, focus (1, 2) and eccentricity 3.
ë
(a) 7x2 – 2y2 + 12xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0
é 1 1 ù (b) 7x2 – 2y2 + 2xy – 2x + 14y – 22 = 0
(c) ê ± 2 2
,±
2 2
ú
ë a +b a +b û (c) 7x2 – 2y2 + xy – 14x + 2y – 22 = 0

(d) None of these (d) none of the above

CONIC SECTIONS 133

78. If latus rectum of the hyperbola is half of its transverse 85. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines
axis, then its eccentricity is
3x - y - 4 3k = 0 and 3kx + ky - 4 3 = 0 for
(a) 3/2 (b) 3/2
different values of k is-
(c) (3/ 2) (d) none of these (a) Ellipse (b) Parabola

(c) Circle (d) Hyperbola

x2 y2
79. If the foci of the elipse + = 1 and the hyperbola
25 b 2
x 2 y2
86. The two conics bx2 = y and - = 1 intersect iff -
x2 y2 1 a 2 b2
- = coincide, then the value of b2 is
144 81 25
1 1 1
80. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis (a) - £a£ (b) a < -
2 2 2
2
is equal to half the distance between the foci, is . Then
k 1
the value of k is (c) a > (d) a < b
2

x 2 y2 87. The eccentricity of the conjugate hyperbola of the

81. If hyperbola - = 1 passes through the focus of
b2 a 2 hyperbola x2 – 3y2 = 1 is

x 2 y2 2
ellipse + = 1 then eccentricity of hyperbola is -
a 2 b2 (a) 2 (b)
3

2
(a) 2 (b) 4
3 (c) 4 (d)
3
(c) 3 (d) None of these.
88. If e 1 and e 2 are the eccentricities of a hyperbola
82. One of the focus of the hyperbola
3x2 – 3y2 = 25 and its conjugate, then e12 + e22 equals
3(y – 1) 2 – 4 ( x – 2)2 = 12 is
89. If e and e1 are the eccentricities of the hyperbolas xy = c2
(a) (0, 7) (b) (2, 1 + 7)
and x2 – y2 = a2, then (e + e1)2 is equal to
(c) (0, 1 - 7) (d) (0, - 7) 90. If the equation of the hyperbola with eccentricity 3/2 and
83. The eccentricity of the conic represented by x2 y2 1
2 2
foci at (± 2, 0) is - = . Then the value of k is
x – y – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0 is 16 20 k
(a) 1 (b) 2 91. The foci of a hyperbola coincide with the foci of the ellipse
(c) 2 (d) 1/2 x2/25 + y2/9 = 1. If eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then its
2 2
84. The equation 16x – 3y – 32x + 12y – 44 = 0 represents equation is :
a hyperbola
(a) x2 – 3y2 – 12 = 0 (b) 3x2 – y2 – 12 = 0
(a) the length of whose transverse axis is 4 3 (c) x2 – y2 – 4 = 0 (d) none of these
(b) the length of whose conjugate axis is 4 92. The position of point (5, –4) relative to hyperbola
(c) whose centre is (–1, 2) 9x2 – y2 = 1 is
(a) inside the hyperbola (b) outside the hyperbola
19
(d) whose eccentricity is (c) on the hyperbola (d) none of the above
3
CONIC SECTIONS 134

93. The value of m for which y = mx + 6 is a tangent to the 97. Equation of a common tangents to the curves y2 = 8x and
xy = -1 is
x 2 y2
hyperbola - = 1 is (a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1
100 49
(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2

(a) 17 (b) 20 98. Let P (3sec q, 2 tan q) and Q 3sec f, 2 tan f where
20 17
p
q+f = , be two distinct point on the hyperbola
3 20 2
(c) (d)
20 3
x 2 y2
- = 1. Then the ordinate of the point of intersection
94. The equations of the tangents to the hyperbola 9 4
x 2 – 4y 2 = 36 which are perpendicular to the line
of the normals at P and Q is:
x – y + 4 = 0 are
11 11
(a) y = - x ± 3 3 (b) y = –x ± 2 (a) (b) -
3 3
(c) y = -x ± 5 (d) none of these
13 13
(c) (d) -
95. The tangent at an extremity (in the first quadrant) of latus 2 2

x 2 y2 99. If x = 9 is the chord of contact of the hyperbola

rectum of the hyperbola - = 1, meets x-axis and y- x2 – y2 = 9, then the equation of the corresponding pair of
4 5
tangents is
axis at A and B respectively. Then (OA)2–(OB)2, where O
is the origin, equals : (a) 9x2 – 8y2 + 18x – 9 = 0 (b) 9x2 – 8y2 – 18x + 9 = 0
(c) 9x2 – 8y2 – 18x – 9 = 0 (d) 9x2 – 8y2 + 18x + 9 = 0
20 16
(a) - (b) 100. A ray emanating from the point ( - 41, 0) is incident on
9 9
the hyperbola 16x2 – 25y2 = 400 at the point P with abscissa
4 –10. Then the equation of the reflected ray after first
(c) 4 (d) -
3 reflection at point P that lies in second quadrant is
96. If m1 and m2 are the gradients of tangents to hyperbola (a) 4 3 x - (10 - 41) y + 4 123 = 0
2 2
x y
- = 1 which passes through (6, 2) and m1 + m2 equals (b) 4 3 x + (10 + 41) y - 4 123 = 0
25 16

k (c) 4 3 x + (10 - 41) y + 4 123 = 0

. Then the value of k is
11
(d) 4 3 x - (10 - 41) y - 4 123 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 135

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. Let O be the vertex and Q be any point on the parabola, 6. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose length of the latus
x2 = 8y. If the point P divides the line segment OQ rectum is equal to 8 and the length of its conjugate axis is
internally in the ratio 1 : 3, then the locus of P is: (2015)
equal to half of the distance between its foci, is :
(a) y2 = 2x (b) x2 = 2y
(2016)
(c) x2 = y (d) y2 = x
2. The area (in sq. units) of the quadrilateral formed by the 4 2
tangents at the end points of the latus rectum to the ellipse (a) (b)
3 3
x2 y 2
+ = 1, is: (2015)
9 5 4
(c) 3 (d)
3
27
(a) (b) 27
2 7. Let a and b respectively be the semi-transverse and
semi-conjugate axes of a hyperbola whose eccentricity
27
(c) (d) 18 satisfies the equation 9e2 –18e + 5 = 0. If S(5, 0) is a focus
4
and 5x = 9 is the corresponding directrix of this hyperbola,
3. If the tangent to the conic, y – 6 = x2 at (2, 10) touches the then a2 – b2 is equal to : (2016/Online Set–1)
circle, x2 + y2 +8x –2y= k (for some fixed k) at a point (a, b);
then (a, b) is : (2015/Online Set–1) (a) 7 (b) –7
(c) 5 (d) –5
æ 7 6ö æ 6 10 ö
(a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç - , ÷ 8. A hyperbola whose transverse axis is along the major axis of
è 17 17 ø è 17 17 ø
x2 y2
æ 4 1ö æ 8 2ö the conic, + = 4 and has vertices at the foci of this
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) ç - , ÷ 3 4
è 17 17 ø è 17 17 ø
3
4. Let PQ be a double ordinate of the parabola, y 2 = - 4x , conic. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola is , then which
2
where P lies in the second quadrant, if R divides PQ in the
ratio 2 : 1 then the locus of R is: (2015/Online Set–2) of the following points does NOT lie on it?
(2016/Online Set–2)
(a) 3y 2 = - 2x (b) 3y2 = 2x
(a) (0, 2) (b) ( 5, 2 2)
(c) 9y2 = 4x (d) 9y 2 = - 4x

5. Let P be the point on the parabola, y2 = 8x which is at a (c) ( 10, 2 3) (d) (5, 2 3)
minimum distance from the centre C of the circle,
2 9. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose centre is at the origin
x2 + y + 6 = 1 . Then the equation of the circle, passing
through C and having its centre at P is : (2016) 1
is . If one of its directrices is x = –4, then the equation
2
(a) x 2 + y 2 - x + 4 y - 12 = 0

x æ 3ö
(b) x 2 + y 2 - + 2 y - 24 = 0 of the normal to it at ç1, ÷ is: (2017)
4 è 2ø

(c) x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 9 y + 18 = 0 (a) 2y – x = 2 (b) 4x – 2y = 1

(d) x 2 + y 2 - 4 x + 8 y + 12 = 0 (c) 4x + 2y = 7 (d) x + 2y = 4

CONIC SECTIONS 136

15. If y = mx + c is the normal at a point on the parabola

10. A hyperbola passes through the point P( 2, 3) and
y2 = 8x whose focal distance is 8 units, then |c| is equal to:
has foci at (±2, 0). Then the tangent to this hyperbola at P
also passes through the point: (2017) (2017/Online Set–2)

(a) 2 3 (b) 8 3

(a) 3 2, 2 3  
(b) 2 2,3 3 
(c) 10 3 (d) 16 3
(c)  3, 2  
(d)  2,  3  16. If the tangent at (1, 7) to the curve x 2  y  6 touches
11. The locus of the point of intersection of the straight lines,
the circle x 2  y2  16x  12y  c  0 then the value of c
tx – 2y – 3t = 0
is : (2018)
x – 2ty + 3 = 0 (t  R) , is : (2017/Online Set–1) (a) 95 (b) 195
(c) 185 (d) 85
2
(a) an ellipse with eccentricity 17. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola 4x 2  y2  36 at
5
the points P and Q. If these tangents intersect at the point
(b) an ellipse with the length of major axis 6
T (0, 3) then the area (in sq. units) of PTQ is : (2018)
(c) a hyperbola with eccentricity 5
(a) 36 5 (b) 45 5
(d) a hyperbola with the length of conjugate axis 3
(c) 54 3 (d) 60 3
12. If the common tangents to the parabola x2 = 4y and the
circle, x2 + y2 = 4 intersect at the point P, then the distance 18. Tangent and normal are drawn at P (16, 16) on the parabola
of P from the origin, is : (2017/Online Set–1) y2 = 16x, which intersect the axis of the parabola at A and
B, respectively. If C is the centre of the circle through the
(a) 2 1 
(b) 2 3  2 2  points P, A and B and CPB  , then a value of tan  is:
(2018)
(c) 2  2 1  (d) 3  2 2
4 1
(a) (b)
13. Consider an ellipse, whose centre is at the origin and its 3 2
3 (c) 2 (d) 3
major axis is along the x-axis. If its eccentricity is and
5 19. Two parabolas with a common vertex and with axes along
the distance between its foci is 6, then the area (in sq. x-axis and y-axis, respectively, intersect each other in the
units) of the quadrilateral inscribed in the ellipse, with the first quadrant. If the length of the latus rectum of each
vertices as the vertices of the ellipse, is : parabola is 3, then the equation of the common tangent
to the two parabolas is : (2018/Online Set–1)
(2017/Online Set–1)
(a) 4( x + y)+ 3 = 0 (b) 3( x + y)+ 4 = 0
(a) 8 (b) 32
(c) 8(2 x + y)+ 3 = 0 (d) x + 2 y + 3 = 0
(c) 80 (d) 40
20. If the tangents drawn to the hyperbola 4y2= x2 + 1 intersect
14. The eccentricity of an ellipse having centre at the origin, the co-ordinate axes at the distinct points A and B, then
axes along the co-ordinate axes and passing through the the locus of the mid point of AB is :
points (4, –1) and (–2, 2) is : (2017/Online Set–2)
(2018/Online Set–1)
1 2 (a) x2 - 4 y2 + 16 x2y2 = 0
(a) (b)
2 5 (b) x2 - 4y2 - 16 x2y2 = 0
(c) 4x2 - y2 + 16 x2y2 = 0
3 3 (d) 4x2 - y2 - 16 x2y2 = 0
(c) (d)
2 4
CONIC SECTIONS 137

21. If b is one of the angle between the normals to the ellipse, 26. If the length of the latus rectum of an ellipse is 4 units and
the distance between a focus and its nearest vertex on
x2 + 3y2 = 9 at the points 3cos q , 3 sinq and 3
the major axis is units, then its eccentricity is :
2
æ pö 2 cot b (2018/Online Set–3)
-3 sinq , 3 cos q ;q Î ç 0, ÷ ; then is equal to:
è 2 ø sin 2q
1 1
(2018/Online Set–1) (a) (b)
2 3

2 1 2 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3 3 3 9
27. If the eccentricity of the standard hyperbola passing
3 through the point (4, 6) is 2, then the equation of the
(c) 2 (d)
4 tangent to the hyperbola at (4, 6) is :
22. Tangents drawn from the point (-8, 0) to the parabola y2 = (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
8x touch the parabola at P and Q. If F is the focus of the (a) x – 2y + 8 = 0 (b) 2x – 3y + 10 = 0
parabola, then the area of the triangle PFQ (in sq. units) is (c) 2x – y – 2 = 0 (d) 3x – 2y = 0
equal to : (2018/Online Set–2)
28. In an ellipse, with centre at the origin, if the difference of
(a) 24 (b) 32 the lengths of major axis and minor axis is 10 and one of
(c) 48 (d) 64
the foci is at 0,5 3 , then the length of its latus rectum
23. A normal to the hyperbola, 4x2 -9y2 = 36 meets the co-
is: (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
ordinate axes x and y at A and B, respectively. If the
parallelogram OABP (O being the origin) is formed, then (a) 10 (b) 5
the locus of P is : (2018/Online Set–2) (c) 8 (d) 6

(a) 4x2 + 9y2 = 121 (b) 9x2 + 4y2 = 169 29. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x at the point where it
intersects the circle x2 + y2 = 5 in the first quadrant, passes
(c) 4x2 - 9y2 = 121 (d) 9x2 - 4y2 = 169
through the point : (8-04-2019/Shift-2)
24. The locus of the point of intersection of the lines,
æ 1 4ö æ1 3ö
2 x - y + 4 2 k = 0 and 2 kx + ky - 4 2 = 0 (k is any (a) ç - , ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è 3 3ø è4 4ø
non-zero real parameter), is : (2018/Online Set–3)
æ3 7ö æ 1 1ö
1 (c) ç , ÷ (d) ç - , ÷
(a) an ellipse whose eccentricity is . è4 4ø è 4 2ø
3
30. If one end of a focal chord of the parabola,
(b) an ellipse with length of its major axis 8 2 y 2 = 16 x is at 1, 4 , then the length of this focal chord is:

(c) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is 3 (9-04-2019/Shift-1)

(a) 25 (b) 22
(d) a hyperbola with length of its transverse axis 8 2
(c) 24 (d) 20
2
25. Let P be a point on the parabola, x = 4y. If the distance of
P from the centre of the circle, x2+y2+6x+8=0 is minimum, 31. If the line y = mx + 7 3 is normal to the hyperbola
then the equation of the tangent to the parabola at P, is : x2 y2 2
- = 1 then a value of m is , then k is
(2018/Online Set–3) 24 18 k
(a) x + 4y - 2 = 0 (b) x - y + 3 = 0 (9-04-2019/Shift-1)
(c) x + y + 1 = 0 (d) x + 2y = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 138

32. The area (in sq. units) of the smaller of the two circles that 37. The tangent and normal to the ellipse 3 x 2 + 5 y 2 = 32 at
2
touch the parabola, y = 4 x at the point (1, 2) and the x-
the point P 2, 2 meet the x-axis at Q and R, respec-
axis is: (9-04-2019/Shift-2)
tively. Then the area (in sq. units) of the triangle PQR is:

(a) 8p 2 - 2 (b) 4p 2 - 2 (10-4-2019/Shift-2)

34 14
(a) (b)
(c) 4p 3 + 2 (d) 8p 3 - 2 2 15 3

33. If the tangent to the parabola y 2 = x at a point 16 68

(c) (d)
3 15
a, b , b > 0 is also a tangent to the
38. If the line ax + y = c. touches both the curves
2 2
ellipse, x + 2 y = 1, then a is equal to: 2
x 2 + y 2 = 1 and y = 4 2 x, then c is equal to
(9-04-2019/Shift-2) (10-4-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 2 - 1 (b) 2 2 - 1
1
(a) 2 (b)
(c) 2 2 + 1 (d) 2 +1 2

34. If a directrix of a hyperbola centred at the origin and 1

(c) (d) 2
2
passing through the point 4, - 2 3 is 5 x = 4 5 and its
39. Let P be the point of intersection of the common tangents
eccentricity is e, then: (10-04-2019/Shift-1) to the parabola y2 = 12x and hyperbola 8x2 – y2 = 8. If S and
S’ denote the foci of the hyperbola where S lies on the
(a) 4e 4 - 24e 2 + 27 = 0
positive x-axis then P divides SS2 in a ratio:
(b) 4e 4 - 12e 2 - 27 = 0 (12-04-2019/Shift-1)
40. An ellipse, with foci at (0, 2) and (0, - 2) and minor axis of
(c) 4e 4 - 24e 2 + 35 = 0 length 4, passes through which of the following points?
(12-04-2019/Shift-2)
(d) 4e 4 + 8e 2 - 35 = 0
(a) 2, 2 (b) 2, 2
x2 y2
35. If the line x – 2y = 12 is tangent to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 at
a b
(c) 2, 2 2 (d) 1, 2 2
æ -9 ö 41. The equation of a common tangent to the curves, y2 = 16x
the point ç 3, ÷ then the length of the latus rectum of
è 2 ø and xy = -4, is______. (12-04-2019/Shift-2)
the ellipse is: (10-04-2019/Shift-1) (a) x - y + 4 = 0 (b) x + y + 4 = 0
36. If 5 x + 9 = 0 is the directrix of the hyperbola
(c) x - 2 y + 16 = 0 (d) 2 x - y + 2 = 0
2 2
16 x - 9 y = 144 , then its corresponding focus is: 42. The tangents to the curve y = (x - 2)2 -1 at its points of
(10-4-2019/Shift-2) intersection with the line x - y = 3, intersect at the point :
(12-04-2019/Shift-2)
æ 5 ö
(a) 5, 0 (b) ç - , 0 ÷ æ5 ö æ 5 ö
è 3 ø (a) ç , 1÷ (b) ç - , - 1÷
è2 ø è 2 ø
æ5 ö
(c) ç , 0 ÷ (d) -5, 0 æ5 ö æ 5 ö
è3 ø (c) ç , - 1÷ (d) ç - , 1÷
è2 ø è 2 ø
CONIC SECTIONS 139

43. Axis of a parabola lies along x-axis. If its vertex and focus
48. The length of the chord of the parabola x 2 = 4 y having
are at distance 2 and 4 respectively from the origin, on the
positive x-axis then which of the following points does equation x - 2 y + 4 2 = 0 is: (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
not lie on it? (9-01-2019/Shift-1)
(a) 3 2 (b) 2 11
(a) 5, 2 6 (b) 8, 6
(c) 8 2 (d) 6 3
(c) 6, 4 2 (d) 4, - 4
ì y2 x2 ü
p 49. Let S = í x, y Î R 2 : - = 1ý , where r ¹ ±1
44. Let 0 < q < . If the eccentricity of the hyperbola î 1 + r 1- r þ
2
then S represents: (10-01-2019/Shift-2)
x2 y2
- = 1 is greater than 2, then the length of its
cos 2 q sin 2 q 2
(a) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is when
latus rectum lies in the interval: (9-01-2019/Shift-1) 1- r

(a) (3, ¥ ) (b) (3/2, 2] 0<r<1

(c) (2, 3] (d) (1, 3/2]
2
45. A hyperbola has its centre at the origin, passes through (b) an ellipse whose eccentricity is when r > 1
the point ( 4, 2) and has transverse axis of length 4 along r +1
the x-axis. Then the eccentricity of the hyperbola is :
(9-01-2019/Shift-2) 2
(c) a hyperbola whose eccentricity is , when
r +1
3
(a) (b) 3
2 0<r<1

2 1
(c) 2 (d) (d) an ellipse whose eccentricity is , when r > 1
3 r +1

46. Let A (4, –4) and B (9, 6) be points on the parabola,

50. If tangents are drawn to the ellipse x 2 + 2 y 2 = 2 at all
y2 = 4x. Let C be chosen on the arc AOB of the parabola,
where O is the origin, such that the area of DACB is points on the ellipse other than its four vertices then the
maximum. Then, the area (in sq. units) of DACB, is: mid points of the tangents intercepted between the
(9-01-2019/Shift-2) coordinate axes lie on the curve :
(11-01-2019/Shift-1)
1 1
(a) 31 (b) 30
4 2
1 1 x2 y 2
(a) 4 x 2 + 2 y 2 = 1 (b) + =1
3 4 2
(c) 32 (d) 31
4
1 1 x2 y 2
(c) 2 x 2 + 4 y 2 = 1
47. The equation of a tangent to the hyperbola + =1
(d)
2 4
4 x 2 - 5 y 2 = 20 parallel to the line x - y = 2 is:

(10-1-2019/Shift-1) 51. Equation of a common tangent to the parabola y 2 = 4 x

(a) x - y + 1 = 0 (b) x - y + 7 = 0 and the hyperbola xy = 2 is : (11-01-2019/Shift-1)

(c) x - y + 9 = 0 (d) x - y - 3 = 0 (a) x + y + l = 0 (b) x – 2y + 4 = 0

(c) x + 2y + 4 = 0 (d) 4x + 2y + 1 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 140

52. If a hyperbola has length of its conjugate axis equal to 5

57. The equation of a tangent to the parabola, x 2  8 y which
and the distance between its foci is 13, then the
eccentricity of the hyperbola is : (11-01-2019/Shift-2) makes an angle with the positive direction of x-axis, is
(12-01-2019/Shift-2)
13
(a) (b) 2
12 (a) y  x tan   2cot  (b) y  x tan   2cot 

13 13 (c) x  y cot   2 tan  (d) x  y cot   2 tan 

(c) (d)
6 8
58. Let S and S’ be the foci of an ellipse and B be any one of
53. If the area of the triangle whose one vertex is at the vertex the extremities of its minor axis. If S’ BSis a right angled
of the parabola, y  4  x  a
2 2
0 and the other two triangle with right angle at B and area (S’BS) = 8 sq.
units, then the length of a latus rectum of the ellipse is
vertices are the points of intersection of the parabola and
y-axis, is 250 sq. units, then a value of’ ‘a’ is : (12-01-2019/Shift-2)
(11-01-2019/Shift-2) (a) 4 (b) 2 2
1

(a) 5 5 (b) 5(2 3 ) (c) 4 2 (d) 2

1 59. A line parallel to the straight line 2x – y  0 is tangent

(c) (10 3 ) (d) 5

54. Let the length of the latus rectum of an ellipse with its x 2 y2
to the hyperbola   1 at the point (x1 , y1 ). Then
major axis along x-axis and centre at the origin, be 8. If the 4 2
distance between the foci of this ellipse is equal to the
length of its minor axis, then which one of the following x12  5y12 is equal to : (2-9-2020/Shift-1)
points lies on it ? (11-01-2019/Shift-2)
(a) 6 (b) 10


(a) 4 2, 2 2  
(b) 4 3, 2 2  (c) 8 (d) 5
60. The area (in sq. units) of an equilateral triangle inscribed

(c) 4 3, 2 3  
(d) 4 2, 2 3  in the parabola y2 = 8x, with one of its vertices on the
vertex of this parabola, is : (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
55. If the vertices of a hyperbola be at (-2, 0) and (2, 0) and
one of its foci be at (-3, 0), then which one of the following (a) 128 3 (b) 192 3
points does not lie on this hyperbola?
(12-01-2019/Shift-1) (c) 64 3 (d) 256 3

(a) (6, 2 10) (b) (2 6,5)  

61. For some    0,  , if the eccentricity of the
 2
(c) (4, 15) (d) (6,5 2)

56. The tangent to the curve y = x2 - 5x + 5, parallel to the line hyperbola x 2  y 2 sec 2   10 is 5 times the eccentricity
2y = 4x +1, also passes through the point :
of the ellipse, x 2 sec 2   y 2  5, then the length of the
(12-01-2019/Shift-2)
latus rectum of the ellipse, is : (2-09-2020/Shift-2)
7 1 1 
(a)  ,  (b)  ,  7 
2 4 8  4 5 2 5
(a) (b)
3 3
 1  1 7
(c)   , 7 (d)  , 
 8  4 2 (c) 2 6 (d) 30
CONIC SECTIONS 141

62.
2
Let P be a point on the parabola, y = 12 x and N be the 65. Let the latusractum of the parabola y 2 = 4 x be the

foot of the perpendicular drawn from P on the axis of the common chord to the circles C1 and C2 each of them
parabola. A line is now drawn through the mid-point M of
having radius 2 5. Then, the distance between the
PN, parallel to its axis which meets the parabola at Q. If
centres of the circles C1 and C2 is :
4
the y-intercept of the line NQ is , then : (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
3

(3-09-2020/Shift-1) (a) 8 (b) 8 5

(c) 4 5 (d) 12
1
(a) PN = 4 (b) MQ =
3 66. If the tangent to the curve, y = ex at a point (c, ec) and the
normal to the parabola, y2 = 4x at the point (1, 2) intersect
1 at the same point on the x-axis, then the value of c is
(c) PN = 3 (d) MQ = ……… . (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
4

63. A hyperbola having the transverse axis of length 2 has x2 y2

67. Let P (3, 3) be a point on the hyperbola, - = 1 . If
a2 b2
2 2
the same foci as that of the ellipse 3 x + 4 y = 12, then
the normal to it at P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0) and e is
this hyperbola does not pass through which of the its eccentricity, then the ordered pair (a2, e2) is equal to :
following points ? (3-09-2020/Shift-1)
(4-09-2020/Shift-1)

æ 3 1 ö æ 1 ö æ9 ö
(a) çç 2 , ÷ (b) ç1, - ÷ (a) (9,3) (b) ç , 2 ÷
è 2 ÷ø è 2ø è2 ø

æ 3 ö
æ9 ö æ3 ö
æ 1 ö (c) ç ,3 ÷ (d) ç , 2 ÷
(c) ç , 0÷ (d) çç - 2 , 1 ÷÷ è2 ø è2 ø
è 2 ø è ø

x2 y2
64. Let e1 and e2 be the eccentricities of the ellipse, 68. Let + = 1(a > b) be a given ellipse, length of whose
a 2 b2

x2 y2 x2 y 2 latus rectum is 10. If its eccentricity is the maximum value

+ 2 = 1 (b < 5) and the hyperbola, - =1
25 b 16 b 2 5
of the function, f(t ) = + t - t 2 then a2 + b2 is equal to
12
respectively satisfying e1e2 = 1. If a and b are the
(4-09-2020/Shift-1)
distances between the foci of the ellipse and the foci of
(a) 135 (b) 116
the hyperbola respectively, then the ordered pair (a, b )
(c) 126 (d) 145
is equal to : (3-09-2020/Shift-2)
69. Let x=4 be a directrix to an ellipse whose centre is at the
æ 24 ö
(a) (8, 12) (b) ççç , 10÷÷÷ origin and its eccentricity is
1
. If P(1,b), b> 0 is a point on
è5 ø 2
this ellipse, then the equation of the normal to it at P is:
æ 20 ö
(c) ççç , 12÷÷÷
(4-9-2020/Shift-2)
(d) (8, 10)
è3 ø (a) 8x – 2y = 5 (b) 4x – 2y = 1
(c) 7x – 4y = 1 (d) 4x – 3y = 2
CONIC SECTIONS 142

70. If the common tangent to the parabolas, y2 = 4x and 76. If the normal at an end of a latus rectum of an ellipse
x2 = 4y also touches the circle, x2 + y2 = c2, then c is equal
passes through an extremity of the minor axis, then the
to: (5-09-2020/Shift-1)
eccentricity e of the ellipse satisfies:
1 1 (6-09-2020/Shift-2)
(a) (b)
2 4
(a) e 4 + 2e 2 - 1 = 0 (b) e2 + 2e - 1 = 0
1 1
(c) (d)
2 2 2 (c) e4 + e 2 - 1 = 0 (d) e2 + e - 1 = 0
71. If the point P on the curve, 4x2+5y2=20 is fathest from the 77. If the distance between the foci of an ellipse is 6 and the
point Q(0,– 4), then PQ2 is equal to:
distance between its directrices is 12, then the length of
(5-09-2020/Shift-1)
its latus rectum is (7-01-2020/Shift-1)
(a)48 (b)29
(c)21 (d)36 (a) 2 3 (b) 3

72. If the co-ordinates of two points A and B are ( 7, 0) and

3
(c) (d) 3 2
(- 7, 0) respectively and P is any point on the conic, 2

9x 2 + 16y 2 = 144, then PA + PB is equal to :

78. If y = mx + 4 is a tangent to both the parabolas, y 2 = 4 x
(5-09-2020/Shift-1)
and x 2 = 2by , then b is equal to
(a) 6 (b) 16
(c) 9 (d) 8 (7-01-2020/Shift-1)
73. If the line y = mx + c is a common tangent to the hyperbola
(a) -64 (b) 128
2 2
x y (c) -128 (d) -32
- = 1 and the circle x2 + y2 = 36, then which one of
100 64
the following is true? (5-09-2020/Shift-2) x2 y2
79. If 3x + 4y = 12 2 is a tangent to the ellipse + = 1,
2
(a) 4c = 369 2
(b) c = 369 a2 9
(c) 8m + 5 = 0 (d) 5m = 4
for some a Î R then the distance between the foci of the
74. Let L1 be a tangent to the parabola y2 = 4 (x + 1) and L2 be
a tangent to the parabola y2= 8 (x + 2) such that L1 and L2 ellipse is : (7-01-2020/Shift-2)
intersect at right angles. Then L1 and L2 meet on the
straight line: (6-09-2020/Shift-1) (a) 2 5 (b) 2 7

(a) x + 2y = 0 (b) x + 2 = 0
(c) 2 2 (d) 4
(c) 2x + 1 = 0 (d) x + 3 = 0
75. Which of the following points lies on the locus of the 80. The locus of a point which divides the line segment
foot of perpendicular drawn upon any tangent to the joining the point (0, – 1) and a point on the

x2 y2 parabola, x 2 = 4y , internally in the ratio 1 : 2, is :

ellipse, + = 1 from any of its foci?
4 2
(8-01-2020/Shift-1)
(6-09-2020/Shift-1)

(a) (-1, 3) (b) (-2, 3) (a) 9x 2 - 12y = 8 (b) 4x 2 - 3y = 2

(c) (-1, 2) (d) (1, 2) (c) x 2 - 3y = 2 (d) 9x 2 - 3y = 2

CONIC SECTIONS 143

81. Let the line y = mx and the ellipse 2x2 + y2 = 1 intersect a 84. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the ellipse
point P in the first quadrant. If the normal to this ellipse at
x2 y 2 x2 y2
æ 1 ö + = 1 and the hyperbola - = 1 respectively
P meets the co-ordinate axes at (0, b) and ç - ,0 ÷ , 18 4 9 4
è 3 2 ø
and (e1 , e2 ) is a point on the ellipse, 15 x 2 + 3 y 2 = k Then
then b is equal to: (8-01-2020/Shift-1)
k is equal to: (9-01-2020/Shift-1)
2 2 (a) 14 (b) 15
(a) (b)
3 3 (c) 17 (d) 16
85. The length of minor axis (along y-axis) of an ellipse of the
2 2 2
(c) (d) 4
3 3 standard form is . If this ellipse touches the line
3
82. If a hyperbola passes through the point P(10, 16) and it
x + 6 y = 8, then its eccentricity is : (9-1-2020/Shift-2)
has vertices at (±6, 0), then the equation of the normal at
P is: (8-01-2020/Shift-2)
1 5 1 11
(a) 3x + 4 y = 94 (b) x + 2 y = 42 (a) (b)
2 3 2 3
(c) 2 x + 5 y = 100 (d) x + 3 y = 58
5 1 11
83. Let a line y = mx(m > 0) intersect the parabola,y2 = x at a (c) (d)
6 3 3
point P, other than the origin. Let the tangent to it at P
meet the x axis at the point Q. If area (DOPQ) = 4 sq. units, 86. If one end of focal chord AB of the parabola y 2 = 8 x is at
then m is equal to______. (8-01-2020/Shift-2)
æ1 ö
A ç , -2 ÷ , then the equation of tangent to it at B is
è2 ø
(9-1-2020/Shift-2)
(a) x + 2 y + 8 = 0 (b) 2 x - y - 24 = 0

(c) x - 2 y + 8 = 0 (d) 2 x + y - 24 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 144

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. From the focus of the parabola, y2 = 8x as centre, a circle
is described so that a common chord of the curves is
1. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle inscribed equidistant from the vertex & focus of the parabola. The
in the parabola, y2 = 4x so that one of its angular point is equation of the circle is :
at the vertex is :
(a) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 9 (b) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 6
(a) 8 3 (b) 6 3 (c) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 4 (d) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 18
7. A circle is described whose centre is the vertex and whose
(c) 4 3 (d) 2 3 diameter is three–quarters of the latus rectum of hte
parabola y2 = 4ax. If PQ is the common chord of the circle
2. The points (s) on the parabola y2 = 4x which are closest
and the parabola and L1 L2 is the latus rectum, then the
to the circle x2 + y2 – 24y + 128 = 0 is/are
area of the trapezium PL1 L2Q is
(a) (0, 0) (b) (2, 2 2 )
(a) 3 2 a2 (b) 2 2 a2
(c) (4, 4) (d) none of these
3. The triangle PQR of area 'A' is inscribed in the parabola æ 2+ 2 ö 2
y2 = 4ax such that the P lies at the vertex of the parabola (c) 4 a2 (d) çç ÷÷ a
è 2 ø
and the base QR is a focal chord. The modulus of the
difference of the ordinates of the points Q and R is : 8. Through the vertex O of the parabola y2 = 4ax two chords
OP & OQ are drawn and the circles on OP & OQ as diameter
A A intersect in R. If q1 , q2 & f are the angles made with the
(a) (b)
2a a axis by the tangents at P & Q on the parabola & by OR
then cot q1 + cot q2 is equal to
2A 4A
(c) (d) (a) –2 tan f (b) – 2 tan (p – f)
a a
(c) 0 (d) 2 cot f
4. Length of the focal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax at a
9. The condition that the line, x. cosq + y. sin q =p touches
distance p from the vertex is
the parabola, y2 = 4a (x + a) is :
(a) a – p cos q = 0 (b) a + p cos q = 0
2a 2 a3
(a) (b) 2 (c) a cos q – p = 0 (d) a cos q + p = 0
p p
10. T is a point on the tangent to a parabola y2 = 4ax at its
point P. TL and TN are the perpendiculars on the focal
4a 3 p3
(c) (d) radius SP and the directrix of the parabola respectively.
p2 a
Then :
5. The ends of a line segment are P (1, 3) and Q (1, 1). R is a (a) SL = 2 (TN) (b) 3(SL) = 2 (TN)
point on the line segment PQ such that PR : QR = 1 : l. If R (c) SL = TN (d) 2 (SL) = 3 (TN)
is in interior point of a parabola y2 = 4x, then 11. If the distance of 2 points P and Q on parabola y2 = 4ax
from the focus are 4 and 9 respectively, then the distance
3
(a) l Î (0, 1) (b) l Î æç – , 1 ö÷ of the point of intersection of tangents at P and Q from the
è 5 ø focus is
(a) 8 (b) 6
æ1 3ö
(c) l Î ç , ÷ (d) none of these
è 2 5ø (c) 5 (d) 13
CONIC SECTIONS 145

12. Two tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax make angle a1 19. Which of the following lines, is a normal to the parabola
and a2 with the x-axis. The locus of their point of y2 = 16 x

cot a1 (a) y = x – 11 cos q – 3 cos 3 q

intersection if = 2 is :
cot a 2 (b) y = x – 11 cos q – cos 3 q
(c) y = (x – 11) cos q + cos 3 q
(a) 2y2 = 9 ax (b) 4y2 = 9 ax
(d) y = (x – 11) cos q – cos 3 q
(c) y2 = 9 ax (d) none of these
20. The equation of the other normal to the parabola
13. If the line x + my + am2 = 0 touches the parabola
y2 = 4ax which passes through the intersection of those at
y2 = 4ax, then the point of contact is
(4a, –4a) & (9a, –6a) is :
æ a - 2a ö (a) 5x – y + 115a = 0 (b) 5x + y – 135a = 0
(a) (am2, –2am) (b) ç 2 , ÷
èm m ø (c) 5x – y – 115a = 0 (d) 5x + y + 115 = 0
(c) (–am2, –2am) (d) The line does not touch 21. The two parabola y2 = 4ax and y2 = 4c (x –b) cannot have a
common normal, other than the axis unless, if
14. AB, AC are tangents to a parabola y2 = 4ax. p1, p2 and
p3 are the lengths of the perpendiculars from A, B and C
a –b b
respectively to any tangent to the curve expect at points (a) >2 (b) a – c > 2
b
B and C, then p2, p1, p3 are in :
(a) A.P. (b) G.P. b
(c) H.P. (d) none of these (c) a + b > 2 (d) None of these
15. From an external point P, pair of tangent lines are drawn
22. If the normals drawn from any point to the parabola
to the parabola, y2 = 4x. If q1 and q2 are the inclinations
y2 = 4ax cut the line x = 2a in points whose ordinates are in
of these tangents with the axis of x such that,
arithmetic progression, then tangents of the angles which
p the normals makes with the axis, are
q1 + q 2 = , then the locus of P is :
4 (a) in A.P. (b) in G.P.
(a) x – y + 1 = 0 (b) x + y – 1 = 0 (c) in H.P. (d) None of these
(c) x – y – 1 = 0 (d) x + y + 1 = 0 23. If two normals to a parabola y2 = 4ax intersect at right
angles then the chord joining their feet passes through
16. If A & B are points on the parabola y2 = 4ax with vertex O
such that OA perpendicular to OB & having lengths a fixed point whose co-ordinates are :
(a) (–2a, 0) (b) (a, 0)
r 4 / 3r 4 / 3 (c) (2a, 0) (d) none of these
r1 & r2 respectively, then the value of 21/ 3 2 2 / 3 is
r1 + r2
24. From the point (15, 12) three normals are drawn to the
(a) 16a2 (b) a2 parabola y2 = 4x, then centroid of triangle formed by three
co–normal points is
(c) 4a (d) None of these
17. The equation of common tangent to the parabola, 16
(a) æç , 0 ö÷ (b) (4, 0)
y2 = 2x and x2 = 16y is Ax + By + C = 0, where è3 ø
A, B, C Î N, such that their sum is least then
æ 26 ö
A = ____ , B = ____ , C = _____ : (c) ç , 0 ÷ (d) (6, 0)
è 3 ø
(a) 1, 2, 2 (b) 2, 2, 1
25. Normals at three points P, Q, R at the parabola y2 = 4ax
(c) 2, 1, 2 (d) none of these
meet in a point A and S be its focus, if |SP|. |SQ| . |SR| =
18. If the straight line x + y = 1 is a normal to the parabola l(SA)2, then l is equal to
x2 = ay, then the value of a is
(a) a3 (b) a2
(a) 4/3 (b) 1/2
(c) a (d) 1
(c) 3/4 (d) 1/4
CONIC SECTIONS 146

26. If the normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point 34. The circles on focal radii of a parabola as diameter touch
(at2, 2at) cuts the parabola again at (aT2, 2aT), then (a) the tangent at the vertex (b) the axis
(a) – 2 £ T £ 2 (b) T Î (–¥, –8) È (8, ¥) (c) the directrix (d) none of these
(c) T2 < 8 (d) T2 ³ 8 35. If M is the foot of the perpendicular from a point P of a
27. A normal is drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point parabola y2 = 4ax to its directrix and SPM is an equilateral
triangle, where S is the focus, then SP is equal to :
(2a, –2 2 a) then the length of the normal chord, is
(a) a (b) 2a
(a) 4 2a (b) 6 2 a (c) 3a (d) 4a
36. The locus of the middle points of the focal chords of the
(c) 4 3 a (d) 6 3 a
parabola, y2 = 4x is :
28. The normal chord at a point 't' on the parabola (a) y2 = x – 1 (b) y2 = 2(x – 1)
y2 = 4ax subtends a right angle at the vertex. Then t² is
(c) y2 = 2(1 – x) (d) none of these
equal to :
37. The locus of the foot of the perpendiculars drawn from
(a) 3 (b) 1
the vertex on a variable tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax
(c) 4 (d) 2 is :
29. If the normals at two points P, Q of the parabola, (a) x (x2 + y2) + ay2 = 0 (b) y (x2 + y2) + ax2 = 0
y2 = 4x intersect at a third point R on the parabola, then
(c) x (x2 – y2) + ay2 = 0 (d) none of these
the product of the ordinates of P & Q is :
38. The eccentricity of the conic
(a) 4 (b) 6
4(2y – x – 3) 2 – 9 (2x + y – 1) 2 = 80 is
(c) 16 (d) 8
30. If P, Q, R are three co-normal points on the parabola 3 13
y2 = 4ax then the centroid of the triangle PQR always (a) (b)
13 3
lies on :
(c) 13 (d) 3
(a) the x-axis
(b) the y-axis
x 2 y2
39. The distance of a point on the ellipse + = 1 from
(c) the line y = x 6 2
(d) the directrix of the parabola the centre is 2. The eccentric angle of the point is
31. x2
A tangent to the parabola + 4ay = 0 cuts the parabola
p
x2 = 4by at A and B the locus of the mid point of AB is : (a) ± (b) ± p
2
(a) (a + 2b) x2 = 4 b2y (b) (b + 2a) x2 = 4 b2y
(c) (a + 2b) y2 = 4 b2x (d) (b + 2x) x2 = 4 a2y p 3p p
(c) , (d) ±
2 4 4
32. Tangents are drawn to y 2 = 4 a x from a variable point P
moving on x + a = 0, then the locus of foot of perpendicular a2
40. If tan q1 tan q2 = – , then the chord joining two point
drawn from P on the chord of contact of P is b2
2
(a) y = 0 (b) x - a + y2 = a2 x 2 y2
q1 and q2 on the ellipse + = 1 will subtend a right
a 2 b2
2
(c) x - a + y2 = 0 (d) y x - a = 0
angle at
33. A ray of light travels along a line y = 4 and strikes the (a) Focus (b) Centre
surface of a curve y2 = 4(x + y) then equation of the line (c) End of the major axes (d) End of minor axes
along reflected ray travel is
41. The equation of tangents to the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144
(a) x = 0 (b) x = 2 which pass through the point (2, 3)
(c) x + y = 4 (d) 2x + y = 4 (a) y = 3 (b) x + y = 2
(c) x – y = 3 (d) y = 3; x + y = 5
CONIC SECTIONS 147

42. Tangent are drawn from the points on the line 48. The locus of the mid point of the chords of the circle
2 2
x – y – 5 = 0 to x + 4y = 4, then all the chords of x 2 + y 2 = a2, which are tangent to the hyperbola
contact pass through a fixed point, whose coordinate
are x2 y2
- = 1 is
æ4 1ö æ4 1ö a2 b2
(a) ç , - ÷ (b) ç , ÷
è5 5ø è 5 5ø
(a) x2 + y2 = a2 – b2
æ 4 1ö (b) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 – b2
(c) ç - , ÷ (d) None of these
è 5 5ø
(c) (x2 + y2)2 = a2x2 – b2y2
43. An ellipse with major axis 4 and minor axis 2 touches
(d) (x2 + y2)2 = a2 + b2
both the coordinate axis, then locus of its centre is
49. The area of a triangle formed by the lines x – y = 0, x + y = 0 and
(a) x 2 - y 2 = 5 (b) x 2 .y 2 = 5
any tangent to the hyperbola x2 – y2 = a2 is
x2 (a) a2 (b) 2a2
(c) + y2 = 5 (d) x 2 + y 2 = 5
4
(c) 3a2 (d) 4a2
44. A hyperbola has centre ' C ' and one focus at P 6,8 . If 50. The equation of the common tangents to the parabola
its two directrices are 3 x + 4 y + 10 = 0 and y2 = 8x and the hyperbola 3x2 – y2 = 3 is-
3 x + 4 y - 10 = 0 then CP = (a) 2x ± y + 1 = 0 (b) x ± y + 1 = 0
(a) 14 (b) 8 (c) x ± 2y + 1 = 0 (d) x ± y + 2 = 0
(c) 10 (d) 6 51. Let P(a secq, b tanq) and Q (a sec f, b tan f), where

x2 y2
45. The equation - = 1, |r| < 1 represents p x 2 y2
1- r 1+ r q+f= , be two points on the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 If
2 a b
(a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola
(h, k) is the point of the intersection of the normals at P
(c) a circle (d) None of these
and Q, then k is equal to
46. The equation 9x2 – 16y2 – 18x + 32y – 151 = 0 represents a
hyperbola -
(a) The length of the transverse axes is 4 a 2 + b2 æ a 2 + b2 ö
(a) (b) - çç ÷
÷
a è a ø
(b) Length of latus rectum is 9

21 11
(c) Equation of directrix is x = and x = -
5 5 a 2 + b2 æ a 2 + b2 ö
(c) (d) - çç ÷
÷
(d) None of these b è b ø
47. If a + b = 3p then the chord joining the points a and b for

x2 y2 Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]

the hyperbola - = 1 passes through
a 2 b2
52. Let V be the vertex and L be the latus rectum of the parabola
(a) focus
x2 = 2y + 4x – 4. Then the equation of the parabola whose
(b) centre
vertex is at V, latus rectum is L/2 and axis is perpendicular
(c) one of the end points of the transverse axis
to the axis of the given parabola.
(d) one of the end points of the conugates axis
(a) y2 = x – 2 (b) y2 = x – 4
(c) y2 = 2 – x (d) y2 = 4 – x
CONIC SECTIONS 148

53. Consider a circle with its centre lying on the focus of the 58. If the chord through the points whose eccentric angles
parabola, y2 = 2 px (p > 0) such that it touches the directrix
of the parabola. Then a point of intersection of the circle x2 y 2
are q & f on the ellipse, + = 1 passes through a
& the parabola is : a 2 b2
focus, then the value of tan (q/2) tan (f/2) is :
æp ö æp ö
(a) ç , p ÷ (b) ç ,-p ÷
è2 ø è2 ø e +1 e -1
(a) (b)
e -1 e +1
æ p ö æ p ö
(c) ç - , p ÷ (d) ç - ,-p ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø 1+ e 1- e
(c) (d)
54. If equation of tangent at P, Q and vertex A of a parabola are 1- e 1+ e
3x + 4y – 7 = 0, 2x + 3y – 10 = 0 and x – y = 0 respectively,
59. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of a conic passing through
then
the origin then the eccentricity of conic is
(a) focus is (4, 5)
(a) 386 /12 (b) 386 /13
(b) length of latus ractum is 2 2
(c) axis is x + y – 9 = 0 (c) 386 / 25 (d) 386 / 38

9 9
(d) vertex is æç , ö÷ x2 y2
- = 1 coincide with the foci of
è2 2ø 60. If foci of
a 2 b2
55. The locus of the mid point of the focal radii of a variable
point moving on the parabola, y2 = 4ax is a parabola whose x2 y 2
+ = 1 and eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then
25 9
(a) Latus rectum is half the latus rectum of the original
parabola (a) a2 + b2 = 16
(b) Vertex is (a/2, 0) (b) there is no director circle to the hyperbola
(c) Directrix is y–axis (c) centre of the director circle is (0, 0)
(d) Focus has the co–ordinates (a, 0)
(d) length of latus rectum of the hyperbola = 12
56. The equation, 3x2 + 4y2 – 18x + 16y + 43 = c.
Numerical Value Type Questions
(a) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any
value of c
61. The equation to the parabola whose axis parallel to the
(b) represents an ellipse, if c > 0 y-axis and which passes through the points (0, 4), (1, 9)
(c) represent empty set, if c < 0 and (4, 5). If latus rectum of parabola is l, then the value of
(d) a point, if c = 0 361l must be
62. The distance between the focus and directrix of the
x2 y2
57. If P is a point of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1, whose foci are S 2
a b conic 3x - y = 48 x + 3y is :
and S’. Let ÐPSS’ = a and ÐPS’S= b, then
63. The locus of a point that divides a chord of slope 2 of the
(a) PS + PS’ = 2a, if a > b
parabola y2 = 4x internally in the ratio 1 : 2 is a parabola. If
(b) PS + PS’ = 2b, if a < b
the vertex of parabola is (l, m), then the value of 729 (l +
a b 1- e m)2 must be
(c) tan tan =
2 2 1+ e 2 2
64. Tangents are drawn to the ellipse x + y = 1 at ends of
9 5
a b a 2 - b2
(d) tan tan = [ a - a 2 - b 2 ] when a > b latus rectum. If the area of quadrilateral formed is l sq unit,
2 2 b2
then the value of l must be
CONIC SECTIONS 149

65. If the product of slopes of tangents drawn from point (a) A (b) B

x2 (c) C (d) D
P(-9, k) to ellipse + y 2 = 1 is equal to 2. Then the
9 72. Assertion : Feet of perpendiculars drawn from foci of an
value of k2 is ellipse 4x 2 + y2 = 16 on the line 2 3 x + y = 8 lie on the
circle x2 + y2 = 16.
x 2 y2
66. If common tangent of x 2 + y 2 = r 2 and + =1 Reason : If perpendicular are drawn from foci of an ellipse
16 9
to its any tangent then feet of these perpendiculars lie on
forms a square then find its area. dirctor circle of the ellipse.
67. If a circle cuts a rectangular hyperbola xy = c2 in A, B, C (a) A (b) B
and D and the parameters of these four points be t1, t2, t3 (c) C (d) D
and t4 respectively, then the value of 16t1t2t3t4 must be
Match the Following
ASSERTION REASON
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
(A) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is a representing matching of elements from Column-I and
correct explanation for ASSERTION. Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
(B) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is true, REASON is not to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
a correct explanation for ASSERTION. corresponding to the correct matching.
(C) If ASSERTION is true, REASON is false. 73. Column – I Column – II
(D) If ASSERTION is false, REASON is true. (A) Area of a triangle formed by the (p) 8
68. Assertion : If straight line x = 8 meets the parabola y2 = 8x tangents drawn from a point
at P & Q then PQ substends a right angle at the origin. (–2, 2) to the parabola y2 = 4(x + y)
Reason : Double ordinate equal to twice of latus rectum of and their corresponding chord
a parabola subtands a right angle at the vertex.
of contact is
(a) A (b) B
(B) Length of the latusrectum of (q) 4 3
(c) C (d) D
69. Assertion : The perpendicular bisector of the line segment the conic 25{(x – 2)2 + (y – 3)2} =
joining the point (–a, 2 at) and (a, 0) is tangent to the parabola (3x + 4y – 6)2 is
y2 = 4ax, where t Î R (C) If focal distance of a point on (r) 4
Reason : Number of parabolas with a given point as vertex the parabola y = x2 – 4 is 25/4
and length of latus rectum equal to 4, is 2.
and points are of the form
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (± a , b) then value of a + b is
70. Assertion : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by the lines x (D) Length of side of an equilateral (s) 24/5
= 0, x + y + 1 = 0 & x – y + 1 = 0 also passes through the triangle inscribed in a parabola
point (1, 0)
y2 – 2x – 2y – 3 = 0 whose one
Reason : Circumcircle of a triangle formed by three tangents
angular point is vertex of the
of a parabola passes through its focus.
parabola, is
(a) A (b) B
The correct matching is :
(c) C (d) D
(a) (A–r;B–s; C–p; D–q)
71. Assertion : In a triangle ABC, if base BC is fixed and
perimeter of the triangle is constant, then vertex A moves (b) (A–s;B–r; C–p; D–q)
on an ellipse. (c) (A–q;B–s; C–p; D–r)
Reason : If sum of distances of a point ‘P’ from two fixed (d) (A–p;B–s; C–p; D–q)
points is constant then locus of ‘P’ is a real ellipse.
CONIC SECTIONS 150

74. Column – I Column – II 76. The length of smallest focal chord of this curve C is :
(A) If the mid point of a chord of (p) 6
1 1
x2 y2 (a) (b)
the ellipse + = 1 is 12a 4a
16 25
(0, 3), then length of the
1 1
(c) (d)
4k 16a 8a
chord is , then k is
5
77. The curve C is symmetric about the line :
(B) If the line y = x + l touches (q) 8
the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144,
3 3
then the sum of values of l is (a) y = – (b) y =
2 2
(C) If the distance between a (r) 0
focus and corresponding
3 3
directix of an ellipse be 8 (c) x = – (d) x =
2 2
and the eccentricity be 1/2,
then length of the minor Using the following passage, solve Q.78 to Q.80

k
axis is , then 2k is Passage – 2
3
(D) Sum of distances of a (s) 16 If P is a variable point and F1 and F2 are two fixed points such
point on the ellipse that |PF1 – PF2| = 2a. Then the locus of the point P is a
hyperbola, with points F1 and F2 as the two focii (F1F2 > 2a). If
x2 y 2
+ = 1 from the foci
9 16 x2 y2
- = 1 is a hyperbola, then its conjugate hyperbola is
The correct matching is : a2 b2
(a) (A–q; B–q; C–p; D–s)
(b) (A–q; B–r; C–s; D–q) x2 y2
- = -1. Let P(x, y) is a variable point such that
(c) (A–s; B–r; C–q; D–p) a 2 b2
(d) (A–p; B–q; C–r; D–s)
| ( x - 1) 2 + ( y - 2) 2 - ( x - 5) 2 + ( y - 5)2 | = 3.
Using the following passage, solve Q.75 to Q.77
78. If the locus of the point P represents a hyperbola of
Passage – 1
eccentricity e, then the eccentricity e’ of the corresponding
If the locus of the circumcentre of a variable triangle having conjugate hyperbola is :
sides y–axis, y = 2 and lx + my = 1, where (l,m) lies on the
parabola y2 = 4ax is a curve C, then 5 4
(a) (b)
75. Coordinates of the vertex of this curve C is 3 3

3 æ 3ö
(a) æç 2a, ö÷ (b) ç -2a, - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø 5 3
(c) (d)
4 7
æ 3ö æ 3ö
(c) ç -2a, ÷ (d) ç -2a, - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø
CONIC SECTIONS 151

79. Locus of intersection of two perpendicular tangents to Subjective Type

the given hyperbola is
81. Through the vertex O of parabola y2 = 4x, chords OP and
2
7 55 OQ are drawn at right angles to one another. Show that for
(a) (x – 3)2 + æç y - ö÷ =
è 2ø 4 all positions of P, PQ cuts the axis of the parabola at a fixed
point. Also find the locus of the middle point of PQ.
2
7 25 82. If for an ellipse, focus is (0, 0), corresponding directrix
(b) (x – 3)2 + æç y - ö÷ =
è 2ø 4 1
is x + y - 1 = 0 and eccentricity is . Then find the
3
2
æ 7ö 7 vertex between this focus and directrix
(c) (x – 3)2 + ç y - ÷ =
è 2ø 4

(d) none of these

æ 7ö
80. If origin is shifted to point ç 3, ÷ and the axes are rotated
è 2ø
through an angle q in clockwise sense so that equation of
given of given hyperbola changes to the standard form

x2 y2
- = 1, then q is :
a2 b2

æ 4ö æ3ö
(a) tan–1 ç ÷ (b) tan–1 ç ÷
è 3ø è4ø

æ5ö æ 3ö
(c) tan–1 ç ÷ (d) tan–1 ç ÷
è3ø è5ø
CONIC SECTIONS 152

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. The focal chord to y2 = 16x is tangent to (x – 6)2 + y2 = 2,
then the possible values of the slope of this chord, are
1. If x + y = k is normal to y2 = 12x, then k is (2000)
(2003)
(a) 3 (b) 9
(a) {–1, 1} (b) {–2, 2}
(c) –9 (d) –3
2. If the line x – 1 = 0 is the directrix of the parabola (c) {–2, 1/2} (d) {2, –1/2}

y2 – kx + 8 = 0, then one of the values of k is (2000)

x2 y2
(a) 1/8 (b) 8 9. For hyperbola   1, which of the
cos 2  sin 2 
(c) 4 (d) 1/4
following remains constant with change in ‘’ ? (2003)
3. The equation of the common tangent touching the circle
(x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 and the parabola y2 = 4x above the (a) abscissae of vertices (b) abscissae of foci
x–axis is (2001) (c) eccentricity (d) directrix

(a) 3 y = 3x + 1 (b) 3 y = – (x + 3) 10. If the line 2x + 6 y = 2 touches the hyperbola

(c) 3 y = x + 3 (d) 3 y = – (3x + 1) x2 – 2y2 = 4, then the point of contact is (2004)

4. The equation of the directrix of the parabola (a) (2, 6 ) (b) (5, 2 6 )
y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is (2001)
(a) x = – 1 (b) x = 1 1 1 
(c)  ,  (d) (4, 6 )
(c) x = – 3/2 (d) x = 3/2 2 6 
5. The locus of the mid point of the line segment joining the
focus to a moving point on the parabola y2 = 4ax is another 11. Axis of a parabola is y = x and vertex and focus are at a
parabola with directrix (2002)
distance 2 and 2 2 respectively from the origin. Then
(a) x = – a (b) x = – a/2 equation of the parabola is (2006)
(c) x = 0 (d) x = a/2
(a) (x – y)2 = 8 (x + y – 2)
6. The equation of the common tangent to the curves
(b) (x + y)2 = 2 (x + y – 2)
y2 = 8x and xy = – 1 is (2002)
(a) 3y = 9x + 2 (b) y = 2x + 1 (c) (x – y)2 = 4 (x + y – 2)

(c) 2y = x + 8 (d) y = x + 2 (d) (x + y)2 = 2 (x – y + 2)

x2 x 2 y2
7. Tangent is drawn to ellipse + y2 = 1 at 12. If e1 is the eccentricity of the ellipse   1 and e2 is
27 16 25
the eccentricity of the hyperbola passing through the foci
( 3 3 cos, sin) (where (0, /2)).
of the ellipse and e1e2 = 1, then equation of the hyperbola
Then, the value of  such that the sum of intercepts on is (2006)
axes made by this tangent is minimum, is (2003)

  x 2 y2 x 2 y2
(a)  1 (b)   1
(a) (b) 9 16 16 9
3 6

  x 2 y2
(c) (d) (c)  1 (d) None of these
8 4 9 25
CONIC SECTIONS 153

13. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length 2sin ,

is confocal with the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12. Then its equation x 2 y2
18. Let P (6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola   1 . If the
is (2007) a 2 b2
(a) x2cosec2 – y2sec2 = 1 normal at the point P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0), then the
(b) x2sec2 – y2 cosec2 = 1 eccentricity of the hyperbola is (2011)

(c) x2sin2 – y2 cos2 = 1

(a) 5 (b) 3
(d) x2 cos2 – y2 sin2 = 1 2 2
14. Consider a branch of the hyperbola
(c) 2 (d) 3
x 2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x  4 2 y – 6 = 0
19. The common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2 and the
with vertex at the point A. Let B be one of the end points parabola y2 = 8x touch the circle at the points P, Q and the
of its latus rectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola nearest
parabola at the points R, S. Then the area of the
to the point A, then the area of the triangle ABC is
quadrilateral PQRS is (2014)
(2008)
(a) 3 (b) 6
2 3 (c) 9 (d) 15
(a) 1 – sq unit (b) – 1 sq unit
3 2 20. If a chord, which is not a tangent, of the parabola y2 = 16x
has the equation 2x + y = p, and midpoint (h, k), then
2 3 which of the following is(are) possible value(s) of p, h
(c) 1 + sq unit (d) + 1 sq unit
3 2 and k ? (2017)
15. The line passing through the extremity A of the major axis (a) p = 2, h = 3, k = – 4
and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse (b) p = 5, h = 4, k = –3
x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the point M. Then
the area of the triangle with vertices at A, M and the origin (c) p = –1, h = 1, k = –3
O is (2009) (d) p = –2, h = 2, k = –4

31 29 21. Let a, b and  be positive numbers. Suppose P is an end

(a) (b)
10 10 point of the latus rectum of the parabola y 2  4 x, and

21 27 x2 y2
(c) (d) suppose the ellipse   1 passes through the point
10 10 a 2 b2
16. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 16 meets P. If the tangents to the parabola and the ellipse at the
the x–axis at Q. If M is the mid point of the line segment point P are perpendicular to each other, then the
PQ, then the locus of M intersects the latus rectum of the
eccentricity of the ellipse is (2020)
given ellipse at the points (2009)
1 1
 3 5 2  3 5 19  (a) (b)
(a)   ,  (b)   , 2 2
 2 7   2 4 

1 2
(c) (d)
 1  4 3  3 5
(c)   2 3 ,   (d)   2 3 , 
 7
 7 
Objective Questions II [One or more than one correct option]
17. Let (x, y) be any point on the parabola y2 = 4x. Let P be the
point that divides the line segment from (0, 0) to 22. Equation of common tangent of y = x2, y = – x2 + 4x – 4 is
(x, y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then, the locus of P is (2011) (2006)
(a) x2 = y (b) y2 = 2x (a) y = 4 (x – 1) (b) y = 0
(c) y2 = x (d) x2 = 2y (c) y = – 4 (x – 1) (d) y = – 30x – 50
CONIC SECTIONS 154

23. Let P(x1, y1) and Q(x2, y2), y1 < 0, y2 < 0, be the end points
x 2 y2
of the latus rectum of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. The equation 28. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola - = 1 be
a 2 b2
of parabola with latus rectum PQ are (2008)
reciprocal to that of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. If the hyperbola
2
(a) x + 2 3 y = 3 + 3 passes through a focus of the ellipse, then (2011)

(b) x 2 - 2 3 y = 3 + 3 x 2 y2
(a) the equation of the hyperbola is - =1
3 2
(c) x 2 + 2 3 y = 3 - 3
(b) a focus of the hyperbola is (2, 0)

(d) x 2 - 2 3 y = 3 - 3
5
(c) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is
24. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola 3
y2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at points T and N,
(d) the equation of the hyperbola is x2 – 3y2 = 3
respectively. The locus of the centroid of the triangle PTN
is a parabola whose (2009) 29. Let P and Q be distinct points on the parabola y2 = 2x
such that a circle with PQ as diameter passes through the
æ 2a ö vertex O of the parabola. If P lies in the first quadrant and
(a) vertex is ç ,0 ÷ (b) directrix is x = 0
è 3 ø the area of the triangle DOPQ is 3 2, then which of the
following is (are) the coordinates of P ? (2015)
2a
(c) latusrectum is (d) focus is (a, 0)
3 (a) 4,2 2 (b) 9,3 2

25. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x 2 – 2y 2 = 1

æ1 1 ö
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is reciprocal (c) ç , ÷ (d) 1, 2
è4 2ø
to that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the ellipse are along
the coordinate axes, then (2009) 30. Let E1 and E2 be two ellipses whose centres are at the
(a) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 2 origin. The major axes of E1 and E2 lie along the x-axis and
the y-axis, respectively. Let S be the circle x2 + (y - 1)2 = 2.
(b) The foci of ellipse are (± 1, 0)
The straight line x + y = 3 touches the curves S, E1 and E2
(c) Equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 = 4
2 2
(d) The foci of ellipse are (± 2 , 0) at P, Q and R respectively. Support that PQ = PR = .
3
26. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of E1 and E2, respectively,
y2 = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle of radius then the correct expression(s) is (are) (2015)
r having AB as its diameter, then the slope of the line
joining A and B can be (2010) 2 2 43
(a) e1 + e2 =
40
1 1
(a) - (b)
r r 7
(b) e1e 2 =
2 10
2
(c) 2 (d) -
r r
2 2 5
(c) e1 - e 2 =
27. Let L be a normal to the parabola y2 = 4x. If L passes 8
through the point (9, 6), then L is given by (2011)
(a) y – x + 3 = 0 (b) y + 3x – 33 = 0 3
(d) e1e2 =
(c) y + x – 15 = 0 (d) y – 2x + 12 = 0 4
CONIC SECTIONS 155

31. Consider the hyperbola H : x2 – y2 = 1 and a circle S with (c) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
centre N(x2, 0). Suppose that H and S touch each other at
1 p- 2
a point P(x1, y1) with x1 > 1 and y1 > 0. The common tangent the lines x= and x = 1 is
to H and S at P intersects the x-axis at point M. If (l, m) is 2 4 2
the centroid of the triangle PMN, then the correct (d) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse between
expression(s) is (are) : (2015)
1 p-2
dl 1 the lines x= and x=1 is
(a) dx = 1 - 3x 2 for x1 > 1 2 16 2
1 1
34. Define the collections {E1, E2, E3…………..} of ellipses and
dm x1 {R1, R2, R3…………..} of rectangles as follows:
(b) dx = for x1 > 1
1 3 x12 -1
x2 y2
E1 : + = 1;
9 4
dl 1
(c) dx = 1 + 3x 2 for x 1 > 1 R1: rectangle of largest area with sides parallel to the axes,
1 1
inscribed in E1:
dm 1
(d) = for y1 > 0 x2 y2
dy1 3 En: ellipse + = 1 of largest area inscribed in Rn–1,
an2 bn2
32. Let P be the point on the parabola y2 = 4x which is at the
n>1
shortest distance from the center S of the circle x2 + y2 – 4x
– 16y + 64 = 0. Let Q be the point on the circle dividing the Rn: rectangle of largest area, with sides parallel to the
line segment SP internally. Then (2016) axes, inscribed in En, n >1
Then which of the following options is/are correct ?
(a) SP = 2 5
(2019)
(b) SQ : QP = 5 +1 : 2 (a) The eccentricities of E18 and E19 are NOT equal
(c) the x-intercept of the normal to the parabola at P is 6 1
(b) The length of latus rectum of E9 is
1 6
(d) the slope of the tangent to the circle at Q is
2 N

33. Consider two straight lines, each of which is tangent to (c) å (area of R ) < 24 , for each positive integer N
n
n -1

1
both the circle x 2 + y 2 = and the parabola y2 = 4x. Let
2 5
(d) The distance of a focus from the centre in E9 is
these lines intersect at the point Q. Consider the ellipse 32
whose center is at the origin O(0,0) and whose semi-major
35. Let a and b be positive real numbers such that a >1 and
axis is OQ. If the length of the minor axis of this ellipse is
b < a. Let P be a point in the first quadrant that lies on the
2, then which of the following statement(s) is (are)
x2 y 2
TRUE? (2018) hyperbola - = 1. Suppose the tangent to the
a2 b 2
1 hyperbola at P passes through the point (1,0), and
(a) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length
2 suppose the normal to the hyperbola at P cuts off equal
intercepts on the coordinate axes. Let D denote the area
of the latus rectum is 1
of the triangle formed by the tangent at P, the normal
1 at P and the x-axis. If e denotes the eccentricity of the
(b) For the ellipse, the eccentricity is and the length of hyperbola, then which of the following statements is/are
2
TRUE? (2020)
1
the latus rectum is (a) 1 < e < 2 (b)
2 2 <e < 2

(c) D = a 4 (d) D = b4
CONIC SECTIONS 156

Numerical Value Type Questions Match the Following

Each question has two columns. Four options are given

representing matching of elements from Column-I and
x 2 y2
36. The line 2x + y = 1 is tangent to the hyperbola - =1. Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
a 2 b2 to a correct matching.For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching.
If this line passes through the point of intersection of the
nearest directrix and the x-axis, then the eccentricity of the x2 y2
41. Let H : - = 1, where a > b > 0, be a hyperbola in
hyperbola is..... (2010) a2 b2
the xy-plane whose conjugate axis LM subtends an angle
37. Consider the parabola y2 = 8x. Let D1 be the area of the
of 60° at one of its vertices N. Let the area of the triangle
triangle formed by the end points of its latusrectum and
LMN be 4 3 . (2018)

1 (A) The length of the conjugate axis of H is (P) 8

the point P æç , 2 ö÷ on the parabola and D2 be the area of
è2 ø 4
(B) The ecentricity of H is (Q)
3
the triangle formed by drawing tangents at P and at the
2
D (C) The distance between the foci of H is (R)
end points of the latusrectum. Then 1 is.... (2011) 3
D2
(D) The length of the latus rectum of H is (S) 4
The correct matching is :
38. If the normal of the parabola y2 = 4x drawn at the end
(a) (A-S, B-R, C-P, D-Q )
points of its latus rectum are tangents to the circle
(b) (A-Q, B-P, C-Q, D-S )
(x - 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = r2, then the value of r2 is (2015)
(c) (A-S, B-Q, C-Q, D-P )
39. Let the curve C be the mirror image of the parabola y2 = 4x (d) (A-Q, B-S, C-Q, D-P )
with respect to the line x + y + 4 = 0. If A and B are the
points of intersection of C with the line y = -5, then the Using the following passage, solve Q.42 and Q.43

distance between A and B is (2015) Passage – 1

x 2 y2 x 2 y2
40. Suppose that the foci of the ellipse + =1 are (f1, 0) The circle x2 + y2 – 8x = 0 and hyperbola - =1
9 5 9 4
intersect at the points A and B. (2010)
and (f2, 0) where f1 > 0 and f2 < 0. Let P1 and P2 be two
42. Equation of a common tangent with positive slope to the
parabolas with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with foci at
circle as well as to the hyperbola is
(f1, 0) and (2f2, 0), respectively. Let T1 be a tangent to P1
(a) 2x - 5 y - 20 = 0 (b) 2x - 5 y + 4 = 0
which passes through (2f2, 0) and T2 be a tangent to P2
which passes through (f1, 0). If m1 is the slope of T1 and m2 (c) 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 (d) 4x – 3y + 4 = 0
43. Equation of the circle with AB as its diameter is
æ 1 2ö (a) x2 + y2 – 12x + 24 = 0
is the slope of T 2, then the value of ç m 2 + m 2 ÷ is
è 1 ø (b) x2 + y2 + 12x + 24 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 + 24x – 12 = 0
(2015) (d) x2 + y2 –24x – 12 = 0
CONIC SECTIONS 157

Using the following passage, solve Q.44 and Q.45

æ 1ö
46. The tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) at ç 3, ÷ is
è 2ø
Passage – 2
found to be 3x + 2y = 4, then which of the following
Let F1(x1, 0) and F2(x2, 0), for x1 < 0 and x2 > 0, be the foci
options is the only CORRECT combination ?
2 2
x y (a) (IV) (iii) (S) (b) (II) (iii) (R)
of the ellipse + = 1. Suppose a parabola having
9 8 (c) (IV) (iv) (S) (d) (II) (iv) (R)
vertex at the origin and focus at F2 intersects the ellipse 47. If a tangent to a suitable conic (Column 1) is found to be
at point M in the first quadrant and at point N in the y = x + 8 and its point of contact is (8, 16), then which of
fourth quadrant. (2016) the following options is the only CORRECT combination?

44. The orthocentre of the triangle F1MN is (a) (III) (i) (P) (b) (I) (ii) (Q)
(c) (II) (iv) (R) (d) (III) (ii) (Q)
æ 9 ö æ2 ö
(a) ç - ,0 ÷ (b) ç ,0 ÷ 48. For a = 2, if a tangent is drawn to suitable conic
è 10 ø è3 ø
(Column 1) at the point of contact (–1, 1), then which of
the following options is the only CORRECT combination
æ 9 ö æ2 ö for obtaining its equation?
(c) ç ,0 ÷ (d) ç , 6 ÷
è 10 ø è3 ø (a) (II) (ii) (Q) (b) (I) (i) (P)
45. If the tangents to the ellipse at M and N meet at R and the (c) (I) (ii) (Q) (d) (III) (i) (P)
normal to the parabola at M meets the x-axis at Q, then the
ratio of area of the triangle MQR to area of the quadrilateral Subjective Type
MF1NF2 is 49. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle inscribed in the circle
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 5 x2 + y2 = a2. Suppose perpendiculars from A, B, C to the
(c) 5 : 8 (d) 2 : 3 x2 y2
major axis of the ellipse + = 1, (a > b) meets the
a2 b2
Using the following passage, solve Q.46 to Q.48 ellipse respectively at P, Q, R so that P, Q, R lie on the same
side of the major axis as A, B, C respectively. Prove that,
Passage – 3 the normals to the ellipse drawn at the points P, Q and R
are concurrent. (2000)
Columns 1, 2 and 3 contain conics, equations of tangents to the conics
and points of contact, respectively. 50. Let C1 and C2 be, respectively, the parabola x2 = y – 1 and
y2 = x – 1. Let P be any point on C1 and Q be any point on
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
C2. Let P1 and Q1 be the reflections of P and Q, respectively,
æ a 2a ö with respect to the line y = x. Prove that P1 lies on C2, Q1
(I) x2 + y2 = a 2 (i) my = m2x + a (P) ç 2 , ÷ lies on C1 and PQ ³ min {PP1, QQ1}. Hence or otherwise,
èm mø
determine points P0 and Q0 on the parabolas C1 and C2
æ -ma a ö respectivley such the P0Q0 £ PQ for all pairs of points
(II) x2 + a2y2 = a2 (ii) y = mx + a m 2 + 1 (Q) çç , ÷÷ (P, Q) with P on C1 and Q on C2. (2000)
2 2
è m +1 m +1 ø

x2 y2
æ -a 2 m 1 ö 51. Let P be a point on the ellipse + = 1, 0 < b < a. Let
(III) y2 = 4ax (iii) y = mx + a 2 m 2 - 1 (R) ç
ç 2 2
è a m +1
, ÷
÷
a 2 m2 + 1 ø a2 b2
the line parallel to y–axis passing through P meet the circle
æ -a 2 m
ç ,
-1 ö
÷
x2 + y2 = a2 at the point Q such that P and Q are on the
(IV) x2 –a 2y2 = a2 (iv) y = mx + a 2m 2 + 1 (S) ç 2 2 ÷
è a m -1 a 2m2 - 1 ø same side of x–axis. For two positive real numbers r and s,
find the locus of the point R on PQ such that PR : RQ = r : s
(2017)
as P varies over the ellipse. (2001)
CONIC SECTIONS 158

52. Prove that, in an ellipse, the perpendicular from a focus 55. Find the equation of the common tangent in 1st quadrant
upon any tangent and the line joining the centre of the
ellipse of the point of contact meet on the corresponding x 2 y2
to the circle x2 + y2 = 16 and the ellipse + = 1. Also
directrix. (2002) 25 4
53. Normals are drawn from the point P with slopes m1, m2, m3 find the length of the intercept of the tangent between the
to the parabola y2 = 4x. If locus of P with m1m2 = a is a part coordinate axes. (2005)
of the parabola itself, then find a. (2003) 56. Tangents are drawn from any point on the hyperbola
54. At any point P on the parabola y2 – 2y – 4x + 5 = 0 a x 2 y2
tangent is drawn which meets the directrix at Q. Find the - = 1 to the circle x2 + y2 = 9. Find the locus of mid
9 4
locus of point R, which divides QP externally in the ratio
point of the chord of contact. (2005)
1
: 1. (2004)
2

CONIC SECTIONS

Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
Teacher’s Note:

Mathematics is the most beautiful and most powerful creation of

human being, you love mathematics and it will open the doors to

success and happiness in your life.

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Pulkit Sir loves teaching Mathematics, he has been a

pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE and Olympiads.
He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7
(JEE ADVANCED), and thousands of more students who
have successfully cleared these competitive exams
in the last few years.
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 STRAIGHT LINES
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (3) 4. (4) 5. (c) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (c)
6. (4) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (2) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (2) 15. (a) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (b) 17. (7) 18. (25) 19. (4) 20. (10) 16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (1) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (d) 25. (34) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b, d) 24. (a) 25. (c)
26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (b) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (2) 34. (d) 35. (b) 31. (a) 32. 5.00 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a)
36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (2.4) 39. (2) 40. (c) 36. (b) 37. (d) 38. (30.00) 39. (0.5)
41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (a) 40. (c) 41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b)
46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (a) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (b)
56. (c) 57. (2) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (c) 65. (1.5)
66. (8) 67. (a) 68. (b) 69. (a) 70. (c)
71. (a) 72. (a) 73. (a) 74. (d) 75. (c)
76. (d) 77. (d) 78. (a) 79. (2) 80. (c)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (c) 84. (c) 85. (d)
ANSWER KEY 161
CHAPTER -1 STRAIGHT LINES

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (a) 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (a) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c) 11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (6) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a) 18. (18) 19. y = ± 2x + 1
21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c)
26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (b)
36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (c)
46. (c) 47. (a, b)48. (a, b, d) 49. (a,c)
50. (a, d) 51. (a, c) 52. (a, d) 53. (a, b, c, d)
54. (c) 55. (a) 56. (b) 57. (d) 58. (c)
59. (b) 60. (c) 61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (c)

64. (b) 65. (b) 67. | x + y - 2 |

7
68. [–a, a (t1 + t2 + t3 + t1t2t3)]
69. 32 sq. unit
70. 14x + 23y – 40 = 0
71. x = 2 and 3x + 4y = 18

æ p 3p ö
72. ç , ÷
è2 2 ø

73. ( 4 + 5) x - (2 5 + 3) y + (4 5 + 2) = 0

180 468
74. 3x - 4 y = , 12 x - 5 y =
130 130
75. 4x + 4y + 9x – y = 0
2 2

76. a > 5
77. First
78. 7y = x + 2
79. (1, 1)
80. False
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 CIRCLES
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (4) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (–4.00) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b)
6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (b) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (d) 12. (2.83) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. 210.00
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (a) 21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (a)
26. (15) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (14.42) 26. (d) 27. 5.00 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a)
30. (1.00) 31. (d) 32. (16) 33. (b) 34. (d) 31. 2.00 32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (009.00)
35. (b) 36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (8.94) 36. (003.00) 37. (c) 38. 007.00
39. (b) 40. (c) 41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (c) 39. (d) 40. (c) 41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (c)
44. (a) 45. (a) 46. (d) 47. (40) 48. (75) 44. 36.00
49. (7.68)50. (d) 51. (d) 52. (c)
53. (b) 54. (b) 55. (90) 56. (a) 57. (d)
58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (b) 61. (c) 62. (b)
63. (d) 64. (b) 65. (4) 66. (4) 67. (d)
68. (b) 69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (b) 72. (–1.25)
73. (–18) 74. (d) 75. (b) 76. (a) 77. (c)
78. (a) 79. (a) 80. (b) 81. (a)
ANSWER KEY 163

CHAPTER -2 CIRCLES
EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (b) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (a,c) 15. (b,c)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a) 16. (a,b,c) 17. (a,c) 18. (8) 19. (2)
21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (b) 20. (10.00) 21. (2.00) 22. (a) 23. (c)
26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (a) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (c)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (b) 29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (d)
36. (c) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (b)
34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. 3 3 + 10
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (a,c,d) 44. (b,c)
45. (a,c) 46. (b,d) 47. (a,d) 48. (b,c) 49. (a,c,d)
38. (Ellipse) 39. 2 x + 2 y - 10 x - 5 y + 1 = 0
2 2

50. (a,d) 51. (a,b) 52. (b,d) 53. (0001)

54. (0949) 55. (0) 56. (2) 57. (b)
58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (c) 61. (d) 62. (a)
63. (a) 64. (b) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b)
68. (d) 69. (b) 70. (a)
2 2
æ 4ö æ1ö
74. ç x + ÷ + y = ç ÷ and ( x - 4) + y = (3)
2 2 2 2

è 3ø è3ø
 Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 CONIC SECTIONS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (c) 2. (4) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (4) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (2) 9. (b) 10. (b) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (2) 14. (c) 15. (a) 11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c) 16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (0) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (b) 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (c)
26. (d) 27. (24) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (d) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (a)
31. (a) 32. (14) 33. (a) 34. (5) 35. (90) 31. (5.00)32. (d) 33. (d) 34. (c)
36. (60) 37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (b) 35. (9.00)36. (d) 37. (d) 38. (d)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (a) 45. (d) 39. (1.25) 40. (a) 41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (b)
46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (a) 49. (c) 50. (1) 44. (a) 45. (d) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (d) 55. (b) 49. (b) 50. (c) 51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (d)
56. (2) 57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (b) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (d) 65. (2) 59. (a) 60. (b) 61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (a)
66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (c) 69. (b) 70. (a) 64. (d) 65. (a) 66. (004.00) 67. (c)
71. (a) 72. (d) 73. (12) 74. (b) 75. (c) 68. (c) 69. (b) 70. (c) 71. (d) 72. (d)
76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (16) 80. (3) 73. (a) 74. (d) 75. (a) 76. (c) 77. (d)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (d) 85. (d) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (a) 81. (d) 82. (c)
86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (4) 89. (8) 90. (9) 83. (0.5) 84. (d) 85. (b) 86. (c)
91. (b) 92. (a) 93. (a) 94. (a) 95. (a)
96. (24) 97. (d) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (b)
ANSWER KEY 165
CHAPTER -3 CONIC SECTIONS
EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (b) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (c)
6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (b) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (c) 21. (a) 22. (a,b) 23. (b,c) 24. (a,d) 25. (a,b)
26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (d) 30. (a) 26. (c,d) 27. (a,b,d) 28. (b,d) 29. (a,d)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (d) 30. (a,b) 31. (a,b,d) 32. (a,c,d)
36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (b) 33. (a,c) 34. (b,c) 35. (a,d) 36. (2) 37. (2)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (c) 45. (b) 38. (r2=2) 39. (AB=4) 40. (4) 41. (a)
46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c) 49. (a) 50. (a) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (a) 45. (c) 46. (d)
51. (d) 52. (a,c) 53. (a,b) 54. (a,b,c,d) 47. (a) 48. (c)
55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (a,b,c,d) 57. (a,b,c)
æ1 5ö æ5 1ö
58. (b,c) 59. (a,d) 60. (a,b,d) 61. (0228) 50. P0 ç , ÷ , Q0 ç , ÷
62. (12) 63. (0900) 64. (0027) è2 4ø è4 2ø
65. (145) 66. (50) 67. (0016)68. (a) 2
69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (c) 73. (a) x2 y2 r + s
51. + =1
74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (d) 77. (b) 78. (c) a2 ar + bs
2

79. (d) 80. (b) 81. y2 = 2 (x – 4) 82. (1/9,1/9)

53. (a=2)
54. ((x + 1) (y – 1)2 + 4 = 0)

2x 7 14 3
55. y = - +4 ,
3 3 3

2
x 2 y2 x 2 + y2
56. - =
9 4 81
Note